Home

RX Debug - Renesas Electronics

1. 3 4 Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Open File or Open with Encoding Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder which contains the file you want to open When you first open this dialog box C Documents and Settings user name My Documents will be selected After the second time the last selected folder will be shown by default 2 File List area This area shows the list of files that meet the conditions specified in Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the file to be opened R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 438 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be opened All files All formats Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cc cp C language source file Header file h hpp inc Head
2. Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following 1 Searching at the instruction level 2 Searching at the source level 1 Searching at the instruction level Search for trace data at the instruction level After selecting the Instruction Level tab follow the procedure below to perform a search R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 148 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a b Figure 2 137 Searching for Trace Data at Instruction Level Trace Search Source Level Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address Access Status Data Search range Number Search Backward Search Forward Specifying the Fetch Address Specify a fetch address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The fetch address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontrollers address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Als
3. Condition from the context menu Caution Address values of access related events cannot be changed in the Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box To change address values delete the subject event and then set a new event R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 176 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Editing address conditions In the Compare condition property in the Address Condition category specify a comparison condition from the drop down list Depending on the specified comparison condition the following address conditions can be set in combination with the address values displayed in the Address property in the Address category lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt When No conditions is specified The address value is made the condition When an access to the address value occurs the condition holds true When Address area is specified E1 E20 The address value is made the start address Enter an end address value in the End address property that is added in the Address Condition category When access to any place in the range of start and end addresses set occurs the condition holds true Also in the Area condition property that is added the same way it is possible to set outside of the address range for the address condition Cautions 1 RX200 Series Comparison conditions based on an address area are not supported 2 RX600 Series Yo
4. R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 289 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows a register name Double clicking the icon or clicking the or mark displays or hides the low level register names names representing part of a register Shows a register name name representing part of a register The displayed category and register names are as follows The number of the marks at the beginning of each register name denotes the depth of the hierarchical level of displayed registers Table A 2 General Registers Category and Register Names RX Register name alias Bit width Register name alias Bit width Table A 3 Control Registers Category and Register Names RX Register name alias Bit width Register name alias Bit width ISP FPSwNote 2 USP FS INTB FX PC FU PSW FZ IPL FO PM FV U EX EU O EZ S EO Z EV C DN BPC CE BPSW CX FINTV CU R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 290 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Register name alias Bit width Register name alias Bit width Notes 1 The bit width is 3 bits for the RX610 Group 2 FPSW register is not supported by the RX210 Group This area has the f
5. Read Write The specified type of access is a read and a write Access size Specify the access size Default Depends on selected event Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No access size is specified True for all access sizes Byte The specified access size is a byte Word The specified access size is a word Long word The specified access size is a long word R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 405 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Compare condition APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify data comparison condition This property is not displayed when No conditions is specified in the Access size property Default Equal Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Equal True when data matches specified value Not equal True when data does not match specified value Inverse sign True when the sign is inverted between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time Notet Difference True when the difference between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time exceeds a specified value Notet Greater than gt True when data is greater than specified value Less Than lt True when data is smaller than specified value Greater than or equal to
6. 1 01 01 012 00 12 00 12 00 012 345 00 12 00 45 03 00 00 12 03 45 000 12 000345 00 00 12 45 03 00 00 00 12 00 03 45 Function buttons Button Function Writes a pattern of specified initialization data into a specified address range of memory repeatedly If the end address is reached in the middle of this pattern the write process is terminated Cancel Nullifies settings for memory value initialization and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 373 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search dialog box This dialog box searches for memory values See 5 Searching for memory contents A search is performed in either the Memory value area or Character string area in which the caret on the Memory panel was present immediately before this dialog box is opened Figure A 52 Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search 1 4 Search Data 2 f Search Range Specify address range 3 Address v Oxttttfftt Function buttons 4 Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Choose Find from the context menu on Memory panel Description of each area 1 Search Data area Specify the data to search Enter directly in the text box specifiable in up to 2
7. Before Execution sub c 101 0x204 Display lt Generation condition gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt form 2 Display Before Execution funcA 0x12 0x102 example Combination break Display lt Combination condition gt Generation condition form lt Detailed information on combination break gt Execution related Access related E1 E20 Display OR example After execution main c 100 0x300 After execution funcA 0x10 0x100 Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 0x7 Read Write sub2 c variable3 0x300 0x303 0x8 Unconditional Trace Display form Display example R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 339 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Type of event Run Break Timer Display form APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displayed content Note1 Total lt Total execution time gt Display example Total 1000ms Total OVERFLOW Display form 2 Total lt Total execution time gt Execution Cycle Count lt Total number of cycles executed gt Execution Instruction Count lt total number of instructions executed gt Simulator Display example Total 3300ns Execution Cycle Count 330 Execution Instruction Count 200 Trace Generation condition Execution related Access related E1 E20 Display form Start lt Combination condition for trace start gt End lt Combination condition for trace end gt Start End lt T
8. Displays action events Printf event interrupt event Simulator Ee ENE Displays built in events unconditional trace event or Run Break timer event 2 17 3 Jump to an event address By clicking one of the following buttons it is possible to jump to the relevant panel corresponding to the address of a currently selected event However these buttons are disabled when a trace event timer measurement event or a built in event unconditional trace event or Run Break timer event is selected The Editor panel opens with the caret on it moved to the source line corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set The Disassemble panel opens with the caret on it moved to the disassembled result corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set The Memory panel opens with the caret on it moved to the memory value corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set 2 17 4 Editing detailed settings of events This section describes how to edit detailed settings of various events For information on editing of timer measurement events see 3 Editing a timer measurement event E1 E20 For information on editing of action events Printf events and interrupt events see 2 16 Set an Action into Programs 1 Editing execution related events 2 Editing access related events 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 1 Editing execution related events
9. Note 5 Label name te 5 EQU symbol name and immediate value address Address of a label a value of an EQU symbol and an immediate Integer constant Address Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variable 2 Ifthe register is assigned the value of a C variable an error results 3 The expression that is input as an index to an array is parsed as a watch expression 4 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 197 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 If the label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g I REG to distinguish it from the keyword I that indicates an imaginary number From Table 2 29 Basic Input Format of Address Expressions the following address expressions with operator can be constructed Table 2 30 Construction of Address Expressions with Operators Expression Description Expression Specifies the order in which operations are performed Expression Inverts symbol Expression Logical negation Expression Bit inversion Expression ExpressionN Multiplication Expression Expression Division Expression ExpressionN Remainder calculation Expression
10. Suspend event The subject event is held pending Notes 1 The files specified to be the subject of a build process in the main project or a subproject cannot be removed from the subject files to be downloaded They are by default automatically registered as the download files For details about the downloadable file formats see Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats 2 This applies to only the event set position without debug information If debug information is available the event set position always moves to the beginning of a source text line 2 Debug Information This category displays detailed information on debug information and changes debug settings Execute to the Specify whether or not to execute the program up to a specified symbol position after the CPU is specified symbol after reset CPU Reset Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes The program is executed up to a specified symbol position value No The program is not executed after the CPU is reset R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 243 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specified symbol Specify the position at which the program executed after the reset of the CPU is halted Note that this property is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property Default _main How to By e
11. Download File Sett Hook Transaction Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you can configure the connection with the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Internal ROM RAM b Endian c Clock d Peripheral Function Simulation a Internal ROM RAM The size of internal ROM RAM of the selected microcontroller is displayed in this category Figure 2 44 Internal ROM RAM Category Simulator E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes e hilh lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to simulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 42 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM KBytes The internal RAM size to simulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property b Endian You can configure endian in this category Figure 2 45 Endian Category Simulator E Endian Endian of CPU Little endian data lt 1 gt Endian of CPU Specify the endian for the CPU By default the endian selected in the build tool property is displayed Caution You cannot change this
12. Newline code Windows CR LF 3 gt Reload the file with these settings Function buttons i This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select File name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode area Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 368 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Newline code area Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked Does not reload the file whe
13. 12 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine 12 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool 14 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use 14 2 3 2 E1 15 2 3 3 E20 28 2 3 4 Simulator 42 2 4 Connect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool 49 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite 49 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite 50 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG 51 2 5 Download and Upload 53 2 5 1 Execute downloading 53 2 5 2 An applied method of download 56 2 5 3 Executing an upload 65 2 6 Displaying and Changing Programs 67 2 6 1 Displaying source files 67 2 6 2 Displaying the disassembled result 76 2 6 3 Executing a build in parallel with other processes 79 2 6 4 Performing line assembly 80 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function 82 2 7 1 Changing the allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function 83 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections 85 2 8 1 Selecting the priority section 86 2 9 Execute Programs 88 2 9 1 Reset microcontroller CPU 88 2 9 2 Execute programs 88 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps 90 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 91 2 10 Stop Programs Break 94 2 10 1 Stop the program manually 94 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 94 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 96
14. Download File Settings tab Hook Transaction Settings tab Edit menu Property Panel Only Items Cancels the editing work on a property value that you ve done immediately before Cuts a selected character string and moves it to the clipboard if you use this menu while editing a property value Copy Copies the character string of a selected property value to the clipboard Paste Inserts the content of the clipboard into place if you use this menu while editing a property value Delete Deletes a selected character string if you use this menu while editing a property value Select All Selects the whole character string representing the value of a selected property if you use this menu while editing a property value Context menu Except when editing a character string Reset to Default Reverts the set value of a selected property item to the default Reset All to Default Reverts all set values on the currently selected tab to the default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 215 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE When editing a character string Cancels the editing work on a property value that you ve done immediately before Cuts a selected character string and moves it to the clipboard if you use this menu while editing a property value Copy Copies the character string of a selected property value to the clipboard Paste
15. Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the encode in which values are displayed ASCII Displays string variables in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code EUC JP Displays string variables in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays string variables in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret on it moved to the address from which the function indicated by a selected line is called Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel with the caret on it moved to the source line from which the function indicated by a selected line is called Jump to Local Variable at This Time Opens the Local Variables panel that displays local variables for the function indicated by a selected line R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 325 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace panel This panel displays the trace data which has had an execution history of the program recorded in it see 2 13 Collecting an Execution History Although the trace data is displayed by default in a disassembled text and source text mixed mode it is possible to display either one of these text by selecting the desired Display mode The display position is automatically updated after program execution is halted s
16. 2 The PC value can be displayed in the status bar at any update interval during program execution See e Current PC position 1 Execute after resetting microcontroller CPU You can reset the CPU and start the execution of the program from the reset address Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met see 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 and 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Other break factors have occurred Remark This operation is the same as when the button is clicked after clicking the button 2 Execute from the current address Perform any of the following operations to start executing the program from the address at the current PC value a Normal execution Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met
17. 500 is specified by default Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the Update the display during execution property from No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Enable the automatic update of realtime display Specify whether to set RRM area automatically This property is displayed only when you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in the Usage of trace function property If you have selected Trace there No is displayed instead Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution c Register In this category make settings related to PC display in the Status bar during program execution Figure 2 37 Register Category E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 lt 1 gt PC display during the execution This property specifies whether the PC value is displayed in the Status bar during program execution When you select No the status bar under execution will show Running Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 2 gt Display update interval for PC ms This property is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the PC display during the execution property During program execution specify a PC display updating interval in the status bar in 100 ms units Enter an integer directly in th
18. All accessible sizes Accessible sizes in bit units are enumerated in increasing order by separating each with a comma Shows the size of each I O register If displayable in byte units the size is shown in bytes if displayable in bit units the size is shown in bits with the respective units given Examples 1 Forthe IOR R W 1 8 1 byte case This refers to an I O register that is read writable accessible in 1 bit and 8 bits and 1 byte in size 2 For the IOR R W 1 1 bit case This refers to an I O register that is read writable accessible in 1 bit and 1 bit in size Remark The type information is sorted in order of character code by clicking the header part of this area 5 Address area This area displays the addresses to which the I O registers are mapped always shown in hexadecimal However the bit registers displayed here are given bit offset values as shown in the examples below Examples 1 For the OxFF40 case This register is mapped to OxFF40 2 For the OxFF40 4 case This is a bit register mapped to bit 4 of the address 0xF F40 Remark The addresses are sorted in ascending order of numeric value by clicking the header part of this area Toolbar Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display No data are reloaded for the I O registers protected against read However this button is disabled during program execution Resets the highlighting for a selec
19. Connect Se look Transaction Settings R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 228 of 471 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 13 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E20 Serial RX600 Series Property Sl AX E20 Serial Property Memory Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms Enable the automatic update of realtime display E Register PC display during the execution Display update interval for PC ms E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops E Trace Usage of trace function Operation after Trace data type External trace output Trace memor Output timestamp Trace clock count source MHz E Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz 1 gt full race memory i ze MByte Yes No 500 Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Real time RAM monitor verwrite trace memory and continue executior Data ac
20. CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Import watch expressions Import the file that was exported in a to the Watch panel On the Watch panel to which you want to import watch expressions select Import Watch Expression from the context menu On the Open Watch Expression Data File dialog box that is automatically opened specify the exported file and then click the Open button Remark If watch expressions have been already registered then imported watch expressions will be registered at the bottom of them Figure 2 126 Import of Watch Expressions Open Watch Expression Data File O sample DefaultBuild ste My Recent BL Watch_Export csy Documents Desktop My Documents gs My Computer My Network File name Watch _Export csv j Files of type Importable CS Comma Separated Variables csv W 9 Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions By choosing Save Watch Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of watch expressions and values in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite reloads the values of watch expressions and saves the latest values thus obtained Note that if arrays pointer type variables structures unions or registers only those that are assigned section names are displayed in expanded form the values of their expansion elements are also saved
21. Hl ILL 3 4 9 8 9 10 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 248 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 21 Editor Panel When Code Coverage Measurement Result Is Displayed Simulator aye 2f Sample c Toolbar 80 AL gt a an Columns void main void Start user code f EEEE558 P a gt f ffE55c ffifes6eo while 10 E frreeses go fEff8568 func2 End user code l I I 3 4 5 8 9 10 Figure A 22 Editor Panel When Mixed Display Mode is Selected M 2f Sample c Toolbar EN La aA Columns Line 444 Address Op Code Label 25 void main void 26 27 Start user code 28 29 ffZf8558 05330000 BSR A _TMPO Start 30 TMP1 Start ff ffS55c 05300000 BSR A _TMP1 Start 31 f Zf8560 052d0000 BSR A _AD Start 32 33 while 10 34 35 fEFEFe564 05380000 _funcl func2 ffZf8568 05350000 _func2 ffffes c 2ef8 _main CH End user code This section describes the following How to open Description of each area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 249 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Editor panel dedicated items Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items Window menu Editor panel dedicated items Context menu How to open Automatically opens after downlo
22. Page 229 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 15 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E20 JTAG RX600 Series Property RX E20 TAG Property 1 E Memory Memory mappings 20 Verify on writing to memory Yes 2 E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interval ms 500 Enable the automatic update of realtime display Yes 3 gt E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 4 E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break 5 E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Real time RAM monitor erwrite t data type External trace output gt mer e MByte Output timestamp Trace clock count source MHz 7 E Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz Data access CPU execution Yes 12 5000 No 25 0000 Trace Debug Tool Settings R Property Sl RX Simulator Property 1 _ gt E Memory Memory mappings 16 2 gt E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Yes _D
23. Record R W Value Sets a point trace event that when the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register is accessed for read write causes the accessed value to be recorded in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to end upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel and displays acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function However this is disabled while the tracer is operating R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 286 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Timer Settings APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the following cascaded menu to set a timer related event see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a se
24. Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the line at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint No 1 Set Software Break E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the line at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint No 1 Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a break event with write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Combination Break E1 E20 Sets a break at the caret position s address or the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a
25. b Setting the properties of a download file to add In the Download file property area select a download file you want to add and set its download conditions For each displayed item make the following setting When setting is completed the file name you ve specified here is reflected in the blank item in the Download file list area Specify a file in load module format to add specifiable in up to 259 characters Default Blank Method to change By entering directly from the keyboard or specifying in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button displayed at the right edge of this property when it is selected Specifiable values See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats File type Download object Specify the file type of a download file to add Here select Load module file Default Load module file Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Yes Downloads object information No Does not download object information Download symbol information Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified file Note 1 Default Yes Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Yes Downloads symbol information No Does not download symbol inform
26. button in the toolbar it is possible to set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar of this panel By choosing Print from the File menu it is possible to print the picture image currently being displayed on this panel 2 Figure A 25 Disassemble Panel When Displayed in Mixed Display Mode Disassemble1 Toolbar zefda void tutorial void _tutorial main ffffS5561 6e 68 R6 R6 fLLLfS563 710006 28H RO p_sam amp g Sample 0000100 init p sam ef71 05670000 BSR A for i 0 i lt 10 i R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 278 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 26 Disassemble Panel When Mixed Display Mode is Turned Off Disassemble Toolbar fELLS55c fLLfLssst Zefa _main _tutorial fLLLfS561 6e66 R6 RS ffff8563 7100 8 28H RO f LLLfS566 b7204100000 0000100 ffffS556c ef71 R7 R1 ffff856e 05670000 TELLGS74 ffff85576 05250100 ffff857a 7e21 jiii 1 2 3 Figure A 27 Disassemble Panel When Code Coverage Measurement Result is Displayed Simulator Disassemble Toolbar E gt ffffesse ffff855f _tutorial ffff8561 ffff8563 ffff8566 ffff856c ffff856e ffff8572 ff 8574 ffff8576 ffff557a Mi This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Disassemble Panel Only Items Edit me
27. button which appears on the right end of the setting field after selecting Memory Mapping property See the section for the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator for details on how to configure the parameters Figure 2 49 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box a rl 19 E 0 Internal RAM area 1 Non map area b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 50 Access Memory While Running Category Simulator E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 lt 1 gt Update display during the execution Specify from the drop down list whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program execution Select Yes to update the display default Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 2 gt Display update interval ms This property is displayed only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up th
28. rom Psect01 ram01 Psect02 ram02 Psect03 ram03 The rom option reserves section ramXx which is as large as the PsectXx section and relocates the symbols defined in the PsectXx section to the corresponding addresses in the ramxXxX section XX 01 02 or 03 in this example Remark For setting of overlay sections by the build tool refer to Chapter 2 Functions in CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Build Figure 2 89 Allocation of Overlay Sections Memory space 0x0000 0x1000 0x2000 0x3000 Overlay sections Runtime section Runtime section Runtime section for Psect01 for Psect02 for Psect03 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 85 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 1 Selecting the priority section The priority section can be selected under the Debug Information category on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 90 Debug Information Category E Debug information Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol main Specify the debugged overlay section D 1 Specify the debugged overlay section Yes is displayed when overlay sections exist in the load module this cannot be changed 2 Overlay sections Address groups where overlay sections exist are displayed This property only appears when Yes is displayed on the Specify the debugged overl
29. 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings Download File Settings Hook Transaction Settings Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you configure the connection with the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Internal ROM RAM b Clock c Connection with Emulator d Connection with Target Board e Flash f Operating Modes of CPU g External Flash a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this category R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 16 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Figure 2 8 Internal ROM RAM Category E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property Size of DataFlash memory KBytes The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate th
30. 4 S DISCONNECT This section describes the following How to open Description of each area How to open Choose All Programs from Windows Start menu and then select Renesas Electronics CubeSuite and then CubeSuite R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 203 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar The debug related menu items are described below Remark The items drawn from each menu can be customized using the User Settings dialog box a View Each item on View menu and their functionality are as follows default Shows the following cascaded menu to open the Watch panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Watch1 Opens the Watch panel Watch1 Watch2 Opens the Watch panel Watch2 Watch3 Opens the Watch panel Watch3 Watch4 Opens the Watch panel Watch4 Local Variable Opens the Local Variables panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Call Stack Opens the Call Stack panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Memory Shows the following cascaded menu to open the Memory panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool
31. Case insensitive for alphabets In the input area with the mark prefix Ox is not needed 4 Expression and operator Expression represents constants CPU register name I O register name and symbols and those connected with operators An expression comes in two types an address expression and a watch expression The expression that requires the address of a symbol is referred to as an address expression and the one that requires the value of a symbol is referred to as a watch expression a An address expression and operators With an address expression the address of a symbol is used to perform operations Only when a CPU register name is written the value of the symbol is used to perform operations The basic input formats of address expressions are as follows Table 2 29 Basic Input Format of Address Expressions Expression Description Name of a C C language variableN 1No Address of a C C language variable Note 3 Expression Expression Address of an array Note 4 Expression Member name Address of a structure union class member Note 4 Expression gt Member name Address of a structure union class member that is pointed to Watch expression Cast expression Address of the pointer to a member variable Watch expression gt Cast expression Address of the pointer to a member variable Name of a CPU register Value of the CPU register Name of an I O register Address of the I O register
32. Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box 395 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 463 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box 409 Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box 162 392 Disassemble display mode 147 329 Disassemble panel 278 Disassembled text 76 278 Display form of watch expressions 314 Display function call information from the stack 132 Display call stack information 132 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information 133 Displaying and changing memory registers and variables 106 Displaying and changing global and static variables 123 Displaying and changing local variables 123 Displaying and changing memory contents 106 Displaying and changing the CPU registers 118 Displaying and changing the I O registers 120 Displaying and changing watch expressions 125 Displaying and changing programs 67 Displaying source files 67 Displaying the disassembled result 76 Executing a build in parallel with other processes 79 Performing line assembly 80 Displaying the disassembled result 76 DMM Dynamic Memory Modification function 109 Download 27 41 53 242 Download condition 58 355 Download Files dialog box 355 Downloadable File Formats 56 E Editor panel 248 Emulator firmware 49 Encoding 368 Enc
33. In the case of a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all the source lines instructions in the function are treated as one step and the program will be executed until reaching the position to which it returns from the function step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when a jump to subroutine instruction has been executed Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step over execution In the case of other than a jump to subroutine instruction operation is the same as when the button is clicked Caution If Step over execution is performed for the longjmp function execution processing may not complete and may wait for a time out 3 Execute until return is completed Return Out execution Step execute the program so that the program will stop when it returns from the current function to the calling function When the execution of source line instruction that require checking has been completed you can perform step execution using this instruction so that you can make the program return to the calling function without step executing the remaining instructions inside the function This instruction can be performed by clicking the button on the debug toolbar Cautions 1 If a program is returned out in the main function it will break inside the start up routine 2 Ifa program is returned out in a function that has called the longjmp function break may not occur 3 Executing Return Out from the recursive f
34. Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces ztENESAS Page 260 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Convert Spaces to Tabs APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Co
35. LD Set Timer End R W Value gt Set Timer 2 Oxb Periodic Updating El Refresh By Force Read Value From the context menu above the watch expression g_IntBuf select Timer Settings gt gt Set Timer Start R W Value gt gt Set Timer 1 Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press the Enter key Here the timer measurement will start when the value Oxb is read from or written to the watch expression g_IntBuf Figure 2 149 Example of Setting a Timer Start Event Access related on a Watch expression Simulator Watchl 2 amp VX Notation Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo 0x00001404 s D semer serve Go LD Set Timer End R W Value Periodic Updatin El Refresh EJ Force Read Value From the context menu above the watch expression g_IntBuf select Timer Settings gt gt Set Timer Start R W Value Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press the Enter key Here the timer measurement will start when the value Oxb is read from or written to the watch expression g_IntBuf When timer start and end events are set the following event marks are displayed in the event area of the relevant line address or watch expression Also on the Events panel they are managed collectively as one instance of a timer measurement event By clicking the mark at a timer measurement event item
36. Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Specified value Condition holds true when the address range that matches the result of the mask is accessed Any other value Condition holds true when any address that does not match the result of the mask is accessed Notes 1 RX200 Series Comparison conditions based on an address area are not supported 2 RX600 Series You can specify Address area as the comparison condition only to one event 3 The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified Example To set an address condition of 0x1000 to Ox1FFF Address value 0x1000 Mask value 0xF000 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 402 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Data Condition Access type Specify the type of access Default Read Write Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Read The specified type of access is a read The specified type of access is a write Read Write The specified type of access is a read and a write Access size Specify the access size Default No conditions Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No access size is specified True for all access sizes Byte The specified access size is a byte Word The specified access size
37. Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin specifiable in up to 259 characters Default Blank Method to By entering directly from the keyboard or specifying in the Select Download change File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button displayed at the right edge of this property when it is selected Specifiable See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats values R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 59 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS File type Specify the file type of a download file to add Here select Hex File S Record File or Binary Data File Default Load module file Method to By selecting from drop down list change Specifiable Either one of the following values Load module file Hex file S record file Binary data file This item is displayed only when the file to download is a hex format hex or Motorola S format mot Specify an offset value from the address at which a download of a specified file begins Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Start address This item is displayed only when the file to download is a binary data format bin Specify the start address from which a specified file is downloaded Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change
38. O a lt o lt 5 C D CENESAS CubeSuite V1 03 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Debug Target Device RX Family All information contained in these matenals including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corporation without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corporation through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corporation website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct 2012 10 11 12 Notice Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information
39. Other memory area FCU RAM FCU firm user boot R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 35 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Reserved area Areas other than those listed above Start address Displays the start address of the corresponding area End address Displays the end address of the corresponding area Access width bits Displays the address width of the corresponding area When Memory type is an external area the access width can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Endian Displays the endians of the external area and the I O register area When Memory type is an external area the endian can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Caution Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt Verify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when the memory value is initialized from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification after download or when values are changed in the Watch panel Memory panel b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display upda
40. Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Remark Specification of whether or not to download object information or symbol information is accepted only when the type of file to download is a load module file c Confirming the order in which a download is executed A download is executed in the order in which files are displayed in the Download file list area To change the order use the Up or Down button to move any file up or down in the list d Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified file added as a download file The added file name and its download condition are displayed in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab 3 Downloading multiple load module files To download multiple load module files follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box Caution When debugging a program comprised of multiple load module files be careful that location addresses will not overlap Remark When multiple load module files are downloaded the load module names are displayed as the detailed information on the Events panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 60 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Clicking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download file list area
41. lt line Show module file names number gt default Show parameters lt function gt lt parameter gt lt parameter valueNte gt lt file Name gt lt line number gt Do not show module file names Do not show parameters lt function gt lt module file name gt lt file name gt lt line number gt Show module file names Do not show parameters lt function gt lt file name gt lt line number gt Do not show module file names Note If the parameter value is a character string up to 20 characters are displayed Remark An array of parameters are passed as a pointer not as an array C language specifications Therefore if parameters are comprised of an array they are handled as pointer when displayed This area has the following features a Jump to the source line disassemble line Selecting Jump to Source from the context menu will open the Editor panel with the caret moved to the source line from which the function at the current caret position is called The view will jump to the Editor panel if it is already open Similarly selecting Jump to Disassemble will open the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret moved to the disassemble line indicating the address from which the function at the current caret position is called The view will jump to the Disassemble panel Disassemble 1 if it is already open Remark Double clicking a line will also make you jump to
42. mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio 4 Character string area This area displays memory values converted into character code To specify character code click the appropriate toolbar button or select Encoding from the context menu ASCII code is selected by default Furthermore in this area memory values converted into a floating point value can be displayed as character strings To do this se lect the following item from Encoding of the context menu Display Format Single precision floating point value Numeric value lt sign gt lt mantissa gt e lt sign gt lt exponent gt Infinite number Inf and Inf Not a number NaN Example 1 234567e 123 Double Double precision floating point value Numeric value lt sign gt lt mantissa gt e lt sign gt lt exponent gt Infinite number Inf and Inf Not a number NaN Example 1 2345678901234e 123 Float Complex Complex number of single precision floating point lt Single precision floating point value gt lt Single precision floating point value gt Double Complex Complex number of double precision floating point 128 bit lt Double precision floating point value gt lt Double precision floating p
43. 3 Simulator A host machine is only needed for debugging emulators are not needed Figure 2 4 Connection Example Simulator Host machine CubeSuite R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 13 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool This section describes the configuration of the operating environment for each debug tool 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use You can configure the operating environment in the Property panel corresponding to the debug tool to use Therefore first select the debug tool to be used in a project the debug tool to be used can be specified in the individual projects To select or switch the debug tool use the context menu shown by right clicking on the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 5 Select Switch Debug Tool to Use Project Tree 8 LB sam le Project RSF5S630EDxBG Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool ax D Program Anal x RX Simulator Deh una Tool Using Debug Tool RX E1 Serial aD a i Z Property RX E1 JTAG sct c tra RX E20 Serial _ resetprg c RX E20 JTAG c sbrk c c vecttbl c Sample cpp h iodefine h Caution The context menu items displayed differ depending on the microcontroller selected in the project see Table 2 1 Rela
44. Branch Data access cannot be used Only Data access can be used External trace output Do not output cannot be used CPU execution and Trace output can be used Trace memory size MByte Only 1M byte can be used b Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace memory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below Overwrite trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old data memory and default continue execution Stop trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data but does not stop program execution Stop When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 136 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Trace data type This property is displayed only when you ve selected Trace for the Usage of trace function property Specify the type of trace data to be collected from the drop down list below Branch Source destination address information of branching during program execution are collected as trace data Branch Data Source destination address information of branching during program execution as well as data accessN te 1 information on access events that occurred are collected as trace data Data accessNote2
45. CY 3 3 Opens the Column Number Settings dialog box to set the number of view columns in the Memory value area Address Opens the Address Offset Settings dialog box to set an address and an offset value for addresses displayed Offset in the Address area Value Settings File menu Memory panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the Memory panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Memory Data Saves memory contents to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see g Save memory values If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Memory Data As will be performed Save Memory Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box in order to save memory to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see g Save memory values Edit menu Memory panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Memory panel is as follows All other items are disabled However all of these items are disabled during program execution Copies a selected range as character string to the clipboard Pastes the copied character string from the clipboard to the caret position To paste in the memory value area see e Copy and paste To paste in the character string area see c Copying and pasting Opens the Memory Search
46. Closes the currently selected panel Close All but This Closes all other panels being displayed in the same panel display area as the selected panel except for the currently selected panel Save file name Saves the contents of the opened text file Copy Full Path Copies the full path of the opened text file to the clipboard Open Containing Folder Opens the folder where the text file is saved in Explorer New Horizontal Tab Group R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 The area for the display of active panels is evenly divided into two areas in the horizontal direction and the panels are displayed as a new group of tabbed pages Only one panel is active in the new group The area may be divided into up to four panels This item is not displayed in the following cases Only one panel is open The group has already been divided in the vertical direction The group has already been divided into four panels ztENESAS Page 261 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE New Vertical Tab Group The area for the display of active panels is evenly divided into two areas in the vertical direction and the panels are displayed as a new group of tabbed pages Only one panel is active in the new group The area may be divided into up to four panels This item is not displayed in the following cases Only one panel is open The group has already been divided in the horizontal dire
47. Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops 6 B Trace Usage of trace function race Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch Output timestamp No 7 E Timer Operating frequency MHz System Property 2 RX E1UTAG Property 1 E Memory 2 3 4 5 6 7 Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms E Register PC display during the execution Display update interval for PC ms E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops Je of trace functior Operation after trace memory is full Trace data type Output timestamp Trace clock count source MHz E Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz 20 Yes No Yes 500 Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Branch Yes 12 5000 No 25 0000 Trace
48. Figure 2 39 System Category E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Routine to run immediately after execution stops Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal program ROM area such as those that use ROM P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E20 Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal data flash area such as those that use data flash P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E20 Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Specify whether to execute a specified routine before executing the user program Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 38 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Routine to run immediately before execution starts Specify the address to be executed immediately before the user program execution This property is displayed only when Execute t
49. General Font and Color category category in the Option dialog box 3 The above color coding rule does not apply to the lines that are outside the target area see Table 2 18 Subject Areas of Coverage Measurements 4 The Editor panel will not display the code coverage measurement result in cases where the source file currently displayed is updated after the update of the downloaded modules Figure 2 154 Example of Code Coverage Measurement Results Editor Panel AE sterersa void maintvoid SSS 29 30 long a 10 31 int i 32 char tmp 2 33 int ret 34 char isnuminput 35 36 while i 37 I serrar e Code on this line executed at 100 40 EEff8f7c 41 E Efff8 83 42 Efff8f8d gt 43 ffFfFR 90 Code on this line executed at 0 Not 44 while 1 executed 45 EEff8f92 ret can sc amp tmp 46 FECEBEIc if ret EOF i 47 ffff8fal if tmp 0 LF R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 166 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 155 Example of the Code Coverage Measurement Result Disassemble Panel ffffstsa ffffSt60o0 fLffstes ffffsts6s 38 printf Data Input Code on this line executed at 100 ffff8f6e frfrsrc74 fLffst7s6 ffff f7a 40 for i D i lt 10 i fffLSf7c ffff8f7e fLffsts1 41 printt a da i fLffsrtss ffffstfss ffffsfs7
50. The displayed C variable CPU register I O register or assembler symbol can be registered as a watch expression in the Watch panel For details on how to do it see 1 Registering watch expressions Moving to a symbol defined location While the caret has been moved to an instruction that references a symbol click the e button in the toolbar or select Go to Symbol on the context menu The caret position is moved to the address at which the symbol at the caret position is defined Also following this operation click the button in the toolbar or select Back to Address on the context menu The caret position is returned to the instruction that was referencing the symbol before the caret was moved Address denotes the address value of the instruction that references the symbol R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 282 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 f 9 h i Toolbar Jumping to a source line memory value When Jump to Source on the context menu is selected the Editor panel is opened with the caret on it moved to a source line corresponding to the address of the current caret position If the Editor panel is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly Similarly when Jump to Memory on the context menu is selected the Memory panel Memory1 is opened with the caret on it moved to a memory value corresponding to the address of the current caret position If the Memory panel is alread
51. The types of access specifiable in access related events are as follows Table 2 6 Types of Accesses to Variables Access Type Description The program in execution is stopped when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read i e to read data from it The program in execution is stopped when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for write i e to write data to it Read Write The program in execution is stopped when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read or write i e to read or write data Cautions 1 The program is not stopped with the access via DMAC Dynamic Memory Access Controller DTC Data Transfer Controller 2 Simulator With string manipulation instructions and multiply and accumulate instructions the first and final data accesses are subjected to the event check This section describes the following 1 Seta break event access related to a variable I O register 2 Edit a break event access related to a variable IO register 3 Delete a break event access related to a variable IO register 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Use one of the following methods to set a break event access related that stops programs with the access to a variable I O register Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on break event access related settings including the allowable number of valid
52. V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Expression Description Name of a CPU register Value of the CPU register Name of an I O register Value of the I O register Note 3 Label name te 3 EQU symbol name and immediate value Values of a label and an EQU symbol and an immediate address Integer constant Integer constant value Floating constant Floating point constant value Character constant Character constant value Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variable 2 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member 3 If the label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label Any imaginary number must be multiplied by an uppercase I e g 1 0 2 0 1 When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g I REG to distinguish it from the keyword I that indicates an imaginary number From Table 2 31 Basic Input Format of Watch expressions the following watch expressions with operator can be constructed For the operators listed in the table below the expression is parsed according to C language specifications Table 2 32 Construction of Watch expressions with Operators Expression Description Expression Specifies the order in which operations are performed Expression Inverts symbol Expression Logical negation Expression Bit inversion Expres
53. build mode name text to the project folder of each project If a file having the same name exists it will be overwritten It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 5 Enable Break Sound Beep when program execution is halted by a break event hardware or software break Do not beep when program execution is halted by a break event hardware or software break default 6 Observe downloaded load module files changing Monitor the load module files downloaded to the debug tool for any changes and display a message when changes are detected to confirm whether to perform the download Do not monitor the load module files downloaded to the debug tool for any changes default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 428 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only Automatically add the source files to the project tree when the load module files are downloaded to the debug tool in the debug only project default Do not automatically add the source files to the project tree when the load module files are downloaded to the debug tool in the debug only project Caution This function is valid only when the load module files have been added to the download file node on the project tree If the load module files have been added via the Download File Settings tab in
54. gt True when data is equal to or greater than specified value Less Than or equal to lt True when data is equal to or smaller than specified value Inside the range lt Values lt True when data is within the range of specified value Compare data1 lt data lt Compare data2 Outside the range lt Values lt True when data is outside the range of specified value data lt Compare data 1 Compare data2 lt data No conditions Compare data is not specified R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 406 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compare data1 Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less Than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Compare data2 Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Av
55. were accepted Exception count Measures the number of times exceptions occurred Interrupt count Measures the number of times interrupts were accepted Note RX200 Series Only Execution cycle is displayed for the measurement item b To edit the Execution only once property When you specify Yes for the Execution only once property the timer measurement is finished by measuring a specified section only once If you want to measure a total number of times a specified section has been passed be sure to specify No Remark RX600 Series While the measurement listed below is performed even if the start event and end event occur if the condition for measurement is not satisfied even once the results of measurement will not be displayed Execution count Exception and interrupt count Exception count Interrupt count Caution RX600 Series If you specify Yes the timer measurement will be suspended when the timer start event occurs twice even though the timer end event has not occurred 4 Editing timer start and timer end events To edit a timer start or timer end event you ve set choose Event from the View menu select the timer start or timer end event execution related or access related displayed in the detailed information on the timer result on the Events panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu Perform the editing in a dialog box that is opened by this operat
56. 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box This dialog box is used to display or change detailed information on access related events selected on the Events panel Note that the access related events refer to the following events on the Events panel Read write and read write in the detailed information on combination break E1 E20 Read write and read write in the detailed information on hardware break Simulator Read write and read write in the detailed information on trace Read write and read write in the detailed information on point trace Read write and read write in the detailed information on timer result Figure A 63 Detailed Settings of Access Events Dialog Box E1 E20 Toolbar 3 Al mlAddress pex E mAddress Condition Compare condition Address area Area condition Inside the range lt Values lt GEE ae E FFOO E Data Condition Access type Read 1 Access size Long word Compare data REx 55 Specify the data mask No Compare condition Specified value amp Pass Count Pass count 1 End address 2 4 Specify the end address Start address is the value which is specified at Address property item Function buttons R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 399 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 64 Detailed Settings of Access Events Dialog Box Simulator Toolbar Hex E tAddres
57. 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons Button Function Moves a selected file one line up However this button is disabled when the file at the top of the list or a file specified as the subject to build in the project is selected Moves a selected file one line down However this button is disabled when the file at the bottom of the list or a file specified as the subject to build in the project is selected Adds one blank item to the list with the item selected In the Download file property area specify the download conditions for the file to be added However this button is disabled when 20 or more files are already registered Remove Removes a selected file from the list However the files specified as the subject to build in the project cannot be removed Remarks 1 Place the mouse cursor at a file name and the path information for the subject file is displayed in a popup box 2 The order in which files are listed can be changed by dragging any file name up or down in the list with the mouse However the files specified as the subject to build in the project cannot have their order in the list changed 2 Download file property area a Download file information This section displays download conditions or changes of settings made for a file selected in the Download file list area Also if a new download file is added using the Add button this section may be used to
58. 1 00 2tENESAS Page 236 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG RX600 Series APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the size of trace memory Default 1 How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 1 2 4 8 16 32 Output timestamp E1 E20 Specify whethe r timestamp information is added to the collected trace data This property is selectable only when you ve specified Trace in the Usage of trace function property Default No How to change By selecting from the drop down list Changeable only when program execution is halted however Specifiable value Yes Timestamp information is added No Timestamp information is not added Trace clock count source MHz E1 E20 Enter a count s ource with which a timestamp is calculated from a count value However this item is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the Output timestamp property Default Blank How to change By entering directly from the keyboard Specifiable value 0 0001 to 999 999 Accumulate trace time Simulator Specify a display method by which the trace time on the Trace panel is displayed Default No How to change By selecting from th
59. 140 a amp global_ch A 123 Bi T 141 a 124 UINT i 142 E Comment 125 143 E Comment 126 for i 0 i 144 E Comment 127 funcza 145 128 a 146 global a t 129 147 global b 130 v 148 global c v 3 Line number area This area displays the line number of the opened text file or source file On each line there is an indicator that shows the line modification status 8 void main void 1 q 2 jE Start user code Do not 91 92 TMPO Start 93 TMP1 Start 94 AD Start 95 96 while 10 This area changes color only when the downloaded module is out of date using the Warning color of the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened 88 void main void 8 3 9 Start 1 91 o2 eereecar sp 5 SPONSES This means new or modified line but unsaved This means new or modified line and saved To erase this mark close the panel and then open this source file again R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 252 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 5 6 7 8 3 This means that the downloaded module is out of date To erase this mark run a build and then download the load module file again Coverage area This area is valid only when connected to
60. 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 13F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 80 Bendemeer Road Unit 06 02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6213 0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 3 CubeSuite V1 03 00 2rCENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT2175EJ0100
61. 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 98 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 103 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 10 6 Other break factors 104 Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables 106 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents 106 2 11 2 Displaying and changing the CPU registers 118 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers 120 2 11 4 Displaying and changing global and static variables 123 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables 123 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 125 Display Function Call Information from the Stack 132 2 12 1 Display call stack information 132 Collecting an Execution History 134 2 13 1 Setting up a trace operation 134 2 13 2 Collecting an execution history up to a halt 139 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 139 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 144 2 13 5 Stopping Restarting Collection of Execution History E20 145 2 13 6 Displaying an execution history 146 2 13 7 Clearing the trace memory 148 2 13 8 Searching for trace data 148 2 13 9 Saving the displayed content of an execution history 153 Measuring the Execution Time 155 2 14 1 Setting the timer measurement operation E1 E20 155 2 14 2 Measuring e
62. 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Tab selection area You can display the detailed information on combination conditions by the selection of a tab Types of tabs to be displayed will differ depending on the event you have selected on the Events panel Combination break Only Break tab is displayed Trace Start Condition tab and End Condition tab are displayed By switching you can set the combination condition for each tab 2 Combination condition selection area b Combination Select the conditions from the following drop down list Conditions Functions The condition is satisfied when one of the set events is encountered The condition is satisfied when all the set events are encountered irrespective of the time line Sequential The condition is satisfied when the set events are encountered in the specified sequence Cautions 1 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access related can be specified for the 1st to the 3rd position 2 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access related for which an address area condition has been set can be specified only for the 1st position 3 For trace events the combination condition available for a trace end event is only OR 3 Object event condition display area a Display of the list The object events to be combined are shown in the list No
63. 3 Combination Break Sequential Detail ane g_IntBuf 02142c 0x142f Oxb o OE Pend o Chal 0000 D100 a 085 2 10 6 Other break factors Other than the causes described above a program can be stopped by the following break factors You can check such break factors on the Status bar in the Main window Table 2 8 Other break factors Debug Tool to Use Break factors E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Trace memory fullNote 1 Temporary break occurred Execution failed or cause unknown WAIT Instruction executed Undefined instruction exception encountered Note 3 Privileged instruction exception encountered Note 3 NIN ITN IN Access exception encountered Note 3 Floating point exception encounteredNte 2 Note 3 Interrupt encountered S INT instruction exception encountered NINES BRK instruction exception encountered Peripheral function simulation error occurred Illegal memory access made Stream I O error occurred Allocation of coverage memory failed Allocation of trace memory failed Notes 1 The operation depends on the setting of the Operation after trace memory is full property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 104 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Simulator Applicable only to the RX600 Series 3 Simulator Th
64. 329 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Jump to the source line disassemble line When Jump to Source on the context menu is selected the Editor panel is opened with the caret on it moved to a source line that corresponds to the line where the caret is currently positioned If the Editor panel is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly Similarly when Jump to Disassemble is selected the Disassemble panel Disasemmble1 is opened with the caret on it moved to a fetch address on the line where the caret is currently positioned If the Disassemble panel Disassemble is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly c Linkage with other panels By clicking the or button in the toolbar or selecting Window Connecting and then Connect Source Window or Connect Disassemble Window on the context menu it is possible to have data corresponding to the address at the caret position on this panel displayed in synchronism with it on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel The focus is not moved d Popup display When the mouse cursor is hovered on a line the data in all areas items corresponding to the line are displayed one below another in a popup window e Saving of trace data By choosing Save Trace Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Data Save dialog box and then save the content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to
65. 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Events panel This panel displays detailed information on the events that have been set on the Editor panel Disassemble panel or Watch panel as well as chooses to enable or disable event settings or deletes event settings see 2 17 Event Management Note that this panel can be opened only when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Remarks 1 For details about event settings see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 2 The events that have been set on the Function List panel or Variable List panel of the analysis tool are also managed on this panel 3 By double clicking a line delimiting each area on the panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 37 Events Panel Events Toolbar X lt ed 5 S xs ii Name Detail Information Comment C Unconditional Trace 2 M 4 Trace Start End 2 Detail Information Start Execution main c 104 Ox2f End Execution main c 113 0x301 Name Detail Information Comment V 9 Timer Result Total 4500 ns Start End 2 Run Break Timer Total2244000 ns This section describes the following How to open Description of each areal Toolbar Edit Menu Event Panel Only Items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Event On the Editor panel or Disas
66. ASCII Character string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f A B C D E F f Register watch expressions A memory value at the addresses for which symbol is defined is underlined to indicate that it can be registered as a watch expression Select this underlined memory value or while the caret is positioned at one of such memory values select Register to Watch1 from the context menu and the symbol name at the specified address is registered as a watch expression on the Watch panel Watch1 Caution Memory values with no underlines cannot be registered as watch expressions g Save memory values Choosing Save Memory Data As from the File menu opens the Data Save dialog box allowing the contents of this panel to be saved to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save memory values see 7 Saving displayed memory contents R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 272 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE h Zoom in or out o naview To zoom in and out of the Memory panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Memory panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key
67. Call Stack panel Caution This panel is left blank while the program is in execution The contents of each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running Figure 2 128 Displaying the Call Stack Information Call Stack Panel Call Stack E3 Toolbar f 2 Notation Encoding Depth Call Stack Depth area Call Stack area This section describes the following Changing the form in which values are displayed 1 2 Jumping to the source line 3 Displaying local variables 4 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which values on this panel are displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below However this feature is disabled during program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 132 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables on this panel in ASCII code default Disp
68. Caution When the emulator firmware should be updated it is automatically updated To ensure this update do not disconnect the USB or power supply until connection is established After emulator firmware updating is completed the message on the Output panel changes as follows Figure 2 58 Output Panel after Emulator Firmware Updating Rewriting emulator firmware D ai Rewriting emulator firmware Done A Version Information E FFWEZORX600 d11 NKR KKK 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Click the button on the Debug toolbar to cut off the communication with the connected debug tool After disconnecting from the debug tool the Status bar on the Main window changes as follows Figure 2 59 Status Bar Indicating the Disconnection from the Debug Tool m BREAK GORXE1 TAG Not measured Teo Yv aa DISCONNECT This area is left blank DISCONNECT is displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 50 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution The debug tool cannot be disconnected from CubeSuite while the program is running If you wish to disconnect the debug tool stop the program in advance Remark Disconnecting the debug tool will close all the panels and dialog boxes that can be displayed only during the connection 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG With hot plug in function you can
69. Data information on access events that occurred during program execution are collected as trace data Notes 1 E20 Serial RX200 Series Trace data for Branch Data access cannot be collected Therefore this item is not displayed in the drop down list 2 E20 Serial RX200 Series To collect trace data for Data access it is necessary to set address conditions in a point trace For details about the point trace see 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met d External trace output E20 JTAG Specify the method on how the collected trace data should be output from the drop down list below CPU execution CPU execution given priority over trace output Trace information may be lost if output Trace output Trace output given priority over CPU execution CPU execution stops during trace output affecting real time performance Do not output Only the internal buffer of the microcomputer will be used with no output of trace information Caution If Step in is executed when CPU execution or Trace output is specified and trace data is being displayed on the Trace panel correct trace data may not always be displayed e Trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG Specify the size of memory used to retain trace data from the drop down list below 1 default 2 4 8 16 32 f Output timestamp This property specifies whether timestamp information is added to the t
70. E20 Events xeke Name Detail Comment Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Total 1351 300000 ns R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 156 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 145 Example of a Run Break Timer Event Measurement Result Events Panel Simulator Events xolva 45 3 Detail 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section By setting timer measurement events timer start event and timer end event it is possible to measure a program s execution time in any section in its execution process To use this function follow the procedure described below Setting the timer start event and timer end event 2 Execute the program 3 Editing a timer measurement event E1 E20 4 Editing timer start and timer end events 5 Deleting a timer start event or timer end event Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on timer measurement event settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series The timestamp information on the Trace panel is realized using the timer measurement counter Therefore if a timer measurement event is set on the Events panel expected timestamp information is not displayed 3 E1 E20 When a timer start or end event is added or deleted or a timer measurement event is edited the result of the next measurement will not b
71. El Timer Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 lt 1 gt Use 64bit counter RX600 series Specify whether to use two 32 bit counters or one 64 bit counter lt 2 gt Operating frequency MHz Specify the operating frequency to be used when converting the count value to time Directly enter a number between 0 0001 and 999 999 MHz to specify the operating frequency When operating frequency is not specified a count value will be displayed 3 Download File Settings tab You can configure downloading to the debug tool in Download File Settings tab For the details of settings in each category see 2 5 1 Execute downloading 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on hook transaction and the settings in each category R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 41 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 Simulator Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using Simulator Figure 2 43 Operating Environment Settings Simulator Property Panel Property S AX Simulator Property Endian of CPU Little endian data El Clock System clock ICLK frequency MHz 50 E Peripheral Function Simulation Peripheral function simulation module Peripheral clock rate Size of internal ROM KB ytes Displays the size of the internal ROM
72. Execute programs in steps 3 Panel display area This area displays various panels available For details about displayed contents see the section in which the relevant panel is described 4 Status bar The status bar displays the information shown below Figure A 2 Status Bar Executes CPU reset 3 Line 1 Column Read only m BREAK Pow Off OxffFF863c SRX E1 ITAG 1 1215 Sy fe a Status message Displays the following messages Simple description of a selected menu item Message to notify that a value input in the panel dialog is invalid Message to notify that the character string specified in the Find and Replace dialog box could not be found Message to identify the cause of program break see Section 2 10 Stop Programs Break b Focus panel status information Displays status information on the currently focused panel e g information about caret position or overwrite insertion mode However this status is hidden for panels that do not have status information c Execution status Shows the current execution status of a program using the following icons and character strings However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Program status Displayed Content Under execution gt RUN Now halted m BREAK Step execution in progress Pi STEP d CPU status E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Displays the current CPU status of the debug tool If the CPU is in s
73. ExpressionN Addition Expression ExpressionNe Subtraction Expression amp ExpressionNoe Logical multiplication by bits Expression ExpressionN Exclusive disjunction by bits Expression ExpressionN Logical sum by bits Note Variables and functions can be combined by an operator only with variables functions and integer constants Example C variable name IOR name b Watch expression and operator With watch expression the value of a symbol is used to perform operations Only when the value does not exist the address of the symbol is used to perform operations Example main 1 The basic input formats of watch expressions are as follows Table 2 31 Basic Input Format of Watch expressions Expression Description Name of a C C language variableNote 1 Value of a C C language variable Expression Expression Element of an array Note 2 Expression Member name Value of a structure union class member Note 2 Expression gt Member name Value of a structure union class member that is pointed to Watch expression Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Watch expression gt Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Expression Value of pointer variable amp Expression Location address Type name Watch expression Value cast into a specified type R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 198 of 471 CubeSuite
74. FUNCTIONS Figure 2 160 Displaying the Set Events Events Panel Simulator Events Toolbar gt lt G5 fel 5 5 2 s Name Detail Comment 42 Hardware BreakOO01 Before Execution sort cHl 4 Oxffff85ec M Point Trace Detail Read Write g_IntBuf 041404 Name Detail Comment Run Break Timer Total 4000 ns Execution Cycle Count 400 Execution Instruction Count 76 M 8 Timer Result Total O ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Max Min Ons 0 Ons Ons Detail Start Before Execution sort c 18 Oxffffoie4 End Read Write g_IntBuf 041404 021407 0x5 Name Detail Comment 3 M P Trace Start End 2 Detail Start Before Execution sort c 15 Oxffff85d2 Name Detail Comment C S Unconditional Trace Name area Detail area Comment area 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled By checking or unchecking the checkbox of an event name concerned it is possible to change the set state of that event When the set state of an event is changed its Event mark is changed accordingly There are following types for the set states of events Figure 2 161 Event Name Checkbox Hardware Break0001 Check box Event mark Event name Table 2 21 Set States of Events Enabled When a specified condition is met the enabled event occurs The event can be disabled by unchecking its checkbox Disabled Even when a specified condition is met the disabled event doe
75. IPL register PM register U register register O register S register Z register C register c Registering a new watch expression There are following three methods of registering a new watch expression lt 1 gt Registering a watch expression from another panel On another panel perform one of the following operations on the subject that you want to register as a watch expression Select the subject character string and then drag and drop it directly into this area on any Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 except for the Editor panel Select the subject character string or move the caret to one of subject character strings the subject being automatically selected and then select Register to Watch1 on the context menu Choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy the subject character string and then choose Paste from the Edit menu in this area on any Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 The table below shows the relationship between the panels for which this operation is possible and the subjects that are registrable as watch expressions Table A 4 Relationship between Panels and Subjects Registrable as Watch expressions Panel name Subjects registrable as watch expressions Editor panel C C variables 1 CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols Disassemble panel C C variablesN 1 CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols CPU Register panel CPU registers ote 2 Local Variables p
76. It is possible to edit the condition for the number of times an execution related event has passed To edit execution related events use the Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box that is displayed by performing the following operation on the Events panel Hardware Break Move the caret to a hardware break you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 175 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Trace Move the caret to an execution related event in a trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Combination Break Move the caret to an execution related event in a combination break you want to edit and then E1 E20 select Edit Condition from the context menu Timer Result Move the caret to an execution related event in a timer result you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Caution Address values of execution related events cannot be changed in the Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box To change address values delete the subject event and then set a new event a Editing the pass count or the number of times passed Enter a numeric value in decimal notation for the Pass count property in the Pass Count category and then click the OK button The relevant event occurs when the event condition is satisfied as many times as the
77. JTAG communications E1 JTAG as the communication method to the target system see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use See E1 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 1 Connection Example E1 Dedicated probe pay USB interface cable lt P gi Host machine Ly E1 CubeSuite Target system R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 12 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 E20 Connect a host machine and E20 If required connect a target board too You can make a choice between FINE communications E20 Serial and JTAG communications E20 JTAG as the communication method to the target system see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use See E20 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 2 Connection Example E20 JTAG iB a _ O _ ji Dedicated probe USB interface cable FH Host machine E20 CubeSuite Target system Figure 2 3 Connection Example E20 Serial Dedicated probe _e O USB interface cable i Host machine D 38 pin to 14 pin E20 conversion adapterNote CubeSuite I Target system Note Use a 38 pin to 14 pin conversion adapter attached to the E20 emulator if you have selected FINE E20 Serial as the method of communication with the target system For more details on the connection using a 38 pin to 14 pin conversion adapter see E20 User s Manual
78. Menu Trace Panel Only Items Edit Menu Trace Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Trace from the View menu 4 5 On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel select Trace Settings and then Show Trace Result on the context menu Description of each area 1 Number This area displays the trace numbers that correspond to trace frames area 2 Time h min s ms us ns area This area displays the time in hour minute second millisecond microsecond and nanosecond units from when the program started running till when the cause of instruction execution or memory access in any frame occurred Remark Simulator Whether the time is displayed by an integral value or by a differential value depends on how the Accumulate trace time property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab is set Cautions 1 E1 E20 To specify whether timestamp information is added to trace data use the Output timestamp property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab See 2 13 1 Setting up a trace operation R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 327 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 E1 E20 The timestamp information displayed here is a time relative to the beginning cycle and not a time from the start of program execution 3 E1 E20 The timestam
79. O register contents By choosing Save IOR Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of I O registers in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv Regardless of whether you ve chosen to show or not show on this panel the values of all I O registers are saved When saving to a file CubeSuite reloads I O register values and saves the latest values thus obtained However the I O registers protected against read are not reloaded To save the latest content select Force Read Value from the context menu before saving to a file R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 122 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 119 I O Register Value Output Image When Saved Category name IOR name Value Type Byte Size Address 2 11 4 Displaying and changing global and static variables Use the Watch panel to display or change global variables or static variables Select a variable whose value you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on Watch panel For details about watch expressions see Section 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables Use the Local Variables panel shown below to display the contents of local variables and change values Choose Local Variable from the View menu To display the content of your desired local variable select a scop
80. Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Select the watch expression as the subject to access and perform the following operation from the context menu See 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions However the watch expressions you can select are only global variables static variables inside a function static variables inside a file and I O registers Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a point trace event has been set for the selected watch expression and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Access Type Operation Read Select Record Reading Value from Trace Output Write Select Record Writing Value from Trace Output Read write Select Record R W Value from Trace Output Remark Only the watch expressions in current scope are selectable To use any watch expression outside the current scope for a point trace event select a watch expression that has its scope specified When you ve finished setting a point trace event execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs When the condition for the point trace event you ve set is met during program execution information on that is collected as trace data For details on how to check trace data see 2 13 6 Displaying an execution history When editing a trace event access related you have set as a point trace event first open the Events panel by select
81. Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace memory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below Non stop and overwrite to When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old trace memory data default If you ve selected Yes for the Clear trace memory before running property when the program is re executed the trace memory is cleared before trace data is written to When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time If you ve selected No for the Clear trace memory before running property even when re executed the program is halted and not executed d Accumulate trace time Specify from the drop down list whether or not to use an accumulated display for trace time display Specify Yes to use an accumulated display for trace time display or No to use a difference display default e Trace memory size frames Specify from the drop down list the size of trace memory number of trace frames Note that a trace frame is a unit for the trace data and that fetch write and read operations each use one trace frame The drop down list shows the number of trace frames as follows 64K default 128K 256K 512K 1M 2M 3M R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 138 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 2 Coll
82. Page 169 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Click the OK button Set the Printf event to the line at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When the Printf event is set the oe mark is displayed in the event area on the Editor panel Disassemble panel and the set Printf event is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs By executing the program the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the instruction at the location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel 3 Check the output result The following figure shows how the value of the specified variable expression is output to the Debug Tool tab of the Output panel see Figure A 45 Output Result Format of Printf Event Figure 2 157 Example of Output Result of Printf Event Sample global_a 10 0xa tput string Sample Stopped by user operation utp t string Sample EOF Variable expression global_a Output result when the above is specified All Messages 4 Edit Printf event You can edit a Printf event which has already been set When editing click the target Printf event in the Events panel and select Edit Condition from the context menu This will open the Action Events dialog box in which you can edi
83. RX E20 TAG Property Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 SLS000012 E Connection with T arget Board JTAG clock MHz 16 5 Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters ID code Work RAM start address F 1000 E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode On chip ROM enabled extended mode Endian Little endian data B External Flash External flash definition file 4 Register setting Select the operating mode which is selected by the register setting Connect Settings A Debug Tool Settings Download File Settings Hook Transaction Settings This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Edit menu Property Panel Only Items Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node that you use and then choose Property from the View menu or select it on the context menu On the Project Tree panel double click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node that you use Remark If this panel is already open detailed information on a selected debug tool is displayed on it when you select the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node that you use on the Project Tree panel Description of each area
84. Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 346 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message Text color Displayed when unable to execute for a fatal error or operational mistake Background color WhiteSmoke This area provides the following facilities a Tag jump Double click an output message or move the caret to a message and then hit the Enter key The Editor panel is opened displaying the relevant line number of the relevant file This facility permits you to jump to the relevant line in error of the source file from the error messages output for example at build time b Displaying help While the caret is present at the line showing a warning or an error message select Help for Message from the context menu or press the F1 key Help for a message on that line is displayed c Saving logs Choose Save Output tab name As from the File menu The Save As dialog box is opened allowing you to save the whole content displayed on the currently selected tab to a text file txt Messages on unselected tabs are not saved d Zooming in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Output panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Output panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the co
85. The contents of each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running Figure A 33 Call Stack Panel Call Stack E Notation Encoding x Depth Call Stack Toolbar PowerON_Reset_PC J E wWorkSpace T utorial E1E20 R6004T utorial_Little Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Toolbar File Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items Edit Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Call Stack from the View menu Description of each area 1 Depth area Displays the depth of calls The callers of functions are assigned numbers in order starting from 1 with the line showing the current PC position assigned a 0 2 Call Stack area Displays the current source position and call stack information about the calls placed on the stack e g function caller position and parameters to each function The form in which information is displayed in this area differs depending on the status of which toolbar button or Rg is selected and which item from the context menu Show Parameter or Show Module File Name is selected as shown below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 322 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Condition Display Format Show parameters lt function gt lt parameter gt lt parameter valueNote gt lt modtule file name gt lt file name gt
86. The events in the list are numbered from top to bottom This item is displayed only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions For the condition to be satisfied events must be encountered in the order indicated by these numbers Event Detailed information on event conditions is displayed It is identical to the information displayed on the Events panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 390 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons Buttons Functions Moves the event serial number upward in the Object event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions Moves the event serial number downward in the Object event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions R Event Moves the event selected in the Object event list to the Reset event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions 4 Reset event condition display cancel area a Display of the list Detailed conditions are displayed for the event which has been registered as a reset event When the reset event displayed in this list is encountered all the other event conditions which have been holding until then will be cleared Cautions 1 Only one reset event is specifiable If you click the R Event button with the rese
87. Therefore the endian in the external area to which they are downloaded should be changed to suit the endian information in USD files 2 When the address ranges of multiple registered USD files overlap each other connection with the debug tool cannot be established b lt Setting the CPU operation mode For files to be downloaded to external flash memory it is necessary to set the microcontroller s operation mode when connecting with the debug tool To do this change the Register setting property in the Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab by selecting On chip ROM enabled extended mode or On chip ROM disabled extended mode from the pulldown list as shown below Figure 2 69 Specifying the CPU Operation Mode E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting On chip ROM enabled extended mode v Endian Single chip mode On chip ROM enabled extended mode R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 64 of 471 Oct 01 2012 On chip ROM disabled extended mode CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Executing a download Execute a download see 3 Executing a download Cautions 1 External flash memory cannot be rewritten on the Memory panel 2 To use a flash memory device that does not support the use of the Lock command specify that the lock bit be cleared when you generate USD files This specification helps you omit a
88. Therefore although the unconditional trace event one of the built in events is enabled by default when either a trace start or a trace end event is set it is automatically disabled at the same time in which case a trace event consisting of a trace start and a trace end event that are combined into one is enabled Conversely when the set trace event is disabled the unconditional trace event is automatically re enabled Caution Simulator For the timer measurement event to be enabled both timer start and end events should be specified R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 335 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Event mark The event mark indicates the type of an event and shows its currently set state The displayed event marks and their meanings are as follows Type of event Hardware Break Table A 11 Enabled Disabled Event Marks Pending Remark Software Break E1 E20 Combination break E1 E20 Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Trace Displayed on only the Events panel Trace start Trace end Displayed on only the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Timer Result Displayed on only the Events panel Timer start Timer end Displayed on only the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Point Trace Printf event Interrupt event Simulator Multiple settings of above event
89. This property is displayed only when you ve specified Inside the range lt Values lt or Outside the range lt Values lt in the Compare condition property Specify the data mask When you entered a comparison data value this property is displayed allowing you to specify whether or not a mask value for the data value be specified If you specify Yes the data mask can be specified Remark Simulator This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less Than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Mask value This property is displayed when you ve specified Yes in the Specify the data mask property Enter a data mask value in hexadecimal so that when a data access that matches the masked data and comparison condition occurs the condition holds true Difference Simulator Specify comparison data with a hexadecimal number This property is displayed when you ve specified Difference in the Compare condition property lt 10 gt Sign Simulator Specify whether or not the data to compare has a sign This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Difference Greater than gt Less Than lt Greater
90. Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel b To specify a function name before performing a search c Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the function in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specifying the Function Name Enter a function name you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to ast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the last number is assumed Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Fo
91. When not expanded they are marked with at the head with the values left blank However the I O registers protected against read are not reloaded To save the latest content select Force Read Value from the context menu before saving to a file Figure 2 127 Watch Data Output Image When Saved Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Category name Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Remark If panel contents are saved over an existing file by selecting Save Watch Data on File menu the respective Watch panels Watch1 4 are handled individually R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 131 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Display Function Call Information from the Stack This section describes how to display function call information from the stack The compiler bundled with CubeSuite CC RX places function call information on the stack in line with the ANSI standards By analyzing this function call information hereafter referred to as call stack information it is possible to know the depth of function calls the positions from which calls are made and parameters to those functions 2 12 1 Display call stack information Use the Call Stack panel shown below to display call stack information Select Call Stack from the View menu For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the
92. a channelN te 2 in which a timer start event is set Opens the Events panel and displays only timer related events Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Notes 1 A message is displayed if these items are selected when the downloaded load module file is older than the opened source file 2 The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 268 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory panel This panel displays or changes memory contents see Section 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents Up to four memory panels can be opened at a time with each panel discriminated by the name in their title bar Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 or Memory 4 When memory values change after execution of the program the display is automatically updated During step execution the display is successively updated each time a step is executed Also if the Realtime display update function is enabled the display of values can be updated in real time even while the program is under execution Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool
93. accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or O register occurred Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register is read write accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to end upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel and displays the last line of the acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function However this is disabled while the tracer is operating R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 267 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set th
94. an address expression directly in the range 0 to end address of address space to specify the position By default main is specified However if the specified address expression cannot be converted into an address the program is not executed Remark Normally specify the following For assembler source Beginning label equivalent to the main function For C source Symbol given at the beginning of the main function name Specify the debugged overlay section Yes is displayed when overlay sections see 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections for details exist in the load module Otherwise No is displayed This entry cannot be changed Overlay sections Address groups where overlay sections exist are displayed This property only appears when Yes is displayed on the Specify the debugged overlay section property Caution By default CPU reset automatically occurs after downloading the file and then the program is executed to the specified symbol position If this operation above is not needed specify No with both of the CPU Reset after download and Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property Executing a download Click the button in the Debug toolbar If this operation is performed while CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed Remark To download a file which has had changes added in the course of debug work again choo
95. and Watch panel of areas whose display is set to be updated in real time Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots that have been read or fetched R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 423 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Example Display Description Text color Standard Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots color that have been written Background Orange color Read and AaBbCc Text color Standard Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots write color that have been read and written Background PaleTur color quoise Text color White Display colors on the Memory panel of spots whose values obtained from the debug tool are incorrect Background LightGray color Coverage 1 Text color Standard Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel 100 color of lines whose code coverage rates are 100 Background LightGreen color Coverage 1 Text color Standard Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel 99 color of lines whose code coverage rates are 1 to 99 Background LightPink color Coverage Text color Standard Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel 0 color of lines whose code coverage rates are 0 unexecuted Background LightGray color Invalid A Text color Gray Display colors on the Memory panel of areas that are not memory mapped and
96. and the Debug menu will be disabled once the connection with the debug tool is lost Figure 2 93 Debug Toolbar EOC Figure 2 94 Debug Menu Debug Ay Download Gy Build amp Download F6 g Connect to Debug Too Upload KA Disconnect from Debug Tool Shift F6 B Stop Shift F Go F5 Ignore break and go F8 Steph F11 a Step Over F10 Return Out Shift F11 ey GPU Reset Ctrl F5 Ky Restart 2 9 1 Reset microcontroller CPU To reset CPU click the button on the debug toolbar When CPU is reset the current PC value is set to the reset address Remark You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values after CPU reset see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details 2 9 2 Execute programs The following types of CubeSuite execution functions are provided Select any of the following operations according to the purpose of debugging See 2 10 Stop Programs Break for details on how to stop the program in execution 1 Execute after resetting microcontroller CPU 2 Execute from the current address R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 88 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Execute after changing PC value Remarks 1 You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values before executing the program see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details
97. as desired by a drag and drop operation Cautions 1 No other categories can be created within a category 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one Watch panel If an attempt is made to create more categories exceeding this limit a message is displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 308 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark If categories or watch expressions in a Watch panel are drag and dropped into another Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 the categories or watch expressions are copied into the target Watch panel b Expanding collapsing the display The watch expression indicating an array pointer type variable a structure union class or a register only those that bear a name representing a part is marked with a at the beginning so that when you click the sign the next entry is expanded for display when expanded the sign changes to a Watch expression Contents when expanded All elements in an array They can be displayed as a character string by selecting Notation and then ASCII on the context menu up to 256 characters displayable However if not displayable because of encode type a or is displayed Pointer type variable A variable at the destination pointed to by a pointer Structure union class All members of a structure union class Register The name of a bit or bit string that comprises a register Example For PSW register
98. auto variables be aware that the exact values of local variables cannot be displayed at the prolog of functions in functions and epilog of functions in functions The addresses of auto variables are relative addresses from the stack pointer SP so that they are indefinite until the SP value is fixed in the function As the SP is manipulated at the prolog and epilog its value is indefinite Therefore exact values cannot be displayed at the prolog and epilog This area has the following features a Registration of watch expressions C variables can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions For details on how to register See 1 Registering watch expressions Remark The registered watch expressions have their scope specification automatically given b Jump to memory Selecting Jump to Memory from the context menu opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret moved to the address at which a selected local variable is located If the Memory panel Memory1 is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 302 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Local Variables panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Local Variables panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse
99. be entered directly from the keyboard new line code ignored When you ve finished editing a character string press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area to complete the character string editing R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 316 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Reacquires all values of registered watch expressions to update the display However the I O registers protected against reads are not reloaded g Resets the highlighting for a selected watch expression which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution However this is disabled during program execution E Registers a new watch expression Enter a watch expression directly in the text box see c Registering a new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one Watch panel Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one Watch panel No other categories can be created within a category Deletes a selected range of character string If a watch expression or category is selected the item is deleted However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Notation Shows the following buttons to change the display form of values Buta Dis
100. be used if the value remained unchanged Caution The number of view columns is automatically changed in accordance with the set value of Size Notation of the context menu This area has the following features a Popup display When the mouse cursor is placed on top of a memory value the following content is displayed in a popup box relative to the symbol nearest in forward direction to the address indicated by the mouse cursor However if symbol information is nonexistent i e if the memory value is not underlined no popup is displayed variable 0x14 Symbol name Offset value Symbol name A symbol name is displayed Offset value If the address has no symbols defined an offset from the symbol nearest in forward to it is displayed always in hexadecimal R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 271 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b c d e Realtime display update function Using the realtime display update function it is possible to display or change memory values even while the program is under execution not just when the program is halted For details about the realtime display update function see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution Edit memory values You can edit a memory value directly from the keyboard by simply moving the caret to the memory value you wish to change When a memory value is edited the a
101. being opened is displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 71 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Displaying variables When hovering the mouse cursor over a variable in the source text a pop up that shows the name and value of the variable is displayed lt variable name gt lt variable value gt The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default depending on the type of the variable Figure 2 76 Pop up Display of Variables Editor Panel m minute m secon dot tla init Mouse cursor 0 0x0 5 Searching for characters To search for characters in the source text use the Find and Replace dialog box that is opened by selecting the button on the toolbar In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to search for characters Figure 2 77 Character Search in Source Text Find and Replace Dialog Box Find and Replace Quick Find Find in Files Quick Replace Replace in Files Search text main Search location Current document main c a Specifying Search text Enter characters to search A word variable function at the caret position in the Editor panel is specified by default If you want to change it directly enter the characters into the text box up to 1024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 items b Specif
102. by an external editor etc default Remark This feature is enabled only when the Enable Rapid Build checkbox is checked Caution Incase any nonexistent source file one grayed out in the project tree is registered in the project checking this box will not start the monitoring even when the said file is registered again by the Explorer etc To activate the monitoring mode you need to either reload the project file or check this box again after unchecking it and closing this dialog box 3 Show dependency files in project tree Displays the group of files on which the source file depends as a project tree Does not display the group of files on which the source file depends as a project tree default 4 Output quality record file when build is successful Outputs a quality record file if the build is successful Does not output a quality record file if the build is successful default Remarks 1 The quality report file is not output when a rapid build is executed a debug only project is built and compiling or assembling is executed in file units 2 The following information item is output to the quality report file Time and date on which the file is created Log of the build results Information on the command file which is used during building Information on the detailed version of this product or the current project 3 The quality report file is output with the file name QuarityReport project name
103. can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Mnemonic Specify a character string of instruction if needed as the search condition The character string specified here is searched from within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel Enter an instruction directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Access Address Specify an access address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The access address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address expressions in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Access Status This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified Select the type of access from the drop down list below When not limiting the type of access selec
104. data to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see e Saving of trace data Edit Menu Trace Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Trace panel is as follows All other items are disabled However all of these items are disabled during program execution Copies the content of a selected line as a character string to the clipboard multiple selection not accepted Opens the Trace Search dialog box Context menu Clear Trace Clears initializes the trace memory and also clears the display of this panel However this is disabled during program execution Start Trace Restarts the trace function that was halted during program execution However this is disabled when the program is halted or when tracer operation is underway Stop Trace Temporarily stops the trace function during program execution However this is disabled when the program is halted or when the tracer is halted Opens the Trace Search dialog box However this is disabled during program execution Copies the content of a selected line as a character string to the clipboard multiple selection not accepted However this is disabled during program execution Mixed View Changes the display mode to a Mixed display mode However this is disabled during program execution Disassemble View Changes the display mode to a Disassemble display mode However this is disabled during pro
105. debug tool from CubeSuite to terminate communication R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 10 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 15 Save the project file Save the setting information of the project to the project file Remark For details on Save the project file see CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 11 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Preparation before Debugging This section describes the preparation to start debugging the created program 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine Connection examples for each debug tool are shown Note that the relationship between the microcontroller selected in the project and the connectable debug tools is as the following table Remark Serial JTAG in the table below means that E1 E20 is used with FINE communications or JTAG communications Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Microcontroller Debug Tool E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG Simulator RX610 RX621 RX62N RX62T and RX62G Groups RX630 RX631 RX63N and RX63T Groups RX210 Group 1 E1 2 E20 3 Simulator 1 E1 Connect a host machine and E1 If required connect a target board too You can make a choice between FINE communications E1 Serial and
106. dialog box A search is performed within the Memory value area or the Character string area whichever has the caret in it R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 275 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context Menu Register to Watch1 Registers the symbol at the caret position on the Watch panel Watch1 When symbols are registered as watch expressions they are registered as variable names Because of this displayed symbol names vary by scope However if the address corresponding to the memory value at the caret position has no symbols defined this menu is disabled see f Register watch expressions Find Opens the Memory Search dialog box A search is performed within the Memory value area or Character string area unless the floating point value display is selected whichever has the caret in it However this menu is disabled during program execution Fill Opens the Memory Initialize dialog box Refresh Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display Copy Copies a selected range as character string to the clipboard However this menu is disabled during program execution Paste Pastes the copied character string from the clipboard to the caret position However this menu is disabled during program execution To paste in the memory value area see e Copy and paste To paste in the character
107. disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Go from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position and continues running it ignoring the break and action events set However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Ignore break and go from the Debug menu Resets the CPU once and then starts running the program from the reset address However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Restart from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one stepNote of each panel Step In execution at a time updating the content For a function call the program stops at the beginning of the called function However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Step In from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one stepNote of each panel step over execution at a time updating the content For a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all of the source lines or instructions in that function are executed successively in one step until a place is re
108. displaying this panel in the mixed display mode it is also possible to display the instruction code label and disassembled text corresponding to a source code see 1 Changing the display mode When opened the file encoding Shift_JIS EUC JP UTF 8 and newline code is automatically detected and retained when it is saved You can open a file with a specific encoding selected in the Encoding dialog box If the encoding and newline code is specified in the Save Settings dialog box then the file is saved with those settings This panel can be opened multiple times max 100 panels Remarks 1 When a project is closed all of the Editor panels displaying a file being registered in the project are closed 2 When a file is excluded from a project the Editor panel displaying the file is closed 3 A message is shown when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to be opened This is due to the debug information not matching the source code being viewed Figure A 20 Editor Panel 1 T f Sample c Toolbar 80L BS gt m1 Columns Line 444 Address E iat o 24 25 void main void 26 27 Start user code 28 28 ceecesse JP _ NNNNITINDOWNSTE RIE je 30 ffEf855c TMP1_Start 31 frreeseo ea 32 33 while 10 34 35 f LEfe564 49 36 fELELESES func2 37 38 J 39 End user code 40 An ad 2 gt a an p
109. double quotes Example c folder prog abs file c func var 46 L1 8 amp 7 t 45457 5 lt gt 2 To specify a function and variable defined in a name space be sure to write scope Example Scope func Also if functions with the same name exist write the type of parameter expressly Example func int int 3 Ifthe current PC value exists in a specified function the local variables that are not declared as static also comprise the subject to be searched 4 A search is made for local variables static variables inside a file and global variables from the scope of the current PC value in that order The local variables and the static variables inside a file that are out of scope are not searched for R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 311 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 8 Handling of a CPU Register when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Scope specification Register bank CPU register name Table A 9 Handling of an I O Register when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Scope specification I O register name ADO ADCR IOR ADO ADCR ADO ADCR ADO ADCR Remarks 1 A symbol name at the current caret position can be supplemented by pressing the Ctrl and Space keys together in this area See 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 _Immediates are handled as a numeric value Also operators can be used for immediates 3 Arithmetic ex
110. events 2 E1 E20 Break events access related are displayed as Read Write or Read Write in the detailed information on the combination break in the Events panel a Set a break event access related to a variable I O register in the source text disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembled text is displayed Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting an arbitrary variable or I O register in the source text disassembled text Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions and static variables inside files can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a break event access related has been set at the target variable I O register and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 98 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Access Type Operation E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set Read Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading On the other hand if no value is specified reading the selected variable by any value will cause the
111. exclusively of each other Therefore while the RRM function is in use the point trace cannot be used Also the access event is usable only when the RRM block has free space 4 There are 4 execution related events and 2 access related events which are shared by multiple functions 5 If the combination condition for the combination break is Sequential the maximum number of events that can be set differs with each microcontroller used as shown below RX600 Series 7 events reset event R event RX200 Series 3 events reset event R event 6 If the maximum number of execution related events have already been used as trace start trace end events or timer start timer end events Go to Here in the context menu of the Editor panel or Disassemble panel is not usable Also it is not possible to run the program to the address of a specified symbol after the CPU has been reset 7 For each of timer start and end events only a single execution related event or access related event can be specified R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 184 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Hardware breaks execution related before execution and actions Printf events are shared by multiple functions Software breaks and actions Printf events are shared by multiple functions 2 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution Types of events that can be set or removed during execution
112. execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when floating point exception occurs RX600 Series Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a floating point exception occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when interrupt occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an interrupt occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop INT instruction is executed Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an NT instruction is executed This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How t
113. expressions Watch Value Type Byte Size Address g R3 REG 0x00000000 General Registersi4g g R4 REG 0x00000000 General Registersi4g Enter a watch expression directly in this area Enter a watch expression in the entry box directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key For the input forms of watch expressions entered this way see the tables listed below Table A 5 Watch expression Input Form Table A 7 Handling of a C Variable when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Table A 8 Handling of a CPU Register when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Table A 9 Handling of an I O Register when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 127 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 c To register from other applications Select a C variable CPU register I O register or assembler symbol character string from an external editor or the like and then drag and drop it directly onto the Watch panel Watch1 through Watch4 In this case the character string you ve dropped is registered as a watch expression directly as it is Putting the registered watch expressions in order The registered watch expressions can be classified by a category fold
114. file or I O register as the condition for a combination break event see 1 Set a beak event execution related Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20 Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Sets a break event by a write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Seta break event access related to a variable I O register Break Option R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Opens the Property panel to set the break function ztENESAS Page 266 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event Note that even
115. from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However if a build fails no download is executed This is the same as selecting Build and download to the debug tool from the Debug menu Downloads a specified file to the active project s debug tool If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However this item is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution This is the same as selecting Download from the Debug menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 206 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Resets the CPU program is not executed However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting CPU Reset from the Debug menu Forcibly halts the currently executed program However this item is disabled when the program is already halted or disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Stop from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position and when the condition for a set break event holds true stops the program under execution However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when
116. in R1 SIM_I0 R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R2 Set the value of R2 4 bytes new offset in R1 Set the value of R1 in the location pointed to by R5 offset pointer Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 462 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX C INDEX APPENDIX C A Access width 353 Access related event 140 176 Action event 168 341 360 Action Events dialog box 360 Interrupt Event Setting tab 365 Printf event tab 362 Address Offset Settings dialog box 371 Address range 353 After execution post execution break 96 Allowable number of valid events 183 AND 103 180 Array 302 309 Auto variables 302 B Before execution pre execution break 94 Before execution pre execution event 395 Big endian 115 Binary data format 56 59 62 Break 24 38 Break event 96 103 185 Break event access related 183 184 Break event execution related 96 183 184 Break factor 94 104 Breakpoint 24 94 Built in event 139 156 174 337 Cc Call stack information 322 Call Stack panel 322 Channel number 158 338 Clock 1
117. in code are executed at least once then CO 100 2 15 1 Configure the coverage measurement To use the coverage facility it is necessary to make coverage measurement related settings in advance Make settings in the Coverage Simulator category on the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel Figure 2 153 Coverage Category Simulator E Coverage Use coverage function Yes Reuse coverage result No 1 Use coverage function Specify by a drop down list whether or not you want to use the coverage function To use the coverage function select Yes By default No is selected 2 Reuse result This property is displayed only when Use coverage function property is set to Yes Specify from the drop down list whether to automatically save the acquired code coverage measurement result when disconnecting from the debug tool and reproduce it next time you connect to the debug tool To reproduce the contents of the last obtained code coverage measurement results select Yes By default No is selected 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results Coverage measurement starts ends automatically with the start end of the program execution 1 Code coverage rates a Display of code coverage rates for source lines and disassemble lines The code coverage rates are indicated on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel that is displaying the target program On each panel the target source text lines and disassembled
118. in the mixed display mode Cancels the previous Undo operation and restores the characters and the caret position Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 259 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position Note that this item is disabled when the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters or this panel is in the mixed display mode The mode selected for the current source file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Deletes one character at the caret position When there is a selection area all the characters in the area are deleted Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Select All Selects all the characters from beginning to the end in the currently editing text file Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Find Ope
119. it is possible to check information on the timer start and end events you ve set R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 160 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 16 Event Marks of the Timer Start and End Events Timer start Timer end Figure 2 150 Example of Timer Start and End Events Set Disassemble panel Event area Indicates that a timer start i 3i PANE chi Id2 PESEE 5 UUUUUSt 2 b oUftZbU0 event is set 74 OO0003f 6 Ita lel Indicates that a timer end z 0 U U 0 U of o jc UUUe Lae O00003falte abfd event is set 75 Caution Simulator If the timer start and end events occur at the same instruction execution the operation depends on the measurement state as follows When timer measurement has started Timer measurement stops and the measured time is reflected in the result When timer measurement has not started Timer measurement is not done Remark Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled Also if a new event is set at a place where an event has already been set the event mark F8 is displayed indicating that multiple events have been set 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs When an instruction for which a timer start event or timer end event has been set is executed a timer measurement is started or finished After execu
120. label is defined at an address an offset value from the nearest label is displayed Source text If Mixed display mode or Source display mode is selected the corresponding source text is displayed However if a location without debug information is executed the text No Debug Information is displayed Instruction disassembled result If Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode is selected the corresponding instruction disassembled result is displayed Note The mnemonic is highlighted Note If collection of trace data failed with some data dropped the word LOST is displayed and the whole of the relevant line is displayed in an error color The error color depends on how the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box is set This area has the following features a Display mode One of the following three display modes can be selected by clicking the appropriate toolbar button or by selecting from a context menu Display mode Displayed content Mixed display mode Instruction disassemble label name and source text corresponding source line are displayed default Disassemble display mode Instruction disassemble and label name are displayed Source display mode Source text corresponding source line is displayed However if a location without debug information is executed the text No Debug Information is displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page
121. load module when it was created For example to set 0x200 in the PID register when the load module is executed enter 200 for this item Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF value Notes 1 Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugging cannot be performed 2 If you select Yes for load modules created not using the PIC PID functions see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function debug operation cannot be guaranteed c Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the download conditions changed 2 Adding a download file hex mot or bin To add a file to download hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Clicking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download file list area b Setting the properties of a download file to add In the Download file property area select a download file you want to add and set its download conditions For each displayed item make the following setting When setting is completed the file name you ve specified here is reflected in the blank item in the Download file list area Specify a download file to add hex format hex
122. lt Greater than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Signed Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Data is compared with the sign included Unsigned Data is compared with no sign included Notes 1 For Inverse sign and Difference since comparison is made with the previous data the condition never holds true after a reset and in the first determination of whether condition is true 2 The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified Function buttons Buttons Functions Applies the detailed settings made in this dialog box to the access related events before closing the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 408 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator This dialog is used to display and change detailed information on an interrupt event selected on the Events panel Figure A 65 Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events Dialog Box Simulator Toolbar 4 22 4 CH E M ddress E iPass Count Pass count E Interrupt Interrupt vector Priority Address 2 4 Displays the address where t
123. measurement counter used 3 Line Address area This area displays the address of an assembly instruction or a line number in the source file The desired notation numerical representation or character string encode can be selected by clicking the appropriate toolbar button or by selecting from a context menu The display form is as follows Type of displayed line Display form Instruction disassemble lt Address gt Source text lt File name gt lt Line number gt Label Point trace result Remark Since the following execution histories are not displayed the line numbers are not consecutive CPU register access Invalid fetch R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 328 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Source Disassemble area This area displays collected trace data as shown below Note that the items displayed in this area differ with each display mode selected see a Display mode Figure A 36 Contents Displayed in the Source Disassemble Area Default Source Disassemble Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode Source text 56 NOP maint Offset value gt 57 BSAA _main Label name gt tutoriall 0 BSR w _tutorial _ tutorial void tutorial yoid 0 PUSHM R6 A8 Instruction disassembled result Label name If a label is defined at an address the label name is displayed Offset value If no
124. met a measurement of the program s execution time begins and then ends displayed when either a trace start event or a trace end event is set gt See 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Point Trace This event is such that when a specified variable or I O register is accessed by program execution the accessed information is recorded in trace memory gt See 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 This event is such that program execution is momentarily halted at any location and then a printf command is executed by a software process i e an action event gt See 2 16 1 Insert printf 2tENESAS Page 337 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Interrupt This event generates an interrupt at any place during program execution Simulator action event gt See 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator Notes 1 A breakpoint that is set by clicking the mouse once is displayed as Break see 2 Seta breakpoint 2 This is an event that is set by default in the debug tool 3 E1 E20 Timer measurement sections are assigned channel numbers for each event type as their identification numbers example Timer Result 1 The number of sections in which timer measurements are possible differs with each microcontroller used RX600 Series Two sections RX200 Series One section Simulator Onl
125. move the caret to By default the number of the line where the caret is currently located in the Editor panel is displayed b Clicking the OK button The caret moves to the specified line 7 Jumping to functions It automatically recognizes the currently selected characters or the word at the caret position as the function name and jumps to the first executable line of the target function Select Jump to Function from the context menu after moving the caret to the target function on the source text Figure 2 79 Jump to Functions 97 98 FELCs ed Funct 99 fff86e3 func amp 100 i sis 1 Ena user Ps Register Action Event 102 Cut Ctrl x 103 104 Start user code qa Copy riec 105 Efff86ed void funcl E 106 107 UINT i A Find Ctrl F 108 l GoTo Ctrl G 109 Efff83 ef for i 0 110 ZEZEAGA Fund 111 Back to Last Cursor Position 112 113 L Goto Here 114 Efff8711 void funcla gt Set PC to Here 115 116 UINT i lt a Jump to Function F12 gt lt Tag Jump X Shift F1 Note that this function is available only when the following conditions are satisfied for each specific build tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 73 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a When CC RX is used The target is a function variable or label in C language The focus is in the Editor panel b When an external build tool is us
126. ne ne value of R2 file number in R5 address of the parameter block in R2 address of the output buffer in R4 value of R4 output buffer in R2 4 bytes value of R1 output character in the location pointed to by R4 output buffer Set t Set t Set t ne ne ne value of R5 in R2 1 bytes file number function code of FPUTC in R1 address of the system call in R3 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R1 Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called Parameter block area Input output buffer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 457 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Checks for end of file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Not EOF 1 EOF detected File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Detailed Description Checks for end of file Example PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes 010B0000h R1 Set the function code of FEOF in R1 SIM_I0 R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R2 Set the f
127. occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value 1 to 16 383 3 Interrupt Interrupt vector Specifies an interrupt vector Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value 0x00 to OxFF R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 410 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Priority Function buttons APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specifies an interrupt s priority level Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value RX610 group 1to8 If 8 is specified the interrupt will act as a fast interrupt Other than RX610 group 1 to 16 If 16 is specified the interrupt will act as a fast interrupt Buttons Functions Applies the detailed settings made in this dialog box to interrupt events and then closes the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 411 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Port Setting dialog box This dialog box sets a COM port on the host machine to which communication from the microcontroller is redirected Figure A 66 Port Setting Dialog Box Port Setting COM P
128. on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal default Z 0 2 0 E Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in Float Except for 4 byte data or when values have type information however they are displayed in predetermined notation Displays values on this panel in Double Except for 8 byte data or when values have type information however they are displayed in predetermined notation Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code default Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string variables in UTF 16 code 2 Changing the contents of local variables The values of local variables and parameter values can be edited Select the value of the subject local variable or the value of parameters to it in the Value area and click on it again The selected value is plac
129. program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts 1000 Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops Cautions 1 In the Routine to run immediately before execution starts property and the Routine to run immediately after execution stops property you can also specify function name when using C language or label name when using Assembly language as property values Use an interrupt stack when using a stack inside the specified routine Describe a return sub routine RTS instruction for terminating the specified routine processing The processing time of one specified routine must not exceed 100ms If a clock remains halted in the specified routine it may affect the control over the debug tool The register value for the start of the specified routine is not determined As such you need to perform initial setting of the register value in the specified routine Immediately before execution or immediately after stop of the specified routine execution enters a stopped state under control of the debug tool The stop period is determined as follows according to the value specified for the Communication method property in the Connection with Target Board E1 E20 category on the C
130. property is selected Mapping values cannot be changed on this panel Display Displays the state of memory mapping per type of memory area Contents Note that when the mark for each memory type is clicked the next detailed information is displayed Memory type Start address End address Access width bits E1 E20 Note 2 Note 3 Note 2 Endian R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 231 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Verify on writing to Specify whether or not to perform a verify check when memory values are initialized memory E1 E20 Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes A verify check is performed value No A verify check is not performed Notes 1 This refers to the type of memory mapped areas registered in a device file 2 The access width and the endian can only be changed when Memory type is an external area and the debug tool is disconnected Also the specifiable value differs with each selected microcontroller 3 The endian information differs in displayed contents and specifiable values depending on Memory Type External area E1 E20 Specify one of the following by selecting from the drop down list Same as MCU endian or different from MCU endian I O register area One of the following is displayed Little endian data or big endian data Emulation ROM area a
131. property while connected to the Simulator c Clock You can configure clock in this category Figure 2 46 Clock Category Simulator E Clock System clock ICLK frequency MHz 50 lt 1 gt System clock ICLK frequency MHz Specify the clock frequency for the CPU unit MHz Directly enter the value between 1 MHz and 1 000 MHz 100 is specified for the RX600 Series and 50 for the RX200 Series by default Caution You cannot change this property while connected to the Simulator d Peripheral Function Simulation You can configure simulation of peripheral functions in this category Figure 2 47 Peripheral Function Simulation Category El Peripheral Function Simulation El Peripheral function simulation module 2 0 CMT 1 ICU Peripheral clock rate 1 lt 1 gt Peripheral function simulation module It displays the name of available peripheral function simulation modules and lets you select from the drop down list whether to use each module being displayed Select Use when using the module Not Use is selected by default You cannot change the name of peripheral function simulation modules on this panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 43 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Peripheral clock rate Specify from the drop down list the peripheral to internal clock ratio that shows the number of internal clock that is equivalent to 1 peripheral clock
132. range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugging cannot be performed If you select Yes for load modules created not using the PIC PID functions see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function debug operation cannot be guaranteed For the load module files that do not require symbol information you can set No for the Download symbol information item to reduce the amount of memory used However this file cannot be debugged at the source level c Confirming the order in which a download is executed A download is executed in the order in which files are displayed in the Download file list area To change the order use the Up or Down button to move any file up or down in the list d Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified load module file added as a download file The added file is displayed in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files Even when a file in hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin is specified to be the subject file to download it is possible to do source level debug by downloading symbol information for the load module file from which the subject file was created along with the subject file that you download
133. regardless of the specification made in 1 Set the type of breakpoints break timing to use E1 E20 by the operation described below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 95 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Operation1 Operation2 Hardware breakpoint Ctrl mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Hardware Break from the context menu Software breakpoint Shift mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Software Break from the context menu Caution Operation 1 is enabled only in the Disassemble panel 3 Edit a hardware breakpoint When editing a hardware break point you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the hardware break point you wish to edit on the Events panel click Edit Condition on the context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the selected hardware break point For details on editing in the dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events 4 Delete a breakpoint Click event marks displayed in the Editor panel Disassemble panel to delete breakpoints you have set the event mark will be erased You can also delete a break point on the Events panel which opens by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the breakpoint you wish to delete on the Events panel click in the tool bar to delete it see 2 17 5 Deleting events for details 2 10 3 Stop
134. result lines are shown in color coded background see Table 2 20 according to their code coverage rate that was calculated based on the formula described in Table 2 19 The results are not shown when disconnected from the debug tool or during the program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 165 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Selecting Clear coverage information from the context menu will reset all the coverage information acquired including the color coding on each panel Table 2 19 Calculating Code Coverage Rates for Source Lines and Disassemble Lines Calculation method Editor panel Number of bytes executed in the address area corresponding to the source line Total number of bytes present in the address area corresponding to the source line Disassemble panel Number of bytes executed in the address area corresponding to the disassembled result line Total number of bytes present in the address area corresponding to the disassembled result line Table 2 20 Color coded Code Coverage Measurement Results Default Code Coverage Background Color 100 Sours tex disassembled results 1 to 99 Source text disassembled results 0 not executed Source text disassembled results Remarks 1 The code coverage measurement result displayed on each panel is updated at every program break 2 The above color coding rule is determined according to the settings in
135. select any memory value immediately before opening this dialog box the value you ve selected is displayed by default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 113 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Specifying the Search Range Select the range in which to search from the drop down list below Specify address range A search is conducted within the address range specified by Address Memory mapping A search is conducted within the selected range of memory mapping This list item displays memory mappings individually except non mapped areas that are displayed in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Display form lt memory type gt lt address range gt lt size gt c Specifying the Address This item is valid only when you ve selected Specify Address Range in b Specifying the Search Range Specify the start address end address to set the address range in which you want a memory value to be searched Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the address expressions you ve entered are respectively handled as the start address and end address However searchable addresses are limited to the upper limit address of the program space OxFFFFFFFF Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the va
136. so that the displayed symbol name varies with scope Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event at an address at the caret position Go to Here Executes the program from an address indicated by the current PC value to an address corresponding to the line where the caret is positioned However this is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution Set PC to Here Changes the current PC value to an address of the line where the caret currently exists However this is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution Go To Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to a specified address Go to Symbol Moves the caret to the position where a selected symbol is defined Back to Address Moves the caret to a position address at which it was immediately before being moved by Go to Symbol However this is disabled when no symbol names are displayed at address R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 284 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Break Settings APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the following cascaded menu to set break related events Note that events can only be set on event settable lines see 1 Event area Set Hardware Break Sets a breakpoint hardware break event at the address where the caret is positioned see 2 10 2 Stop the program
137. start address and end address No address values can be specified that are greater than the microcontroller s address space Caution Note that an address range that covers areas with different endians cannot be specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Initialize data area Specify the initialization data to be written into memory To specify initialization data enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries To specify multiple pieces of initialization data specify a maximum of 16 pieces of up to 4 byte data 8 characters by separating each with a space Each piece of initialization data are interpreted as comprising 1 byte in units of 2 characters from the tail end of the character string If the data consists of an odd number of characters the first character in it is assumed to be comprising 1 byte R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 372 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that if the data consists of 2 bytes or more it is converted before being written into the target memory to an appropriate byte sequence that suits the project s endian as shown below Input character string initialization data Written in image in bytes Little endian Big endian
138. state match If endians are different the project and microcontroller cannot be connected correctly 8 External Flash E1 E20 Displays detailed information on external flash or changes settings made in it External flash definition Specify an external flash definition file file The number of external flash definition files that can be registered is displayed as a main property This property is expanded to display the file name address range and download conditions as sub properties If no external flash definition files are registered sub properties other than File are not displayed Default Main item 4 Sub items Blank How to Main item change Not changeable Sub items lt File gt By selecting in the External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 The External flash memory dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column of this property when it is selected lt Start address gt Not changeable lt End address gt Not changeable lt Erase external flash ROM before download gt By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Yes The external flash ROM is erased before downloading value No The external flash ROM is not erased before downloading Display Main item content Number of external flash definition files Sub items By clicking the mark of an external
139. taken in only one section Caution RX200 Series This property is not displayed because its measurement counter is 24 bits x 1 only 2 Operating frequency MHz Specify the counter s operating frequency that is referenced when converting count values into time Enter a numeric value directly in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 in MHz units to specify it If no operating frequency is specified count values are displayed Cautions 1 The result of timer measurement event is calculated based on the operating frequency entered in this property and count values Therefore using a program that switches operating frequencies while the program is running will result in incorrect measurement result 2 Timer measurement proceeds even if the microcontroller is reset However the results may not be correct because the clock settings for measurement have been initialized 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop The debug tool has a preinstalled function to measure a program s execution time from start to stop Run Break time Therefore when a program starts running its execution time is automatically measured The measurement result can be confirmed by one of the following methods 1 Checking the status bar for confirmation 2 Checking the Events panel for confirmation Cautions 1 The measurement result of the Run Break timer event includes the time between the start of the measurement and the program execution as well as the time b
140. temporarily stopping the program at an arbitrary position To use this function follow the steps below Set a Printf event Execute the program 3 Check the output result Edit Printf event Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on Printf event settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 No Printf events occur during step execution sz I E or execution ignoring break related events 1 Set a Printf event Set a Printf event to the position where you want to execute the printf command in the Editor panel Disassemble panel In the Editor panel Disassemble panel move the caret to the line address te at which you want to set a Printf event and then select Register Action Event from the context menu to open the following Action Events dialog box In this dialog box follow the steps below Note Printf events cannot be set to lines with no address indication R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 168 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 156 Set Printf Event Action Events Dialog Box Printf event Tab Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output string Example Sample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc Address C Test Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 Cancel a Specify Output string Directly enter fro
141. than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Edit the combination condition for a combination break comprised of multiple events set or for a trace The combination condition for a trace can be set by specifying a condition for start and for end respectively by switching tabs To edit the combination condition of events use the Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 that is displayed by the following operation on the Events panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 179 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Combination break Move the caret to combination break and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Move the caret to a trace and then select Edit Condition from the context menu a Editing the combination condition Select the combination condition between OR AND or Sequential from the pull down menu For the explanation of operation per combination condition see 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 and 2 Combining multiple events E1 E20 Figure 2 162 Combination item Combination Sequential Cautions 1 For trace events the combination condition available for a trace end event is only OR 2 AND cannot be used as the combination condition fo
142. that elements are not displayed in customized order Indicates that elements are displayed in customized order default Drag and drop a category node or file name to customize the order in which they are displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 212 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Using Debug Tool Shows a cascaded menu to select the debug tool used Note that the debug tools displayed here differ with the microcontroller type selected for the project see Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Microcontroller type E1 Serial Uses E1 in serial communication mode Microcontroller type E1 JTAG Uses E1 in JTAG communication mode Microcontroller type E20 Serial Uses E20 in serial communication mode Microcontroller type E20 JTAG Uses E20 in JTAG communication mode Microcontroller type Simulator Uses the simulator Property Displays the properties of the selected debug tool on the Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 213 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel displays per category detailed information about a debug tool selected on the Project Tree panel and changes the setting made in it Figure A 4 Property Panel Example When E20 JTAG is Selected Property Sl
143. the trace event selected on the Events panel Remark See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on event setting Figure A 58 Combination Condition Dialog Box Combination Break Combination Condition 1 f Break 2 4 Combination Sequential Object event No Event Up 1 After Execution sort c 13 Oxffff85dd 2 Read g_IntBuf 0x142c Ox1 42f 0x55 Reset event Event After Execution sort c 17 Oxffff85e5 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 388 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 59 Combination Condition Dialog Box Trace Event Combination Condition 1 Start Condition End Condition 2 4 Combination OR Object event Event Read Write q_ CharBuf 0 1000 0 1000 0x2 After Execution sort c 1 Oxffff8Sde Reset event Event Release This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to the combination break of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the trace of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 389 of 471 Oct 01
144. the connection to the debug tool is successfully completed the Status bar on the Main window will change as shown below For details on each item displayed on the Status bar see the section of the Main window Figure 2 61 Status Bar Indicating the Successful Hot plug in Connection to the Debug Tool l 24 DISCONNECT RUN Running S RXELJITAG C Measuring 05 This area shows information on the currently active debug tool RUN indicates that the program is running Cautions 1 The trace function will not be available until the program breaks following the completion of hot plug in connection 2 The real time RAM monitor function RRM function will not be available until the program breaks following the completion of hot plug in connection Do not select Real time RAM monitor for the Usage of trace function property under the Trace category 3 Once the hot plug in connection is established all the events that have been set in the project as the user information excluding built in event will be deleted 4 When conducting hot plug in connection do not use a project for which software break point is set as it may result in unsuccessful connection Check that all the software break points are deleted in the Events panel of the active project before starting hot plug in connection see 2 17 5 Deleting events 5 The emulator stops the program temporarily for approximately 800us to check the ID code at hot plug i
145. the corresponding source line b Saving the call stack information Selecting Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu will open the Save As dialog box in which you can save all contents of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save call stack information see 4 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information c Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Call Stack panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Call Stack panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 323 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Each button in the toolbar are disabled during program execution E Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays va
146. the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program the color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage measurement Hovering the mouse cursor over this area displays the area title Coverage This area is provided with the following function a Clearing the coverage information via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed Clear Coverage Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Information Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Address area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened This area shows the address corresponding to where the function is located in the memory space of the selected microcontroller The format of this area is fixed as hexadecimal number notation The address width corresponds to the one in memory space of the specified microcontroller in the project Op code area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in the mixed display m
147. to the relevant line number in the file pertaining to the message at the caret position Stop Searching Halts the search currently under execution However this menu is disabled when no searches are being executed Help for Message Displays help for a message at the current caret position However this menu applies to only warning and error messages R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 348 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Console panel This panel exchanges data between the console and program This is accomplished by executing a program which has standard library functions implemented in it Note that this panel can be opened only when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Figure A 39 Debug Console Panel Debug Console This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Edit menu Debug Console panel only items Context menu How to open Select Debug Console from the View menu Description of each area 1 VO area The standard library functions implemented in the program include for example the scanf function for reading the data entered from the keyboard and the printf function for outputting data Also by specifying a COM port on the panel it is possible to redirect standard I O of the program to the specified COM port To use this function the program must have the low level interface
148. trace Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data memory is full Default Non stop and overwrite to trace memory How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Non stop and overwrite Continues overwriting trace data even after trace value to trace memory memory is used up Stop trace Stops overwriting trace data when trace memory is E1 E20 used up Stop Stops running the program and overwriting trace data when trace memory is used up Trace data type Specify the type of data to be acquired from trace E1 E20 Default Branch How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value RX600 Series Branch branch data access or data access RX200 Series Branch or data access External trace output Specify the method for trace output to external device E20 JTAG RX600 Series Default CPU execution How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable CPU execution CPU execution has priority over trace output value Trace output Trace output has priority over CPU execution Do not output Trace information is not output R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev
149. trace data begins when all of the trace start events set occur irrespective of time base Sequential Collection of trace data begins when the trace start events set occur in a specified order Also an event but only one of trace start events can be registered as a reset event R event When a registered event occurs the other trace start events that have had occurred up to that point of time are all cleared To edit a set trace event choose Event from the View menu select the trace event on the Events panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu Do your editing in a dialog box that is opened by this operation For details on how to edit in a dialog box see 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Cautions 1 When the combination conditions are sequential access related events can be specified at up to the third place in the sequence 2 When the combination conditions are sequential access related events that have had address area conditions set can be specified at only the first place in the sequence 3 The combination condition specifiable for a trace end condition is only OR 3 Executing the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs Collection of trace data is started or finished when the condition set for a trace start event or trace end event is met For details on how to check the collected trace data see 2 13 6 Displaying an execution
150. view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 Remark The following items can be customized by setting the Option dialog box Display fonts Tab interval Show or hide whitespace marks Colors of reserved words comments Toolbar Toggles between normal default and mixed display mode as the display mode of this panel see 1 Changing the display mode Clicking this button sets to the mixed display mode Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel Toggles between source default and instruction level as the unit in which the program is step executed see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps Clicking this button sets the unit of a step execution to instruction level the current PC mark will be moved to a disassembled text line Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the mixed display mode is selected Displays the current PC position Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Forwards to the position before operating Context menu gt gt Back To Last Cursor Position Note that this item is disabled when the mixed display mode is selected Goes back to the position before operating Context menu gt gt Jump to Function Note
151. watcht B X X notation fE B amp X Notation Watch Value Type Byte Size ddre Memo Watch Value Type Byte Size Addre Memo g_ace O 0x01 sigmed char 1 Oxffffdl100 g_ace O 0x01 sigmed char 1 Oxfff 9100 gt gt lt ill lt i R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 84 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections The optimizing linkage editor Optink used by the CC RX provides the start option which allows two or more sections defined in a program to be allocated to a single address Sections that have been allocated in this way are called overlay sections This section describes how to set up the overlay section selection facility for overlay sections in a load module When the program is executed only one of the sections allocated to the same address in the load module is executed The debug tool provides the overlay section selection facility to select a particular overlay section to be debugged preferentially hereafter referred to as the priority section With the priority section selected before execution of the program debugging of that section is simple because debugging information of other sections is hidden An example of using Optink s start option to define overlay sections is given below Example Defining overlay sections by Optlnk start Psect01 1000 Psect02 2000 Psect 03 3000 ram01 ram02 ram03 5000
152. wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio 3 Value area This area displays or changes the values of local variables The notation of a data value and encoding of character strings can be selected using the toolbar buttons or from the context menu Also it is possible to select a display form where hexadecimal display is always added The meaning of marks displayed as values of local variables and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue Local variable values that have been changed by the user Press Enter to write them to the target memory Background color Standard color Text color Sienna Local variable values that have been changed due to program execution Note Background color LightYellow Executing the program again will reset the highlighting color Text color Gray Local variable values that could not be acquired Background color Standard color Note
153. when the focus is in the Disassemble panel or the line information does not exist in the address specified by the current PC value the step execution is conducted in instruction level When the button on the toolbar is valid Step execution is conducted in instruction level Remark The button is only enabled if the mixed display mode is selected on the Editor panel see 1 Changing the display mode Step execution is divided into the following types 1 Step into the function Step In execution 2 Step over the function Step Over execution 3 Execute until return is completed Return Out execution Cautions 1 Break points break events and Printf events that have been set do not occur during step execution 2 E1 E20 Interrupts are not acknowledged during step execution Simulator You may jump to a interrupt handler during step execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 90 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Step into the function Step In execution When the function is called the program is stopped at the top of the called function Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step in execution Cautions 1 Step In execution cannot be performed for a function that has no debug information 2 If Step in execution is performed for the longjmp function program execution may not complete and may wait for a time out 2 Step over the function Step Over execution
154. whether to enable instruction decode cache function Select Yes to enable this function No is selected by default Caution As the instruction decode cache function reuses the decode result it cannot be used in programs that employ self modifying code If an instruction is modified as a result of unintended program operation error detection may not be performed properly 3 Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab you can configure download setting for the debug tool See 2 5 1 Execute downloading for details on each category configuration 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on each category configuration and hook transaction R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 48 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Connect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool This section describes connection to and disconnection from the debug tool including hot plug in connection 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Select the Debug menu gt gt Connect to Debug Tool to connect to the debug tool selected in the currently active project After succeeding in the connection to the debug tool the Status bar of the Main window changes as follows For details on each item displayed on the Status bar see the section of the Main window Fi
155. which 0 is specified d Pass Count Pass count Specify a pass count in decimal The relevant event occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 1 to 256 Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including execution related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series The pass count can only be specified by 1 Any value other than 1 cannot be specified 2 For Simulator a Address Address Displays the address at which an access related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event Modifying Not changeable b Address Condition Compare condition Displays address comparison condition Default No conditions Modifying Not changeable R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 404 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Data Condition Access type Specify the type of access Default Depends on selected event Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Read The specified type of access is a read The specified type of access is a write
156. will not be performed Cautions 1 If there are no character strings in the text box or there are no candidates of the symbol then the list of symbol names will not appear 2 Optimization by the compiler may convert the type of a function parameter to be different from that defined in the program e g func class Foo obj gt func class Foo obj If this is the case the symbol name completion provides the function names after optimization Remark See the explanation of the corresponding panel dialog box as to whether this function can be used or not when inputting a symbol name Memory1 B Notation Figure 2 172 Symbol Name Completion Function C Move when Stop 21 42 42 66 E3 60 oz fff fS9a0 lt 0 1 FB 6C 74 os 35 40 oz 5 60 3F 14 14 FB 60 EF 6E EF FB 2 20 3 Icons for invalid input o Select the target symbol name from this list displayed In some of the dialogs provided by CubeSuite the icon will appear at a point where incorrect characters are entered as a warning sign Remark Placing the cursor over the icon will pop up the information that indicates the characters to be entered R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 200 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix describes in detail the windo
157. with a comma when saved To avoid the problem of an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file c Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end address to set a range of data to be saved in a file Directly enter hexadecimal values or address expressions in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is specified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function d Clicking the Save button Disassembled data is saved in specified format to a specified file Figure 2 85 Disassembled Data Output Image when Saved Label symbol name Label symbol line File name Line number C language source text Source text line Address Offset Code Result of Disassembling Disassembling line Remarks 1 If panel contents are saved over an existing file by selecting Save Disassemble Data on File menu the respective Disassemble panels Disassemble1 4 are handled individually Also as to the save range the pre
158. 0 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 245 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Before download Specify a process to be executed immediately before load module files are downloaded Default Before download 0 The value in denotes a currently specified number of processes How to By specifying in the Text Edit dialog box change Format One of the following I O register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of an I O register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value CPU register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of the CPU register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value Source single byte space Python script path Process A script file specified by Python script path is executed After download Specify a process to be executed immediately after load module files are downloaded Default After download 0 The value in denotes a currently specified number of processes By specifying in the Text Edit dialog box Format One of the following I O register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of an I O register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value CPU register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of the CPU register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value Source single byte space Python script pat
159. 0 registers area Reserved area Data flash area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 20 registers area Reserved area External area CS External area CS6 External area CS5 External area CS 4 External area CS3 External area CS2 External area CS1 Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area On chip ROM area Yes Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area This property displays only the number of memory areas Expanding Memory mapping property will display the following sub items Memory type Indicates the memory type of the corresponding area Each memory type corresponds to the following areas On chip ROM area Program ROM and data flash Internal RAM On chip RAM area I O registers area Peripheral I O register Divided into areas with different endians for display External area CS7 CS6 CSO External address space CSO to CS7 are displayed separately Other memory area FCU RAM FCU firm user boot R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 22 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Reserved area Areas other than those listed above Start address lt 2 gt Displays the starting address of the corresponding area End address Displays the ending address of the corresponding area Access width bits Displays th
160. 00 E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address F 1000 Work RAM sizelbytes 1024 Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data B External Flash External flash definition file Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of the internal ROM Hoo 00 k Transaction Settings v Settings v R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 217 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 gt E Connection with Emulator 5 P E Connection with T arget Board 6 gt Flash 7 gt la Operating Modes of CPU 8 gt B External Flash External flash definition file Figure A 6 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 JTAG Property Sl AX E1 JTAG Property internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory Emulator serial No Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 Communications method JTAG clock MHz Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes Mode pins setting Register setting Endian No E1 XXXKKXKXK No JTAG 16 5 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal k FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
161. 00000030 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3333 33 33 33 33 3333333333333333 Remark If panel contents are saved over an existing file by selecting Save Memory Data on File menu the respective Memory panels Memory1 4 are handled individually Also as to the save range the previously specified address range is applied when data is saved R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 117 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 2 Displaying and changing the CPU registers Use the CPU Register panel below to display the contents of CPU registers general and control registers or change the register values Choose CPU Register from the View menu For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the CPU Register panel is described Figure 2 116 Displaying the CPU Register Contents CPU Register Panel CPU Register Toolbar Notationy Hex iff control Registers ISP 0x00001838 E usp 0x000016d48 INTE Oxffff8154 E rce Oxffff8E44 HEJ Psw 0x00120004 E BPC 0x00000000 E BPSW 0x00000000 E FINTY 0x00000000 I l Register Name area Value area Following methods of operation are described here 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed 2 Changing the CPU register contents 3 Displaying and changing the CPU register contents during program execution 4 Saving the displayed CPU register contents R20UT
162. 0UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 467 of 471 Revision Record Description Summary Oct 01 2012 First Edition issued CubeSuite V1 03 00 User s Manual RX Debug Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation tENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 651 700 Fax 44 1628 651 804 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place
163. 0UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 31 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA No is displayed as the property value E20 does not support power supply function lt 2 gt Communications method Displays the method of communication used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system Specifying RX E20 Serial for a debug tool in the Project Tree panel will display FINE in this property and specifying RX E20 JTAG will display JTAG You cannot change the value of this property For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use lt 3 gt JTAG clock MHz From the drop down list select the baud rate JTAG clock to be used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when JTAG is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 16 5 default 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Depending on the length or the method of JTAG signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected JTAG clock In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication lt 4 gt FINE baud rate bps From the drop down list select the baud rate FINE
164. 1 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Displaying the disassembled result To display the disassembled result disassembled text of a downloaded program memory content use the Disassemble panel shown below Choose Disassemble from the View menu and then select Disassemble 1 4 Up to four disassemble panels can be opened at a time with each panel discriminated by the name in their title bar Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassemble3 or Disassemble4 For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section in which the Disassemble panel is described Figure 2 81 Displaying the Disassembled Result Disassemble Panel Disassemble1 Toolbar 4 _main void tutorial void _tutorial ffffs561 6e68 R6 R8 f fLfS563 710008 28H RO p sam g Sample f LFFS566 F 72 0 0000100 init p sam ef71 05670000 BSR A for i O i lt 10 i j Eventarea Address area Disassemble area Remark Inthe Scroll Range Settings dialog box which opens by clicking on View gt gt in the toolbar you can set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar on this panel Following methods of operation are described here 1 Changing the display mode 2 Changing the display form 3 Moving to a specified address 4 Moving to a symbol definition part 5 Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results 1 Changing the display mode Disassemble
165. 1 Subject name area This area displays the name of a debug tool that is selected on the Project Tree panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 214 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Detailed information display change area This area displays detailed information on a debug tool selected on the Project Tree panel in list form classified by category allowing you to change settings directly The H mark denotes that all property items included in the category concerned are expanded The mark denotes that the property items in the category are collapsed The display can be switched between expanded and collapsed views by clicking either of these marks or by double clicking a category name Note that the HEX mark displayed in each property item setting column denotes that the text box marked with it is used exclusively for hexadecimal input For details about the displayed contents of categories and those of property items included therein and on how to set them see the section in which the relevant tab is described 3 Tab select area Each time you select a tab in this area the category for which detailed information is displayed changes from one to another The following tabs are accommodated on this panel For details about the displayed contents on each tab and on how to set them see the section in which the relevant tab is described Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab
166. 1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Emulation ROM area Adds emulation ROM area Uses simulator alternative ROM Emulation RAM area Adds emulation RAM area Uses simulator alternative RAM Cautions 1 Memory mapping can be added in the unit of 16 bytes If you set it outside the 16 byte boundary compensation will be made to meet the 16 byte boundary area which includes the area set after OK is clicked 2 Both read and write accesses to the memory mapping that has been added take one cycle each b Address range Specify the beginning and the end addresses of a memory mapping to be added Enter a hexadecimal value directly in the respective text boxes Note that you cannot add memory mappings to the areas that overlap the following memory types A message will appear if you click Add button in these areas Internal ROM area Internal RAM area IO register area c Access width Access width cannot be specified d Button Adds the content specified in this area to memory mappings The added memory mapping is displayed in the Memory mapped list area Note that the changed content is not set until the OK button is pressed 2 Memory mapped list area a List display Displays memory mappings added in the Additional memory mapping specification area and information on the microcontroller s internal memory mappings This area cannot be edited Memory type Following memory types are displaye
167. 12 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Paste Inserts the content of the clipboard into the caret position Clear Clears the display of this panel Enable Disable Chooses to enable default or disable the debug console a toggle switch Note that when the debug console function is disabled the panel s background color changes to gray COM Port Opens the Port Setting dialog box to set a COM port on the host machine to which communication from the microcontroller is redirected Log File Opens the Open Log File dialog box to save the displayed content of this panel to a specified log file log Logging begins Logging Chooses to start default or stop logging a toggle switch However this item is disabled when no log files are specified Echo Back Chooses to enable default or disable local echoback a toggle switch If local echoback is disabled the input data is not output to this panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 351 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator This dialog box sets memory mappings separately for each memory type Figure A 40 Memory Mapping Dialog Box Memory Mapping Memory type Address range Emulation ROM area v HEX Access width Memory mapped list Memory
168. 2 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box permits you to enter or edit plural lines of text Figure A 42 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the button that is displayed when you select any property in the Hook Transaction Settings category on the Property panel s Hook Transaction Settings tab Description of each area 1 Text area This area permits you to edit plural lines of text Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects entered text in the caller of this dialog box and then closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box without having entered text reflected in its caller Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 359 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Action Events dialog box You can set action events in this dialog box see 2 16 Set an Action into Programs This dialog box can be opened only when you are connected to the debug tool Caution Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on action event settings including the allowable number of valid events Figure A 43 Action Events Dialog Box Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output str
169. 2 16 1 Insert printf Messages are displayed separately on respective tabs classified by tools from which they are output Figure A 38 Output Panel BuildEnded Error 0 Warning 0 Build ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday August 28 2008 1 12 28 PM Debug Tool Search And Replace Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area File menu Output Panel Only Items Edit menu Output Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Output from the View menu Description of each area 1 Message area Displays the messages output by each tool search results and the output results by Printf events During display of search results global search this area displays a new message after clearing previous messages each time a search is performed except for the All Messages tab Note that messages are displayed in different colors by type of output message as shown below The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box are set Type of message Display example Default Description Normal message Text color Black Displayed when notifying any information Background color White Warning message Text color Blue Displayed when notifying any warning for the operation performed Background color Standard color R20UT2175EJ0100
170. 2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 118 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in predetermined notation default Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in octal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary pga E Displays the character string of a selected item including low order item in ASCII code If the subject consists of 2 bytes or more characters consisting of 1 byte each are displayed one next to another B Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Displays a selected item in Double Except for 8 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with t
171. 32 bits Specifying the Access Status This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified see Specifying the Access Address Select the type of access Read Write Read Write Vector Read and DMA from the drop down list If you do not limit the type of access select No specification Caution E1 E20 The types of access for which data can be collected on the Trace panel are only Read and Write Therefore do not select Read Write Vector Read or DMA from the drop down list Simulator The types of access for which data can be collected on the Trace panel are only Read Write and Vector Read Therefore do not select Read Write or DMA from the drop down list Specifying the Data This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified see Specifying the Access Address Specify an accessed numeric value Enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The numeric value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed numeric value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers
172. 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Watch area This area displays registered watch expressions in list form By clicking the table title part of this area it is possible to sort the watch expressions in the list in alphabetical order Also it is possible to create a category folder as desired and display the watch expressions as classified by category in tree form see a Editing a tree The meaning of each displayed icon is as follows Indicates a state that the watch expressions belonging to this category are displayed When you double click the icon or click the mark the category is closed to hide the watch expressions Indicates a state that the watch expressions belonging to this category are hidden When you double click the icon or click the mark the category is opened to display the watch expressions Indicates that the watch expression is a variable The watch expression indicating an array pointer type variable or a structure union is marked with a or at the beginning so that when the sign is clicked the expression expands or collapses see b Expanding collapsing the display Indicates that the watch expression is a function Indicates that the watch expression is an immediate Indicates that the watch expression is an expression Indicates that the watch expression is an I O register Indicates
173. 56 bytes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the subject of search is in the Memory value area of the Memory panel the data needs to be entered in the same form numeral system and size as displayed in that area Also the subject of search is in the Character string area it is necessary to specify a character string as the data to search The specified character string before being searched is converted to data in appropriate encode form in which data are displayed in that area Note that if any memory value was selected immediately before this dialog box was opened then the selected value is displayed by default 2 Search Range area Select a range in which to search from the drop down list below Specify address range A search is conducted within the address range specified by Address area Memory mapping A search is conducted within the selected range of memory mapping This list item displays memory mappings individually except non mapped areas that are displayed in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Display form lt Memory type gt lt Address range gt lt Size gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 374 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Address area This item is valid only when Specify Address Range is selected in the Search Range area Specify the start address and end address to set the addres
174. 5EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 417 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting b When saving upload data For the selectable file format see Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats 3 Save Range xxx area Specify the range of data to save You can either type ranges directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items The method of specifying the ranges will differ as follows depending on the type of data to be saved Type of Data Description Disassemble panel Specify the range of addresses to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is selected in the panel that range is specified by default When there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Memory panel Specify the range of memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is not selected in the panel then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Trace panel Specifying a range to save Specify the trace range to save via the start and end trace numbers Note Ranges can only be entered as base 10 numbers Sa
175. 7 30 43 Clock source 18 31 Code coverage measurement 165 Code coverage measurement result 256 Code outlining 256 Collecting an execution history 134 INDEX Clearing the trace memory 148 Collecting an execution history in a section 139 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 144 Collecting an execution history up to a halt 139 Displaying an execution history 146 Saving the displayed content of an execution history 153 Searching for trace data 148 Setting up a trace operation 134 Stopping restarting collection of execution history 145 Column Number Settings dialog box 370 Combination break 103 179 183 184 336 337 Combination condition 103 142 179 390 Combination Condition dialog box 388 Configuration of operating environment 14 Connect to disconnect from the debug tool 49 Connectable debug tool 12 Connection to the debug tool 49 Control register 118 289 Coverage measurement 165 Configure the coverage measurement 165 Display coverage measurement results 165 CPU Register panel 289 Current PC mark 281 Current PC position 254 281 D Data coverage measurement 165 Data flash memory 17 30 Data Save dialog box 417 Debug Console panel 349 Debug information 243 Debug toolbar 206 Debug dedicated project 53 Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box 399
176. 74 Normal Operation f Tutorial c Xxx 49 8 ch A aen columns Line 333 Address E F 50 ffff87a4 for i i lt 10 m 51 ff j 52 ff 9 if j lt 0 53 ffff87c0 j j 54 55 ffff87c8 afi j 56 57 fff87e1 gt 58 f LELB7e7 change a Execute 3 59 60 g Tutorial d f sort c TR hia 195 8 gt 7 8 columns mn Line A A new panel is opened a ae 23 24 25 26 27 EEf85f3 28 29 long t 30 int i j k gap 31 32 gap 5 33 while gap gt 0 i v lt gt Figure 2 75 Recycle Mode Operation E Tutorial c RECYCLE vx RECYCLE is displayed following the file name 24 char g CharBuf 25 26 27 feresta c gt por 28 Ali 29 long t 30 int i j k gap 31 32 gap 5 33 while gap gt 0 v lt gt Cautions 1 The recycle mode is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel 2 When the program is executed with the current PC position located in the source file in the Editor panel that is being edited in the recycle mode that Editor panel is released from the recycle mode and a new Editor panel is opened in the recycle mode Remark Ifthe Editor panel that displays the corresponding source file is already opened then the source file is not opened in the panel of the recycle mode but the Editor panel
177. 75EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 242 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CPU Reset after Specify whether or not to reset the CPU after a download download Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes The CPU is reset after a download value No The CPU is not reset after a download Erase flash ROM Specify whether or not to erase the flash ROM program ROM before a download before download E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes The flash ROM is erased before a download value No The flash ROM is not erased before a download Erase data flash ROM Specify whether or not to erase the data flash ROM before a download before download E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable The data flash ROM is erased before a download alue A The data flash ROM is not erased before a download Automatic change Specify a method of how the set position address of a currently set event will be reset when it method of event happens to be in the middle of an instruction as a result of reloadNote 2 setting position Default Suspend event How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Move to the head of The subject event is reset to the start address of an value instruction instruction
178. 75EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 446 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following type of the file file type is shown Function buttons Save Saves the option setting file with the specified name Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 447 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS This section describes the I O settings for the simulator in a low level interface routine assembly language part The simulator provides functions for handling standard I O and file I O The I O function for a simulator can be used when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream O mode property in the Stream I O Simulator category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab B 1 Standard I O and File I O The content of a file that is called from a low level interfaced routine to perform input and output is replaced with a program for I O With the standard I O functions GETC and PUTC the functions that perform 1 character input and output charput charget _charput _charget are replaced with a program for debug console facilities to perform input and output of data onto and from the Debug Console panel The I O functions are listed below Table B 1 I O Facilities Classification Facility name Description Standard I O GETC Accepts 1 byte from standard inp
179. 9 Allocation of Overlay Sections Figure 2 92 Changing the Selection for Priority section from ram01 to ram02 main c pragma section sectOl j pragma section sect0l 66 int Var0l 1000 int Var01 1000 67 00003000 void func01 void 7 void func01 void 68 Bi 69 int lVar01 lVar01 100 i int lVar01 1Var01 100 Var0l 1Var0l funciil to o func11 ON pragma section pragma section aIWwada dada 9 oH t gt 76 pragma section sect02 6 pragma section sect02 77 int Var02 2000 77 int Var02 2000 78 void func02 void 78 void func02 void 79 79 Ei 80 int lVar02 i int lVar0 81 lVar02 200 1 00003 82 Var02 1Var02 00003 83 func12 00003 func12 84 85 pragma section g pragma section Js gt Eg watch1 Z X Notation Ws alue pe Byte Size bddre Memo Value Type Byte Size Address Memo lVar02 TT w lVar0Z 200 0x000000c8 im 4 Ox000017f4 J lVar03 22 w Ivarus TT 7 gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 87 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Execute Programs This section describes how to execute programs The major operations discussed in this section can be conducted either from the debug toolbar or the Debug menu in the Main window where commands to control the execution of programs are included Caution Items in the debug toolbar
180. Applicable only to cases where the displayed variable names remained same from the program start point to the break point while their values were changed This area has the following features a Alteration of local variable and parameter values To change a local variable value and parameter value select the local variable value to be changed first and after clicking it again enter directly new values from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode The edited local variable values and parameter values are written into the debug tool s target memory by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to other than the edit area For details on how to change local variable and parameter values see 2 Changing the contents of local variables b Saving of local variable values Choosing Save Local Variables Data As from the File menu opens the Save As dialog box making it possible to save all content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save local variable values see 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 303 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Type Byte Size area This area displays the type names of local variables They are displayed in forms conforming to C language description Arrays have the number of their elements added in and functions have their size in b
181. Break event execution related after gNotet execution Break event access related Read 4Note1 Note3 Write Read Write Combination break g 4Note1 Note2 Note5 Trace trace start trace end g 4Note1 Note2 Note6 Point trace 4Note1 Note3 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 183 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Timer result timer start timer end g 4Note1 Note2 Note6 qNote7 Action Printf event 256Noted 4o24Notes Action Interrupt event 0 256 Table 2 23 Allowable Number of Valid Events RX200 Series Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial Simulator E20 Serial Software break Hardware break execution related before execution Break event execution related after execution Break event access related Read Write Read Write Combination break 4 2Note4 4 QNote4 Note5 Note6 Trace trace start trace end Point trace 4Note4 Timer result timer start timer end 4 2Note4 Note6 Action Printf event 256Noted Action Interrupt event 0 Notes 1 There are 8 execution related events and 4 access related events which are shared by multiple functions 2 Foran event combination up to 8 events can be set 3 E20 JTAG The trace function and the real time RAM monitor function RRM function in part are usable
182. Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all of the set items in this dialog box to their default state For the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted OK Applies changes and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Apply Applies changes without closing this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 421 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category In this category you can configure fonts and colors displayed on each panel Figure A 73 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category E g General Startup and Exit Display External Text Editor 1 n External Tools Build Debug PythonConsole Text Editor N Update Others User Information General Font and Color 3 Setting place Warning Error Reserved word Comment String literal Control code Highlight Changed value v Default a Use default color Use default background color Reset Selected Item Colors Display example Font settines for text editor hitialize All Settings Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool
183. Clock Main clock source EXTAL Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No lt 1 gt Main clock source Select EXTAL frequency or internal HOCO as the main clock source EXTAL will be displayed for microcontrollers with no internal HOCO lt 2 gt Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier Specify EXTAL frequency by directly entering a number between 0 0001 and 99 9999 MHz The entered value will be truncated to 5 decimal places If the value is out of the specifiable range it will be rounded to 0 0001 when 0 or below or to 99 9999 when 100 or above This property is displayed only when you have selected EXTAL in the Main clock source property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 30 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory Specify whether to allow a debugger to operate the clock while the internal flash memory is being rewritten Caution E20 RX630 RX631 RX63N RX63T RX210 When Yes is selected if internal flash ROM is rewritten by the debugger while the FlashlF clock FCLK of the microcontroller is outside of the guaranteed operating range that is while operating with LOCO or subclock the E20 will switch the clock source After rewriting to the internal flash ROM is completed the clock will be restored to
184. DefaultBuild test_RxX abs Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No CPU Reset after download Yes Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event a Download files Displays the file names to be downloaded as well as download conditions The numeric value in property value indicates the number of files currently specified to be downloaded The files to be downloaded here are those files that have been specified as the subject to build in the main project and sub projects This means that the same files that were specified in the project are automatically determined to be the download files However the files to be downloaded and the download conditions can be manually changed In this case see 2 5 2 An applied method of download Note To download the load module files created by an external build tool e g compilers and assemblers other than the build tools supplied with CubeSuite a debug dedicated project needs to be created If you use a debug dedicated project as the subject to debug add your download files to the download file node on project tree The files to be downloaded will be reflected in this property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 53 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS For details on how to use external build tools and details about debug dedicated projects see the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Devel
185. Download file property area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 57 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Here a method on how to set in the Download Files dialog box shown above is described using the following cases as examples 1 Changing the download conditions for load module files 2 Adding a download file hex mot or bin 3 Downloading multiple load module files 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 1 Changing the download conditions for load module files To change the download conditions for load module files whether to load object information or symbol information under which they are downloaded follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Selection of a load module file In the Download file list area select the load module file to download b Alteration of download conditions In the Download file list area you ll see the download conditions for the currently selected load module file displayed in it For each displayed item change their setting Download object Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Yes Method to By selecting from drop down list change Specifiable Yes Downloads object information value No Does not downloa
186. Each piece of initialization data are interpreted as comprising 1 byte in units of 2 characters from the tail end of the character string If the data consists of an odd number of characters the first character in it is assumed to be comprising 1 byte Values consisting of 2 bytes or more will be converted to the arrays of bytes that match the endians in the address range to be initialized before being written to the target memory Input Character String Initialize data Written in image in bytes Little endian Big endian 7 Clicking the OK button Click the OK button A pattern of the specified initialization data is written into the specified address range of memory repeatedly If the end address is reached in the middle of this pattern the write process is terminated However if an invalid value or address expression is specified CubeSuite displays a message and does not initialize memory values Saving displayed memory contents It is possible to save a specified range of memory contents to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool and saves data in an appropriate form in which data are currently displayed on this panel Choose Save Memory Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below will be opened At this time if you perform this operation while a range is selected on panel it is possible to save only the
187. Event 168 170 Register variables 302 Registering a watch expression 307 Renesas Flash Programmer 21 33 Re registering watch expressions 131 Reset 109 155 Reset event 181 391 Reset microcontroller CPU 18 31 88 Return Out execution 91 207 RRM real time RAM monitor 109 184 Run Break time 155 Run Break Timer 336 337 Run Break Timer event 156 335 S Save As dialog box 440 Save Option Setting File dialog box 446 Save Settings dialog box 368 Saving watch expressions 130 Scope selection 123 Scroll Range Settings dialog box 413 Select Data Save File dialog box 442 Select Download File dialog box 434 Selecting blocks 258 Sequential 103 180 Set an action into programs 168 Insert an interrupt event 170 Insert printf 168 Set PC to Here 90 Set states of events 174 Setting up a trace operation 134 Setting up the hook process 187 Software break 94 183 184 185 336 337 Source display mode 147 329 Source level debugging 67 248 Specified routine 91 Specify the PIC PID offset 83 Standard I O 190 448 Standard library function 190 Start Trace 146 332 Status bar 208 Step execution 90 Step In execution 91 207 Step Over execution 91 207 Stop programs 94 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event 96 Stop the program at the arbitrary pos
188. Event Access related on a Variable in the Source Text E1 E20 22 23 24 25 26 27 fEEf85f3 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ffff8678 41 ffEf8693 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ffff86e0 49 50 ffrifeers 51 Figure 2 147 22 23 24 25 26 27 fEEf85f3 28 29 30 31 32 ffEf85f8 33 ffff8S5fd 34 ffEf8607 35 ffff8618 36 ffECE62c 37 fLECe63E 38 fLECe64c 39 fLixts b 40 ffEf8678 41 ffEf8693 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 ffff86e0 49 50 ffire6rs 51 void sort long long t int i j E gap 5 while gap gt 0 gap ee for k 0 gap g_ CharBut char g IntBut amp Ox00FF for i k gap k lt gap gap 2 Go to Here Set PC to Here Jump to Function F12 Shift F12 Tag Jump M Bid _ Jump to Disassemble Advanced Break Settings k Trace Settings i lt for j i Timer Settings Start Timer Stop Timer Set Timer Start R W Value gt Set Timer 1 Set Timer End R W Value gt Set Timer2 0xb 9 View Result of Timer Enter key From the context menu above the variable g_IntBuf select Timer Settings gt gt Set Timer Start R W Value gt gt Set Timer 1 Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press the Here the timer measurement will start when the value Oxb is read from or written to the variable g_IntBuf Examp
189. FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF F 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Size of internal RAM KByte Size of DataFlash memory KBytes Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory 4 E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No 5 gt Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAx 200m4 Communications method FINE baud rate bps Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes 7 gt a Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian 8 p E Extemal Flash R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2012 External flash definition file EXTAL No E20 XXXXXXXXX No FINE 2000000 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings A Page 218 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 8 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E20 JTAG Property AX E20TAG Property 1 gt fE Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes 3 gt a Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the cl
190. Ignore break and go R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Runs the program from the current PC position and continues running it ignoring the break and action events set However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool 2tENESAS Page 205 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note 2t a time Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one step updating the content of each panel For a function call the program stops at the beginning of a called function However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Note ata time Step Over Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one step updating the content of each panel For a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all of the source lines or instructions in that function are executed successively in one step until a place is reached at which control returns from the function step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when a jump to subroutine instruction has been executed For other than a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as Step In is selected is performed However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconne
191. In this case follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Clicking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download file list area b Setting the properties of a load module file In the Download file property area specify for each item as shown below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 62 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Specify a load module file from which the file in hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin that you want to download was created Enter directly from the keyboard or specify in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button File type Specify Load module file default Download object Specify No Download symbol Specify Yes default information Specify the PIC PID Specify No default No offset Note For files in hex format Motorola S format or binary data format be aware that the destination to which they are downloaded cannot be discriminated between the PIC and PID areas If you specify PIC PID offsets in a load module file the result will be that the specified offsets do not agree with the debug function and the file cannot be debugged c Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified load module file adde
192. Inserts the content of the clipboard into place if you use this menu while editing a property value Delete Deletes a selected character string if you use this menu while editing a property value Select All Selects the whole character string representing the value of a selected property if you use this menu while editing a property value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 216 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Connect Settings tab The Connect Settings tab displays detailed information for each category shown below and changes settings made on it 1 Internal ROM RAM 2 Endian Simulator 3 Clock 4 Connection with Emulator E1 E20 5 Connection with Target Board E1 E20 6 Flash E1 E20 7 Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 8 External Flash E1 E20 9 Peripheral Function Simulation Simulator Figure A 5 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 Serial Property l AX E1 Serial Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KByt E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E1 XXXXXXXKX E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAx 200m4 No Communications method FINE FINE baud rate bps 20000
193. Jump Shift F12 27 EEEf85f3 void sort long a 28 on Jump to Disassemble 29 long t 30 int i j k gap Gere a Break Settings gt Set Hardware Break 32 f f fF85F8 gap 5 33 fffee5fa while gap gt 0 Trace Settings Set Read Break to 34 ffff8607 for k 0 k lt gap k Timer Settings Pa Set Wie Breakto 0xb 35 ffff8618 for i k gap i lt 36 ffFfF862c for 3 i 42 Clear Coverage Information Set R W Break to 37 FLLLe63t J Mh Break Option 38 fffF864c i TT gt ali gap 39 fffF86Eb t a j 40 fLEE8678 a j aljt gap 41 f fF 8693 alj gap t 42 43 els i From the context menu above the variable g_IntBuf select Break Settings gt gt Set Write 7 48 ffff86e0 gap gap 2 Break to Enter a value in the text box in the 49 50 fEEf86T9 g_CharBuf char g IntBuft amp 0x00F menu then press the Enter key 51 Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the variable g_IntBuf R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 100 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 103 Example of a Break Event Access related in the Events Panel Simulator x 5 0 A S 25 8 Name Detail Comment C Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Total 3940 ns Execution Cycle Count 394 Execution Instruction Count 76 C 448 Hardware Break0001 Write g_IntBuf 0x142c 0x142f Oxb b Set a break event access related to a registere
194. Memory1 Opens the Memory panel Memory 1 Memory2 Opens the Memory panel Memory2 Memory3 Opens the Memory panel Memory3 Memory4 Opens the Memory panel Memory4 Opens the IOR panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool CPU Register Opens the CPU Register panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Opens the Trace panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Disassemble Shows the following cascaded menu to open the Disassemble panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Disassemble1 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble Disassemble2 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble2 Disassemble3 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble3 Disassemble4 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble4 Opens the Events panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Debug Console Opens the Debug Console panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 204 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Show Current PC Location APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays the current PC position PC register valu
195. Name C Sample projects Disassemble1 2 File Type Text files txt Save Range Address Symbol Ox000002de v Ox000002ed Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open While focus is on the Disassemble panel choose Save Disassemble Data As from the File menu While focus is on the Memory panel choose Save Memory Data As from the File menu While focus is on the Trace panel choose Save Trace Data As from the File menu Choose Upload from the Debug menu Description of each area 1 File Name area Specify a file name under which you want to save the data Enter a name directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries It is also possible to select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button If you specify only a file name with no path information attached the project folder is assumed 2 File Type area Select the file format in which to save the data from the drop down list below The selectable file format is determined by the type of data you are saving a When saving the displayed content of a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote R20UT217
196. No Power is not supplied Supply voltage E1 Specify the voltage supplied from E1 to the target board Note that this p emulator MAX roperty is displayed only when you selected Yes in the Power target from the 200mA property Default 3 3V How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list Note 3 3V 5 0V Communication method Displays the co mmunication method to be connected when communication between the emulator and the CPU on target system is performed Default E1 JTAG E20 JTAG JTAG E1 Serial E20 Serial FINE Not changeable R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 222 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 JTAG clock MHz APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify JTAG communication speed between the emulator and the CPU on target system Note that this property is displayed only when JTAG is specified in the Communication method property Default 16 5 How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 16 5 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 FINE baud rate bps Specify FINE communication speed between the emul
197. Not measured OR 2 Edit a break event execution related When editing a break event execution related you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the break event execution related displayed in the detailed information on the combination break in the Events panel click Edit Condition on the context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the selected break event For details on editing in the dialog box see 1 related events 3 Delete a break event execution related Editing execution When deleting a break event you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the break event execution related displayed in the detailed information on the combination break in the Events panel click x button on the toolbar to delete it see 2 17 5 Deleting events R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 stENESAS Page 97 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Each break event execution related can also be deleted by clicking on the event mark on the source or disassembled text 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers By setting a break event access related it is possible to stop the program in execution when a specified access is made to any variable or I O register At this time it is also possible to limit the values accessed
198. R R3 System call NOP MOV Set the address of the parameter block in R1 MOV Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in R1 RTS Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 455 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS FPUTC Writes 1 byte of data to a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 output buffer Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Beginning address of output buffer input Beginning address of the buffer that contains output data Detailed Description Writes 1 byte of data to a file R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 456 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuitet V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Example _fcharput IO_BUF MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV JSR NOP MOV MOV RTS R2 R5 PARM R2 IO BUF R4 R4 4h 5 R2 R1 R4 R5 1h 5 R2 01280000h R1 SIM I0 R3 R3 SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 SECTION B_1 DATA BLKL 1 Set Set Set t t set t t t Set ne ne ne
199. Read only The opened text file is read only When you right click in this area the context menu is displayed The following menu items are exclusive for the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Save file name Saves the contents of the opened text file Copy Full Path Copies the full path of the opened text file to the clipboard Open Containing Folder Opens the folder where the text file is saved in Explorer 2 Splitter bars The Editor panel can be displayed in split form by using the vertical and horizontal splitter bars The Editor panel can be split in up to two divisions vertically and two divisions horizontally To split this panel drag the splitter bar down or to the right to the desired position or double click any part of the splitter bar To remove the split double click any part of the splitter bar Caution The split is enabled only when this panel is in the normal display mode setting to the mixed display mode removes the split R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 251 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 23 Editor Panel Vertical Horizontal Two way Split View 88 void main void funcl 89 Hi 106 Hi 90 E Start user 107 UINT i 91 108 92 TMPO Start 109 for i 0 i 93 TMP1_Start 110 funcla 94 AD Start 111 95 112 96 while 10 wj 113 i 2 Es gt 122 void func2 A
200. Remark Ina Scroll Range Settings dialog box that is opened by selecting View and then clicking the button in the toolbar it is possible to set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar of this panel Figure A 24 Memory Panel Memory Toolbar a Notation Size Notation Encodingy View a 4 C Move when Stop m W f 1 P 8 0 2 0L 747 07 WZ 0 56 7 5 2272 2y 272 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Memory panel Only Items Edit menu Memory panel Only Items Context Menu How to open Choose Memory from the View menu and then select Memory 1 4 Description of each area 1 Display position specification area By specifying an address expression it is possible to specify the display start position of memory values Make the following specifications in order R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 269 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Specify address expressions Enter an address expression for the address of the memory value to be displayed directly in the text box Input expressions in up to 1 024 characters each can be specified with their calculation result handled as a display start position However address expressions greater than the microcontrollers address space cannot be specified Remarks 1 By hol
201. S Page 400 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an access related event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays categories in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and rearranges only the property items in the ascending order Description of each category The properties that can be displayed and changed differ with the debug tool used 1 For E1 E20 2 For Simulator 1 For E1 E20 a Address Address Displays the address at which an access related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event modifying Not changeable b Address Condition Compare condition Specify address comparison condition Default No specification Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No address comparison condition is specified Note1 Address area Note2 Specify comparison condition based on an address range Compare with Spe
202. Saving the call stack information Edit Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Call Stack panel is as follows All other items are disabled Copy Copies the content of a selected line as character string to the clipboard Select All Puts the item into all selected state Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 324 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Each item on the context menu are disabled during program execution Copy Copies the content of a selected line as character string to the clipboard Show Module File Name Adds a module file name to the line when it is displayed default Show Parameter Adds function call parameters to the line when it is displayed default Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed AutoSelect Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Octal Displays values on this panel in octal Binary Displays values on this panel in binary
203. Suite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met It is possible to collect an execution history of the program only when some conditions are met 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred In cases where a point trace event is set when and only when a specified access is made to any variable or I O register information on that is collected as trace data Follow the procedure described below to set a point trace event Cautions 1 Remarks 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on trace settings including the allowable number of valid events Simulator With string manipulation instructions and multiply and accumulate instructions only the first and final data accesses are subjected to the event check Accesses by DMAC Direct Memory Access Controller and DTC Data Transfer Controller are not supported Simulator If either one of the point trace events set is Enabled the Usage of trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab has its specification automatically changed to Yes with the trace function enabled When a point trace event and trace start and end events are specified together the operation differs depending on the debug tool used E1 E20 Only the data that matches the point trace event condition within the section between the specified trace start
204. Suite in user boot mode when using a microcontroller that contains the USB boot program an activation error will occur Be sure to erase the USB boot program through the Flash Development Toolkit or Renesas Flash Programmer lt 2 gt Register setting Specify the operating mode to be set by the register The operating mode that can be specified depends on the type of the microcontroller R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 33 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Endian Displays the project endian Acquires endian information from the project and displays its value Can be selected only when the debug tool is disconnected g External Flash In this category you can configure external flash The settings in this category are required when downloading to an external flash memory For more details regarding property setting see 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you configure the basic settings of the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Register d Break e System f Trace g Timer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 34 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuitet V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Memory You can
205. The following clock rates are displayed in the drop down list 1 Default 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 64 Caution You cannot change this property while connected to the Simulator 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you can configure the debug tool for each one of the following categories a a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Register d Trace e Coverage f Stream I O g Execution mode h Instruction decode cache Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 48 Memory Category Simulator E Memory E Memory mappings 19 0 Internal RAM area 1 Non map area 2 20 registers area 3 Non map area 4 1 0 registers area 5 1 0 registers area 6 Non map area 7 1 0 registers area 8 20 registers area 9 1 0 registers area 10 Internal ROM area 11 Non map area 12 20 registers area 13 Non map area 14 20 registers area 15 Non map area 16 Internal ROM area 17 Non map area 18 Internal ROM area lt 1 gt Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel When necessary you can add a memory mapping in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator This dialog box can be displayed by clicking on R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 44 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS the
206. V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Opens a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Open mode Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 file name Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number output Number that is used for access to files after the open process Open mode input 0x00 r 0x01 w 0x02 a 0x03 r 0x04 w 0x05 a 0x10 rb 0x11 wb 0x12 ab 0x13 r b 0x14 wtb 0x15 a b The content of each mode is as follows r Opens for read w Opens a blank file for write a Opens for write from the end of a file r Opens for read and write wt Reads a blank file and opens it for write at Opens additionally for read b Opens in binary mode Beginning address of file name input Beginning address of the area that contains the file name R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 452 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Detailed Description When a file is opened by FOPEN a file number is returned This file number is used in subsequent operations to input or output to the file as well as to close the file Up to 256 files can be opened at a time Example _fileopen MOV R2 R5 Set the value of R2 open mode
207. Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of floating point exception default Stop when interrupt is encountered This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when interrupt is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of interrupt default Stop INT instruction is executed This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when INT instruction is executed Select Yes if you wish to stop at the execution of INT instruction default Stop BRK instruction is executed This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when BRK instruction is executed Select Yes if you wish to stop at the execution of BRK instruction default Instruction decode cache In this category you can configure instruction decode cache a function which retains decode result during instruction execution so that it can be used again when the instruction at the same address is executed lt 1 gt Figure 2 54 Instruction decode cache Category E Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation No Increase simulation speed by caching instruction decode result Specify from the drop down list
208. _IntBuf 3 gt gt gt 70 BLE B _sort 58H 0000142CH R1 000001 42c 000001708 afi ali gap 72 MOV L R3 R15 afi gap t R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 326 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 35 Trace Panel Simulator Toolbar E f Sy Notation T 4 Elba El Number Time h min s ms ps ns 108 109 109 110 110 111 112 112 113 114 114 115 116 WW 118 118 119 OOhOOmin00s000ms003ps900ns OOhOOminOO0s000ms003ps91 Ons OOhOOminOO0s000ms003ps940ns OOhO00min00s000ms003ps940ns OOhOOminO0s000ms003ps960ns OOhOOminO0s000ms003ps960ns OOhOOminOO0s000ms003ps990ns OOhOOminO0s000ms003ps990ns O0h00min00s000ms003ps990ns OOhOOminOO0s000ms003ps990ns OOhOOminOOs000ms004ps000ns Line Number Address resetprg c 103 Oxffff8038 resetprg cH105 Oxffff8039 Tutorial c 36 Oxffff855c Tutorial c 40 Oxffff8561 Tutorial c 40 Oxffff8563 Tutorial c 47 Source Disassemble Address 0x00001834 Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode i 56 NOP main 57 BSR A _main tutorialf 0 BSA W _tutorial void tutorial void 0 PUSHM void tutorial void 2 ADD p_sam g Sample _main 0x00001 734 _tutorial 0x00001 730 0x00001 72c 0x00001 728 0x00001 724 28H RO RO Data Mamea 2 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File
209. a selected item in Shift_JIS code default EUC JP Displays a selected item in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays a selected item in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays a selected item in UTF 16 code Size Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify a size Displays a selected item as 8 bit data Displays a selected item as 16 bit data Displays a selected item as 32 bit data Displays a selected item as 64 bit data Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret on it moved to the address at which a selected watch expression is defined see g Jumping to a memory definition address Reset Color Resets the highlighting for a selected watch expression which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution However this is disabled during program execution Note The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 321 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Call Stack panel This panel displays call stack information for function calls see 2 12 1 Display call stack information This panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Caution This panel is left blank while the program is in execution
210. ace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch Output timestamp Yes Trace clock count source MHz CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note that if this property is blank the set value of the Operating frequency MHz property in the Timer category is used in place of the count source Cautions 1 You cannot change this property while the program is in execution 2 The property s set value is not reflected in the trace data that has already been collected The property you ve set is reflected beginning with the trace data that is collected after it is set g Timer You can configure the timer function in this category Figure 2 22 Timer Category RX600 Series El Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 Figure 2 23 Timer Category RX200 Series E Timer Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 lt 1 gt Use 64bit counter RX600 series Specify whether to use two 32 bit counters or one 64 bit counter lt 2 gt Operating frequency MHz Specify the operating frequency to be used when converting the count value to time Directly enter a number between 0 0001 and 999 999 MHz to specify the operating frequency When operating frequency is not specified a count value will be displayed 3 Download File Settings tab You can configure downloading to the debug tool in Download File Settings tab For the detai
211. ach event up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed Remark The detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel 9 Main area This area is valid only when the user is connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened Breakpoints can be set at lines that have valid addresses In addition the Event mark corresponding to a breakpoint that has been currently set is displayed The current PC mark gt that corresponds to the current PC position PC register value is displayed Note that the current PC mark is only displayed if the current PC value corresponds to the source text line when the current PC position is modified or the state of the debug tool is changed from execution to stop Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific event mark will display the area title Main This area is provided with the following functions a Setting deleting breakpoints By clicking where you want to set a breakpoint with mouse the breakpoints can be set easily The breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line Once a breakpoint is set an Event mark is displayed at the line that is set In addition the detailed information about the set breakpoint is reflected in the Events panel When this operation is performed at a place where any one of the event marks is already being displayed that event is deleted and the setting of brea
212. ached at which control returns from the function step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when a jump to subroutine instruction has been executed For other than a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as the button is clicked is performed However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Step Over from the Debug menu Runs the program until control returns from the currently executed function until control returns to the calling function Return Out execution However this item is disabled during program execution For other than a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as the when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Return Out from the Debug menu Terminates communication with the currently connected debug tool However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when already disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Disconnect from Debug Tool from the Debug menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 207 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Step execution can be performed either at the source level or at the instruction level For details see Section 2 9 3
213. ading the load module file with debug information On the Project Tree panel double click the file On the Project Tree panel select a source file and then select Open from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu and then create a text file or source file On the Disassemble panel Call Stack panel Trace panel or Events panel select Jump to Source from the context menu Automatically opens if there is a source text line correspond to the current PC value when the current PC value is forcibly changed or the program stops executing R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 250 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Title bar The name of the opened text file or source file is displayed Marks displayed at the end of the file name indicate the following Mark Description The text file has been modified since being opened Update time and date of the source file opened are later than the one of the downloaded load module file Note that this mark is valid only when CubeSuite is connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened RECYCLE The recycle mode see 3 Displaying multiple source files in a single panel is valid Note that this mark is valid only when CubeSuite is connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened
214. ailable values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Difference Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when Difference is specified in Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify the data mask Specify whether or not to specify a data mask This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less Than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default No Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Yes A data mask is specified No No data mask is specified R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 407 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note2 Mask value Specify a mask value in hexadecimal This property is displayed when Yes is specified in Specify the data mask property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify whether or not the data to be compared includes a sign This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Difference Greater than gt Less Than
215. ain clock from the EXTAL frequency and internal HOCO For products without internal HOCO Displays EXTAL frequency as the main clock Default EXTAL How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable EXTAL Main clock operates as EXTAL frequency value HOCO Main clock operates as internal HOCO Main clock Specify EXTAL frequency in MHz units frequency MHz Note that this property is enabled only when EXTAL is specified in the Main clock source E1 E20 property Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable 0 0001 to 99 9999 in MHz value Allow to change the Specify whether or not to allow manipulation of the main clock source by debugger when internal clock source on writing flash memory is rewritten internal flash memory E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Yes Manipulation of the main clock source is allowed value No Manipulation of the main clock source is not allowed System clock ICLK Specify the CPU s operating clock frequency frequency MHz Default RX600 Series 100 RX200 Series 50 Simulator How to By entering directly from the keyb
216. alues in 32 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Displays memory values in 64 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which character strings are displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 274 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays character strings in ASCII code default Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code Ei Displays character strings in EUC JP code Displays character strings in UTF 8 code Displays character strings in UTF 16 code Displays character strings as a single precision floating point value oaa g Displays character strings as a double precision floating point value on oO Displays character strings as a complex number of single precision floating point oS Displays character strings as a complex number of double precision floating point Displays character strings as an imaginary number of single precision floating point E E a Displays character strings as an imaginary number of double precision floating point Shows the following buttons that change the display form Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range
217. ample 2 struct aaa char a short b long c char d struct aaa sA S 0x4154 0x4E455452 D II A case where the variable sA is mapped to the registers R6 R7 and R8 Ifa variable is deleted as a result of optimization by the compiler the subject variable cannot be referred to in the debugger If a variable is temporarily mapped to a register as a result of optimization by the compiler the value of the variable may not be displayed correctly on the Watch panel etc To change the download files or set the download conditions applied at download time use the Download Files dialog box shown below The Download Files dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column of the Download files property when you select it in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab Figure 2 65 Opening the Download Files Dialog Box E Download Download files 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Erase data flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Figure 2 66 An Applied Method of Download Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list Download file property Download file information File Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No File Specify the file to be downloaded Download file list area
218. an ASCII code within 16 characters enter the ID code using maximum 16 ASCII characters Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Ifthe ID code entered in ASCII characters is shorter than 16 characters the unused space will be padded with 0 Work RAM start address Specify the location address of the work RAM to be used by the debugger The size of work RAM to be used by the debugger firmware at a designated RAM location address is indicated in Work RAM size bytes property Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Although this area can also be used in the user program because memory contents are saved and restored to and from the memory of the host machine by the debugger firmware do not specify this area as the source or destination of transfer for the DMA or DTC function Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of work RAM to be used by the debugger f Operating Modes of CPU In this category you configure the operating mode of the microcontroller to be emulated Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 Figure 2 33 Operating Modes of CPU Category E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data lt 1 gt Mode pins setting Specify the operating mode set by the mode pin of the microcontroller Caution E20 RX630 RX631 RX63N When you activate the Cube
219. an be edited line assemble Furthermore the instruction level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results can be performed in this panel In this panel the disassembled results can be displayed with the corresponding source text default Remark Itis normally necessary to download a load module file with debugging information in order to perform the source level debugging but it is also possible to do so by downloading a hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin file see 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files 2 6 1 Displaying source files Use the Editor panel shown below to display the source file The Editor panel opens automatically after a load module file is successfully downloaded with the source text at the position you specified see 2 5 1 Execute downloading displayed on the panel If you want to open the Editor panel manually double click on the source file in the Project Tree panel For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Editor panel Remarks 1 You can open a file with a specific encoding selected in the Encoding dialog box that is opened via the File menu gt gt Open with encoding 2 You can zoom in and out of this panel See Zoom in or out on a view by using t
220. an be used it is necessary to make settings relating to the operation of a trace Note that the method on how to set differs with each debug tool used 1 For E1 2 For E20 3 For Simulator 1 For E1 Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Figure 2 130 Trace Category E1 E Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch Output timestamp Yes Trace clock count source MHz a Usage of trace function Only the trace function can be used b Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace memory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 134 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Overwrite trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old data memory and default continue execution Stop trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data but does not stop program execution Stop When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time c Trace data type For this property specify the type of trace data to be collected from the drop down list below Branch Source destination address information of branching during program
221. and end events is collected as trace data Simulator The execution history within the section between the specified trace start and end events and the data that matches the point trace event condition regardless of the section between the specified trace start and end events are collected as trace data a For access to a variable or I O register in the source text or disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembled text is displayed Select the variable or I O register as the subject to access and according to the access type you specify perform the following operation from the context menu However the variables you can select are only global variables static variables inside a function or static variables inside a file Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a point trace event has been set for the selected variable or I O register and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management Access Type Operation Read Write Select Record Reading Value from Trace Settings Write Select Record Writing Value from Trace Settings Read write Select Record R W Value from Trace Settings Remark Only the variables in current scope are selectable b For access to a registered watch expression Perform this operation on the Watch panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 144 of 471
222. anel If a panel that has watch expressions registered in it is closed the panel is hidden but information on its registered watch expressions is retained When the panel is reopened it opens with those watch expressions registered in it as they were When the value of any watch expression changes after the program is executed the display is updated During step execution the display is updated successively as the program is stepped through Also if the Realtime display update function is enabled the display of values can be updated in real time even during program execution Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on the panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 32 Watch Panel Toolbar Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo F apo ADDPR IOR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088052 l Ox00000001 int i4 R6 REG Ox00000006 General Registersi4 0x00000007 General Registers 4 O0x00001700 General Registers 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File Menu Watch Panel Only Items Edit Menu Watch Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Watch from the View menu and then select Watch 1 4 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 307 of
223. anel C C variablesNe 1 local variables Note 2 IOR panel I O registers R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 309 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1 It represents C89 C99 and C variables 2 Scope specification is automatically added to the watch expression lt 2 gt Direct registration on Watch panel On any Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 click the button in the toolbar or select Add New Watch on the context menu An entry box for new watch expressions is displayed at the bottom of this area In the Watch area of the entry box enter a watch expression directly from the keyboard and then press the Enter key The form in which watch expressions are entered this way is as follows Table A 5 Watch expression Input Form Watch expression Displayed value C C variable name Note 1 Value of a C C variable Watch expression Watch expression Element values of an array Watch expression member name Note 2 Member values of a structure union class Watch expression gt member name Note 2 Member values of the structure union class pointed to by a pointer Watch expression cast expression Value of a pointer to member variable Watch expression gt cast expression Value of a pointer to member variable Watch expression Variable value of a pointer amp Watch expression Placement address Type
224. area specify the name of I O register case insensitive in the text box You can either enter characters directly from the keyboard up to 512 characters or select from the input history items in the drop down list up to 10 items Click one of the following buttons Searches I O register names containing the character string specified in the text box in the backward direction and highlights the search result Searches I O register names containing the character string specified in the text box in the forward direction and highlights the search result Remarks 1 1 O register names which are categorized in folders and hidden are also searched They will be expanded and selected 2 After entering the search string pressing Enter key will perform the same function as clicking on the outton and pressing Shift Enter will perform the same function as clicking on the P button 2 Putting the I O registers in order The tree form of I O registers can be edited by classifying each register by a given category folder Cautions 1 No other categories can be created within a category a 2 No I O registers can be added or removed To create a new category Move the caret to an I O register name you want to create and then click the toolbar button Pea and enter a new category name directly from the keyboard To edit a category name Select a category name you want to edit and then click on it again and edit th
225. ariable or I O register At this time it is also possible to limit the values accessed The types of access specifiable in access related events are as follows Table 2 13 Types of Access for Variables Access Type Description Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read i e to read data from it Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for write i e to write data to it Read write Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read or write i e to read or write data R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 140 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark Accesses by DMAC Direct Memory Access Controller and DTC Data Transfer Controller are not supported To set events for variables or I O registers in source text or disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembled text is displayed Select any variable or I O register in the source text or disassembled text and then select the desired operation from the context menu as described below However the variables you can select are only global variables static variables inside a function or static variables inside a file Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupt
226. assemble Data As would have been selected is performed Save Disassemble Data Opens the Data Save dialog box to save the disassembled content to a specified text file txt As or CSV file csv see h Saving disassembled data Opens the Print Address Range Seitings dialog box to print the content of this panel Edit menu Disassemble Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Disassemble panel is as follows All other items are disabled Copy Copies the content of a selected line as a character string to the clipboard if a line is selected When in edit mode a selected character string is copied to the clipboard Rename Goes to edit mode to edit the instruction or instruction code at the caret position see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly However this is disabled during program execution Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected Go To Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to a specified address Context menu Disassemble area and Address area Register to Watch1 Registers a selected character string or a word at the caret position as a watch expression in the Watch panel Watch1 Word determination depends on the current build tool When registered as a watch expression they are registered as a variable name
227. at the arbitrary position breakpoint Set Software Break E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint software break event at the address where the caret is positioned see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a break event for read access at the caret position or in a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a break event for write access at the caret position or in a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a break event for read write access at the caret position or in a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Combination Break E1 E20 Sets a break at the caret position s address or the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break event see 1 Set a beak event execution relat
228. atch panel Watch1 through Watch4 Note that there is certain relationship between the panels that accept this operation and the subjects that can be registered as watch expressions For details see Table A 4 Relationship between Panels and Subjects Registrable as Watch expressions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 126 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 123 Example for Registering Watch expressions from Other Panels Here the variable g_IntBuf on the Disassemble panel is Disassemble1 eared ra f registered as a watch expression F ES 8 Views After selecting the variable g_IntBuf on the Disassemble panel Sale while gap gt O jf fffrrS65t 6106 drag and drop it directly onto the Watch panel ffff8661 2a94 g_CharBuf ck Type Byte Size nit 4 0x00001 g_IntBut Remark There is an alternative way to register watch expressions Select the subject you want to register as a watch expression or move the caret to one of the subject character strings the subject being automatically determined then select Register to Watch1 from the context menu However this method is usable for only the Watch panel Watch1 b To register directly on the Watch panel In any Watch panel Watch1 through Watch4 click the toolbar button and the entry box shown below will be displayed in the Watch area Figure 2 124 Entry Box for Watch
229. atch panel choose Save Watch Data As from the File menu While focus is present on IOR panel choose Save IOR Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Call Stack panel choose Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Local Variables panel choose Save Local Variable Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Output panel choose Save Tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder in which you want to save the file 2 File list area Displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Save In area and File Type area 3 File name area Specify a file name under which you want to save R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 440 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area a For the Editor panel Depending on the type of file being edited this area displays the following file types Text file txt Text format C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cp cc C source file Header file h hpp inc Header file Assemble file src Assembler source file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Map file map Ibp Map file Hex file hex Hex file Assemble list file Ist Assembler list file S reco
230. ated development environment for developing applications and systems for RX family and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for RX family integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS APPENDIX C INDEX It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remar
231. ation Specify the PIC PID offset Specify whether or not to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID Position Independent Data areas of the load module to be downloaded from those at which they were when the load module was created When this item is changed to Yes PIC Offset and PID Offset are displayed in the sub item Default No Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Specifies PIC PID offsetNote 2 Does not specify PIC PID offset R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 61 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS PIC Offset Enter an offset value from an address that was in the load module when it was created For example if the program section s start address begins with the address 0x1000 enter 1000 for this item The subject section is downloaded to the address 0x2000 Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values PID Offset Notes 1 2 Remark Enter an offset value to be set in the PID register that was specified in the load module when it was created For example to set 0x200 in the PID register when the load module is executed enter 200 for this item Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the
232. atisfied irrespective of the time line Sequential Break will occur when the break event conditions are satisfied in the specified sequence Only one break event in the combination breaks can be registered as a reset event R event When the registered break event is encountered all the other break event conditions which have been holding until then will be cleared When editing a combination break select the combination break in the Events panel and click Edit Condition in the context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the combination break For details on editing in the dialog box see 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on combination break settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access related can be specified for the 1st to the 3rd position 3 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access related for which an address area condition has been set can be specified only for the 1st position R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 103 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 106 Example of the Combination Break Sequential in the Events Panel E1 E20 B 8 S OS Name Detail Comment Unconditional Trace p 9 Run Break Timer Not measured M
233. ator and the CPU on target system Note that this property is displayed only when FINE is specified in the Communication method property Default 2000000 How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 2000000 750000 500000 250000 Note The specifiable voltage value differs with each selected microcontroller 6 Flash E1 E20 This category displays detailed information on flash memory rewriting and changes rewrite settings Input Mode of ID code Specify ID code input mode Default ID code specified in 32 hexadecimal digits How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Enter ID code in 32 hexadecimal digits Specify the ID code Enter ID code within 16 ASCII characters as an ASCII code within 16 characters ID code Specify ID code that is used when code in memory is read out Default For Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF For Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters Blank How to change By entering directly from the keyboard However changeable only when disconnected from the debug
234. aution E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace functions and real time RAM monitor functions RRM functions can be used only on a mutually exclusive basis Usage of trace function Specify whether the trace function is used as real time RAM monitor function RRM function E1 E20 Default Trace How to E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial change Not changeable E20 JTAG By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Trace Trace function is used preferentially value Realtime RAM monitor Real time RAM monitor function RRM function is used preferentially R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 235 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note 1 Use trace function Specify whether or not to use the trace function Simulator Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes The trace function is used value No The trace function is not used Clear trace memory Specify whether or not to clear the trace memory before execution before running Default Yes Simulator How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes The trace memory is cleared before execution value No The trace memory is not cleared before execution Operation after
235. aximum of three events is listed and displayed Remark The detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel 10 Characters area This area displays character strings of text files and source files and you can edit it This area has the following functions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 255 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a b c d e Code outlining This allows you to expand and collapse source code blocks so that you can concentrate on the areas of code which you are currently modifying or debugging This is only available for only C and C source file types This is achieved by clicking the plus and minus symbols to the left of the Characters area Types of source code blocks that can be expanded or collapsed are Open and close braces and Multi line comments and Pre processor statements if elif else endif endif Caution This will be disabled for source files larger than 1MB Characters editing Characters can be entered from the keyboard Various shortcut keys can be used to enhance the edit function Tag jump If the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position selecting Tag Jump from the View menu or from the context menu opens the file in the Editor panel and jumps to the corresponding line and the corr
236. ay section property Figure 2 91 Overlay sections Property E Debuginformation Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main E 0 03000 03014 kes Fe ram01 v 1 043100 0 3110 2 043200 043203 This property shows the current information of overlay sections per address group in detail Only Priority section can be changed File Name of the load module file in which the selected address group has been downloaded this cannot be changed Start address First address of the selected address group this cannot be changed End address Last address of the selected address group this cannot be changed Priority section List of sections defined in the selected address group You can choose a section to be debugged priority section from this list Cautions 1 Settings related to overlay sections are not saved in the project file After you have downloaded a load module select the priority section again 2 Only debugging information is switched when the selection for Priority section is changed The debug tool does not copy data of the target section R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 86 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The following figure shows an example where ram01 is selected as the priority section left pane and then changed to ram02 right pane for the Overlay sections property in the case shown in Figure 2 8
237. baud rate to be used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when FINE is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 2000000 default 750000 500000 250000 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Depending on the length or the method of FINE signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected FINE baud rate In such a case reducing the FINE baud rate may achieve successful communication e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewriting in this category Figure 2 32 Flash Category E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code H8 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address Res 1000 lt 1 gt Input Mode of ID code Specify the mode in which to input the ID codes Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 32 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt ID code Specify the ID code to use when reading the code from the memory If you have selected Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal in the Input Mode of ID code property enter the ID code in a 32 digit hexadecimal number If you have selected Specify the ID code as
238. be placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the content directly from the keyboard and hit the Enter key Removing watch expressions To remove a registered watch expression select the watch expression on Watch panel that you want to remove and then click the toolbar button s R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 128 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected watch expression in per variable predetermined notation default see Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default x Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII code 2 2 E 6 ee Displays a selected item in Float However this is valid only when the selected watch expression consists of 4 byte data Displays a selected item in Double However this is valid only when the selected watc
239. beSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 73 Editor Panel Mixed Display Mode 33 void main void 34 35 _main A fLEfE783 660e M 0H R14 ff f8785 6lle label CMP 1H R14 fff8787 12 ff f8791 02 36 F EZZZ8789 Instruction code Di assempisdtexi _ tutorial f878b Bove MOV L 0H R14 FLIEB7ad 61le CMP 1H R14 f878f 219 BNE B _main SH 37 38 39 40 _tutorial 3 os ADD 34H RO RO Cautions 1 The mixed display mode is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel 2 In the mixed display mode the source files cannot be edited and saved In addition Redo Cut Paste Delete Select All Replace Outlining Advanced from the Edit menu are disabled 2 Setting the columns to display The columns or marks displayed on this panel can be set by selecting the toolbar items shown below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 69 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Columns The following items are displayed to show or hide the columns or marks on this panel Remove the check to hide the items all the items are checked by default Line Number Shows the line number in the line number area Selection Shows the mark that indicates the line modification status in the line number area Out of date module indicator Shows the mark that indicates the
240. ble Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace 2tENESAS Page 265 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Break Settings APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following cascade menus are displayed to set the break related event Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 8 Event area Set Hardware Break
241. ble type and long double type in the CPU Category on the Common Options Tab in the CC RX Property panel The type name and size are output in float type when Handles in single precision is selected and in double type when Handles in double precision is selected Address area This area displays the address to which each watch expression is mapped always expressed in hexadecimal However if the watch expression is a single CPU register or not determinable it is marked with or respectively Remark Ifthe watch expression is an I O register that is a bit register a bit offset value is added to its displayed address as shown below Example Fora bit register mapped to bit 4 at the address OxFF40 Displayed content OxFF40 4 Memo area This area allows the user to enter a comment on a watch expression or category freely as desired The contents of comments entered in this area are held separately for each watch expression and category and are saved as user information on the project Therefore if one of these watch expressions or categories is deleted the content of its corresponding memo is also discarded Note that when an array register or the like is expanded for display you cannot enter a comment on any expanded element To edit a comment double click the item you want to edit The selected item is placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode A character string of up to 256 characters can
242. bled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Go to Here Executes the program from the address indicated by the current PC value to the address corresponding to the line at the caret position Note 1 If the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address of the lower valid line Note that this item becomes invalid during execution of a program Build amp Download Set PC to Here Sets the address of the line at the current caret position to the current PC valueNote 1 Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret or during execution of a program Build amp Download Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 7 Jumping to functions Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position see c Tag jump Jump to Disassemble R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 tNote T Opens the Disassemble panel and jumps to the address corresponding to the line at the care Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret 2tENESAS Page 264 of 471 Advanced CubeSu
243. break to occur E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set Write Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set Write Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the writing On the other hand if no value is specified writing the selected variable by any value will cause the break to occur Read Write E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set R W Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading or writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading or writing the selected variable by any value will cause the break to occur Cautions 1 Variables within the current scope can be specified 2 Variables or I O register at lines that have no valid addresses cannot be used for break events Figure 2 100 Example of Setting a Break Event Access related on Variable in the Source Text E1 E20 23 L Goto Here fd ED Set PC to Here 26 A Jump to Function Fi2 27 fffL 85 3 28 g Tag Jump Shift F12 29 T Jump to Disassemble 30 3 31 Advanced gt 32 f
244. cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 4 gt Routine to run immediately before execution starts Specify the address to be executed immediately before the user program execution This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 5 gt Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Specify whether to execute a specified routine after the user program break Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 6 gt Routine to run immediately after execution stops Specify the address to be executed immediately after the user program break This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 25 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 f Trace You can configure the trace function in this category lt 1 gt Usage of trace function Trace is displayed as the usage of trace function You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Operation after trace memory is full Select the trace acquisition mode from the following drop down list Overwrite trace memory and continue Continues ove
245. caret to an event in the Reset event list Cautions 1 Only one reset event is specifiable If you click the R Event button with the reset event registered the event selected in the Object event list and the registered reset event will replace each other 2 If you change the combination condition from Sequential to OR or AND with the reset event registered the event in the Reset event list cannot be included in the Object event list In order to include it in the Object event list you need to first cancel the reset event registration before making changes to the combination conditions 3 An event for which the pass count has been specified cannot be registered as the reset event The pass count cannot be specified for an event that has been registered as the reset event 4 RX600 Series An event for which the address area has been specified cannot be registered as the reset event The address area cannot be specified for an event that has been registered as the reset event R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 181 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 164 Registering a Reset Event Sequential Combination Condition Break Combination Sequential Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 OxffffS65f Write g_IntBuf 0 142c 0x142f Oxb 2 After Execution sort cH36 OxtfffS60e 3 Read g_CharBuf 0x1000 0x1000 0x55 4 R Event Reset even
246. ce function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab this facility cannot be used To use it select Trace 6 This facility cannot be used when an action event is set R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 145 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 To temporarily stop collection of execution history By selecting Stop Trace from the context menu on the Trace panel during program execution it is possible to temporarily stop collection of trace data Use this feature when you want to stop only the trace function without halting the program and check the trace data that has been collected until you stop it 2 To restart collection of execution history If you ve halted the trace function during program execution you can start collection of trace data again by selecting Start Trace from the context menu on the Trace panel Note that the trace data on the Trace panel that has been collected before you restart is cleared once 2 13 6 Displaying an execution history To display the collected trace data use the Trace panel shown below Choose Trace from the View menu The trace data is displayed by default in a disassembled text and source text mixed mode By selecting the appropriate Display mode it is possible to display either of the two For details on how to read each area and about their functionality see the section where the Trace panel is describe
247. cess CPU execution Yes 12 5000 No 25 0000 Usage of trace function Select whether the trace function should be used for real time RAM monitoring or not Connect Settings Property Sl AX E20 Serial Property 1 E Memory Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory 2 _ gt E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms 3 E Register PC display during the execution Display update interval for PC ms 4 E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used 5 E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops Usage of trace function Operation after trace memory is full Trace data type External trace output Trace memory size MByte Output timestamp 7 _ gt E Timer Operating frequency MHz 23 Yes No Yes 500 Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Trace Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Data access CPU execution 1 No Trace Connect Settings Debug Tool Settings Download File Settings ztENESAS Hook Transaction Settings
248. ch default Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt Specifying the Source and Line The character string specified here is searched from within the Line Address area of the Trace panel Enter a character string included in the source line you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main lt 2 gt Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to Jast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 151 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the
249. cify masked comparison condition address mask R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 401 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Area condition Specify address comparison range condition This property is displayed only when Address area is selected in the Compare condition property Default Inside the range lt values lt Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Inside the range Condition holds true for an access lt values lt within the range Outside the range Condition holds true for an access lt Values lt outside the range End address Specify the end address The start address is the value displayed in the Address property This property is displayed only when Address area is selected in the Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Note3 Address mask Specify a mask value in hexadecimal This property is displayed only when Compare with address mask is selected in the Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Compare Specify comparison condition This property is displayed only when Compare with address mask is selected in the Compare condition property Default Specified value
250. cify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to ast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed lt 5 gt Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel 2 13 9 Saving the displayed content of an execution history The contents of collected trace data can be saved after specifying a range of data in a text file txt or CSV file csv format When saving to a file the latest information will be retrieved from the debug tool and saved according to the display format on this panel Choose Save Trace Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to save the data Figure 2 139 Saving an Execution History Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Trace Data File Name C TestisampletTrace Data F
251. ck in the charput and charget functions of the program Switching of the system clock may adversely affect the communication between the emulator and microcontroller hampering normal transmission or reception of data For details about the low level interface routines see Chapter 7 Startup in the separate edition Remarks 1 CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Coding R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 190 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Simulator As a method for executing standard I O an emulator like method and a simulator inherent method are supported In a simulator inherent method file I O not just standard I O can also be used Each supported method changes from one to another as you specify in the Select stream I O mode property in the Stream I O Simulator category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab For details about the simulator s I O functions see APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS To use sample projects with debug console functions follow the procedure described below 1 Loading a sample project From Open Sample Project on the Start panel of CubeSuite load sample project RX610_Tutorial_DebugConsole for the E1 E20 Remark For details about the Start panel see the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start 2 Editing the low level interface routine file assembly language
252. code as a 32 digit hexadecimal E FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Fes 1000 102 4 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings r tir ad Fil ztENESAS Page 28 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 25 Property Panel E20 JTAG Property S AX E20TAG Property B Internal ROM RAM ze of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MA 200m4 Communications method JTAG clock MHz E Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file No E20 XXXXXXXXX No JTAG 16 5 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFP Fes 1000 102 N24 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM ok Transactio Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Co
253. coding building debugging and flash programming In this manual the debugging is explained out of those operations needed for the program development Among them this manual focuses on the description of debugging the outline of which is provided in this chapter 1 1 Summary You can efficiently debug the program developed for the RX family using the debugger provided by CubeSuite 1 2 Features The following are the features of the debugger provided by CubeSuite Connectable to various debugging tools Usable in combination with the on chip debugging emulator E1 E20 and the simulator it provides improved effi ciency in program development Mixed display of C C source text and disassembled text The C C source text and the disassembled text can be displayed together on the same panel Source level debugging and instruction level debugging C C source program can be debugged either at the source or the instruction level Data flash memory programming When the selected microcontroller is provided with a data flash memory you can display or edit the contents of the data flash memory using the same access method as in other normal memory operations not including the simu lator Real time display updating function The values of memory registers and variables are automatically updated not only when the program is stopped but also in execution Saving restoring the debugging environment The debugging envir
254. comes unchangeable lt 4 gt External trace output E20 JTAG From the following drop down list select the method in which to externally output the trace acquisition data CPU execution CPU execution given priority over trace output Trace information may be lost if output Trace output Trace output given priority over CPU execution CPU execution stops during trace output affecting real time performance Do not output Only the internal buffer of the microcontroller will be used with no output of trace information Cautions 1 If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property Do not output cannot be selected from the drop down list 2 If Step in is executed when CPU execution or Trace output is specified and trace data is being displayed on the Trace panel correct trace data may not always be displayed lt 5 gt Trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG Specify the size of memory used to retain the trace data The following memory sizes are displayed in the drop down list 1 default 2 4 8 16 32 Caution If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as 1 and becomes unchangeable lt 6 gt Output timestamp Specify whether timestamp information is added to the trace data to be collected This property is selectable only when you ve specified Trace in the Usage of trace function property The change
255. configure the memory in this category Figure 2 34 E Memory E Memory mappings 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Verify on writing to memory lt 1 gt Memory mappings Memory Category 28 On chip RAM area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 1 0 registers area 1 0 registers area Reserved area Data flash area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area External area CS 7 External area CS6 External area CS5 External area CS 4 External area CS3 External area CS2 External area CS1 Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area On chip ROM area Yes Current memory mapping status is displayed in detail for each type of memory area This property displays only the number of memory areas Expanding Memory mapping property will display the following sub items Memory type Indicates the memory type of the corresponding area Each memory type corresponds to the following areas On chip ROM area Program ROM and data flash Internal RAM On chip RAM area I O registers area Peripheral I O register Divided into areas with different endians for display External area CS7 CS6 CSO External address space CS0 to CS7 are displayed separately
256. connect the debug tool to the CubeSuite and debug the program while it is in execution Follow the steps below to establish hot plug in connection 1 Execute the program Execute the program which has been downloaded onto the microcontroller on the target system without connecting to the emulator 2 Specify the debug tool In the active project specify the debug tool which supports hot plug in connection E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Remark E1 Serial and E20 Serial do not support hot plug in connection 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in Select Hot Plug in from Debug menu to initiate the preparation for hot plug in connection 4 Connect to the target system Following message will appear once you are ready to start hot plug in connection Connect the emulator to the target system and click OK This will start the communication with the debug tool which is selected in the currently active project Figure 2 60 Message Indicating that Hot Plug in Connection Is Ready to be Started Question Q0 204001 p Hot Plug in is prepared iu Connect the debug target to a PC and click OK Caution E1 JTAG To establish hot plug in connection you need to connect the emulator to the target system via Hot plug Adapter ROE000010ACB00 which is optionally available R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 51 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Hot plug in connection completed Once
257. constituent elements in tree form at the following nodes Node Description Microcontroller type Debug tool name debug tool Microcontroller type Shows the type name of a selected microcontroller RX Debug tool name Shows the debug tool name used in the project E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG or Simulator When a new project is created Simulator is set When a node is selected its detailed information properties is displayed on the Property panel allowing the set tings on it to be changed If this panel is not open yet double click a node to open it Toolbar Displays category nodes and file names sorted in order of name character code Ascending display descending display are switched over each time the button is clicked Indicates that displayed elements are not sorted in order of name default Indicates that elements are displayed in descending order Indicates that elements are displayed in ascending order Displays category nodes and file names sorted in order of timestamp Ascending display descending display are switched over each time the button is clicked Indicates that displayed elements are not sorted in order of timestamp default Indicates that elements are displayed in descending order Indicates that elements are displayed in ascending order Displays category nodes and file names in the order specified by the user Indicates
258. cquired 1 byte character in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 Parameter block area SECTION B 1 DATA BLKL 1 Input output buffer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 450 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS PUTC Outputs 1 byte to standard output Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Beginning address of 2 output buffer Parameters Beginning address of output buffer input Beginning address of the output buffer that contains output data Detailed Description Outputs 1 byte to standard output Example _charput MOV IO_ BUF R2 Set the address of the output buffer in R2 MOV R1 R2 Set the value of R1 output character in the output buffer 1220000h R1 Set the function code of PUTC in R1 PARM R3 Set the address of the parameter block in R3 R2 R3 Set the address of the output buffer in the output buffer R3 R2 Set the value of R3 address of the parameter block in R2 SIM_1I0 R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 Parameter block area SECTION B 1 DATA BLKL 1 Input output buffer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 451 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite
259. cribes the following 1 Specifying the display position 2 Changing the display form of values 3 Changing memory contents 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution 5 Searching for memory contents 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents 7 Saving displayed memory contents R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 106 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Specifying the display position By specifying an address expression in the display position specification area it is possible to specify the position at which CubeSuite starts displaying memory values CubeSuite starts displaying by default from the address 0x0 Remark An offset value of the display start position of memory values can be set via the Address Offset Settings dialog box that is opened by selecting Address Offset Value Settings from the context menu Figure 2 108 Display Position Specification Area Memory Panel C Move when Stop a Specifying an address expression Directly enter in the text box an address expression that designates the address of the memory value you want to be displayed An input expression of up to 1 024 characters can be specified the calculation result of which is handled as the address for the display start position However no address expressions can be specified that exceed the address space of the microcontroller Remarks 1 By holding do
260. ct an item to set from the categories below Category Content of Setting General Startup and Exit category Make settings related to startup or exit time General Display category Make settings related to display General External Text Editor category Make settings related to external text editors General Font and Color category Make settings related to fonts and colors displayed on each panel General External Tools category Make settings with which external tools are started General Build Debug category Make settings related to build or debug General PythonConsole category Make settings related to the Python console R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 420 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Content of Setting General Text Editor category Make settings related to text editors General Update category Make settings related to updates Others User Information category Make settings related to user information Remark For categories other than General Fonts and Colors and General Build Debug see the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start 2 Setting area This area is where various options for a selected category are set For details on how to set up each category see the section in which the relevant category is described Function buttons
261. ct the event for which you want to enter a comment and click in this area or select Edit Comment on the context menu and then enter any text directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the editing mode When you ve finished editing a comment press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area to complete your editing Note that a comment can be entered for up to 256 characters each and the comment is saved as the one set by the current user Toolbar x Deletes a selected event or an event condition However the built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events cannot be deleted fe Displays hardware break related events default z El E20 Displays software break related events default Displays trace related events default Displays timer related events default Displays action events Printf event or interrupt event default Displays built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events default m a E E B R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 address where a selected even Opens the Editor panel with the caret on it moved to the source line corresponding to the tNote is set ztENESAS Page 343 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret on it moved to the disassembled result corresponding to the address where a
262. cted from the debug tool Return Out Runs the program until control returns from the currently executed function until control returns to the calling function Note However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool CPU Reset Resets the CPU program is not executed However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Restart Resets the CPU once and then starts running the program from the reset address However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Note Step execution can be performed either at the source level or at the instruction level For details see Section 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps 2 Debug toolbar The debug toolbar comprises buttons each representing a command for controlling program execution Each button and their functionality are as follows default Remarks 1 The buttons in each toolbar can be customized using the User Settings dialog box Also this same dialog box can be used to create a new toolbar 2 Right clicking on the toolbar displays a context menu which allows selection of a group to be displayed in or hidden from the toolbar Builds a project and after building downloads the file to the active project s debug tool If CubeSuite is disconnected
263. cter strings ASCII to enter values Set the display form of the character array str to ASCII and then enter the letters ABC in the Value area gt gt The numerals 0x41 0x42 0x43 and 0x00 are written into the memory area to which the array str is mapped 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables By choosing Save Local Variables Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of local variables in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool Note that if arrays pointer type variables structures unions or CPU registers only those that are assigned the names to represent sections are displayed in expanded form the values of their expansion elements are also saved When not expanded they are marked with at the head with the values left blank Figure 2 121 Local Variable Value Output Image When Saved Scope Current scope V Variable P Parameter F Function Name Value Type Byte Size Address V Variable name 1 Value Type Address V Variable name 0 Value Type Address 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions C variables CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered as watch expressions in the Watch panel shown below That way it is possible to get their values from the debug tool at all times and thereby to kee
264. ction Note that events can only be set on event settable lines see 1 Event area Start Timer Stop Timer Sets a timer start event that causes measurement of program execution time to start when an instruction at the address where the caret exists is executed see a How to seta timer start event Sets a timer end event that causes measurement of program execution time to end when an instruction at the address where the caret exists is executed see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer Start R W Value Sets a timer start event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see a How to seta timer start event Set Timer lt N gt E1 E20 Specify a channelN te in which a timer start event is set Set Timer End R W Value Sets a timer end event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to finish upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see b How to seta timer end event Set Timer lt N gt E1 E20 View Result of Timer Specify a channelN te in which a timer start event is set Opens th
265. ction The group has already been divided into four panels Go to Next Tab Group When the display area is divided in the horizontal direction this moves the displayed panel to the group under that displaying the selected panel When the display area is divided in the vertical direction this moves the displayed panel to the group to the right of that displaying the selected panel This item is not displayed if there is no group in the given direction Go to Previous Tab Group When the display area is divided in the horizontal direction this moves the displayed panel to the group over that displaying the selected panel When the display area is divided in the vertical direction this moves the displayed panel to the group to the left of that displaying the selected panel This item is not displayed if there is no group in the given direction Characters area when disconnected from the debug tool Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid The mode selected for the current source
266. ctor by directly entering a corresponding number between 0 and 255 b Specify Priority Specify an interrupt s priority level RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 8 When 8 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Non RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 16 When 16 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt c Click the OK button Set the interrupt event to the line at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When the interrupt event is set the o mark is displayed in the event area on the Editor panel Disassemble panel and the set interrupt event is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs When the program is executed the interrupt request will occur immediately before the execution of the instruction at which the interrupt event has been set Once the interrupt request is accepted by the CPU interrupt exception will take place R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 171 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 Once the generated interrupt request is accepted and interrupt exception executed the interrupt request will be cleared 2 Ifan interrupt request is made by another event while the generated interrupt request is being reserved one with higher inter
267. d Function code R1 register MSB 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1byte LSB Address of the parameter block R2 register For the content of the parameter block see the description of each I O function MSB LSB Po Reservation of areas for the parameter block and stream I O buffer To access each parameter in the parameter block make sure that an access is made in size of the relevant parameter R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 449 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS GETC Accepts 1 byte from standard input Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Beginning address of 2 input buffer Parameters Beginning address of input buffer input Beginning address of the input buffer to which input data is written Detailed Description Accepts 1 byte from standard input Example _charget MOV 1210000h R1 Set the function code of GETC in R1 MOV IO_ BUF R2 Set the address of the input buffer in R2 MOV PARM R3 Set the address of the parameter block in R3 MOV R2 R3 Set the address of the input buffer in the parameter block R3 R2 Set the value of R3 address of the parameter block in R2 SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call IO_ BUF R2 Set the address of the input buffer in R2 R2 R1 Set the first byte of the input buffer a
268. d Register name Value Category name Register name Value 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers Use the IOR panel shown below to display I O register contents or change values Choose IOR from the View menu For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the IOR panel is described Figure 2 118 Displaying the I O Register Contents IOR Panel Toolbar Search area Value Type Byte Size Address 0x0000 IOR 2 0x00088040 Ox0000 IOR Z 0x00088042 ADDRC Ox0000 IOR Z 0x00088044 ADDRD 0x0000 IOR Z 0x00088046 ADCSR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088050 ADCSR ADIE 0x0 IOR lbits 0x00088050 6 ADCSR ADST 0x0 IOR lbits 0x00088050 5 ADCSR CH 0x0 IOR 4bits 0x00088050 0 ADCR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088051 ADCR TRGS 0x0 IOR 3bits 0x00088051 5 IOR brea Value area Type Byte Size area Address area Following methods of operation are described here Searching I O register 2 Putting the I O registers in order 3 Changing the form in which values are displayed 4 Changing the contents of I O registers 5 Displaying and changing I O register contents during program execution 6 Saving the displayed I O register contents R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 120 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Searching I O register You can search the name of I O register In the search
269. d Figure 2 134 Displaying Trace Data Trace Panel Toolbar D l Notations I 5 LEWE f Time h min s ms ps ns Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data OOhOOminO0s038ms1 39ps360ns 0 00001 6d8 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 39ps680ns Ox000016de RO sort c 37 g_IntBut j OOhOOminO0sO38ms1 40ps320ns Osffff8624 56 MOV L 0000142CH R1 sort cH37 g_IntBuf j OOhOOminO0sO38ms1 40ps320ns Osxffff862a 62 MOV L R11R14 sort c 38 iffali gt afi aap i OOhOOminO0sO38ms1 40ps320ns Osffff862c 64 MOV L R15 R2 sort c 38 iffali gt afi gap it OOhOOminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns Oxtfff862e 66 MOY L R4 A3 sort c 38 iffalil gt afi gap it OOhOOminOO0s038ms1 40ps320ns Oxffff8630 68 CMP R3 A2 sort c 38 iffali gt alj aap lt lt lt g_IntBuf 3 gt gt gt OOhOOminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns Oxffff8632 70 BLE B _sort 58H OOhOOminO0s038ms1 44ys160ns 0x00001 42c erzan DOhOOmiIn00s038ms144ps480rs 0x00001708 Fo He sort c 40 ali afj aap OOhOOminOOsO38ms144ys800ns OxfFFFBB34 72 MOV L R3 R15 sort c 41 ali gap t l I l Il i Il Il l Number area Line Number Address area Address area Data area Time h min s ms 11s ns area Source Disassemble area This section describes the following 1 Changing the display mode 2 Changing the form in which values are displayed 3 Getting linked to other panels 1 Changing the display mode By clicking one of the toolbar buttons shown below it is possible to change the display mode as
270. d Internal ROM area Internal RAM area I O register area Emulation ROM area Emulation RAM area Non map area Address range Displays an address range lt Start address gt lt End address gt The addresses are always expressed in hexadecimal with Ox added Size Displays a size in decimal in byte or Kbyte units Access width Displays an access width in bit units N te R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 353 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Since access width is not supported in the simulator a fixed value 8 bit will be displayed The simulation execution time will not be affected by the access width value b Button Remove Deletes a memory mapping selected in this area The memory area that can be deleted is either an Emulation ROM area or an Emulation RAM area The microcontroller s internal memory mappings cannot be deleted Function buttons Button Function OK Sets a currently set memory mapping in the debug tool and then closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies changes made to memory mappings and then closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 354 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download Files dialog box This dialog box selects a file to download and sets download conditions see Section 2 5 Download and Upl
271. d For details on how to set see section 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution 8 Exporting importing watch expressions This feature allows you to export currently registered watch expressions to a file and import it so that the watch expressions can be re registered To do this follow the procedure described below a Export watch expressions Save watch expressions currently being registered including categories in a file format that is possible to import While the focus is in the Watch panel select Save Watch Data As from the File menu On the Save As dialog box that is automatically opened specify the following items and then click the Save button File name Specify the name of a file to be saved the file extension must be csv Save as type Select Importable CSV Comma Separated Variables csv Caution Neither values nor the type information of watch expressions can be saved Items that are expanded after analyzing watch expressions i e an array structure and so on cannot be saved Figure 2 125 Export of Watch Expressions Save As Save in sample N O DefaultBuild EG Dsc My Recent Documents Desktop D My Documents gs My Computer My Network File name Watch_Expott csv v Save as type Importable CS Comma Separated Variables csv Y R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 130 of 471 Oct 01 2012
272. d Settings of Execution Events dialog box This dialog box is used to display and change detailed information on execution related events selected on the Events panel Note that the execution related events refer to the following events on the Events panel Hardware break After execution or post execution break in the detailed information on combination break E1 E20 After execution or post execution eventsN registered as trace start and trace end events in the detailed information on trace After execution or post execution eventsNe registered as timer start and timer end events in the detailed information on timer result or timer measurement Note Simulator Before execution or pre execution events apply instead of after execution events Figure A 61 Detailed Settings of Execution Events Dialog Box E1 E20 Detail Toolbar f 2 4 E l ddress ex Pass Count 256 Pass count 2 4 Specifies pass count 1 256 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 395 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 62 Detailed Settings of Execution Events Dialog Box Simulator Toolbar f 22 4 E HAddress es E Pass Count 16383 Pass count 2 4 Specifies pass count 1 16383 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How t
273. d as a download file Only the symbol information included in the load module file becomes the subject to download 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 The download files you ve specified in the Download Files dialog box can be downloaded to the flash memory connected to an external bus of the microcontroller used i e the external flash memory In this case follow the procedure described below a Setting up the Property panel In the External Flash E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab register an external flash definition file USD file External flash memory is recognized by registering a USD file in the External Flash E1 E20 category Up to four USD files can be registered By clicking the mark of an external flash definition file the definition file name start and end addresses and whether to erase the external flash ROM before downloading are displayed for each index 1 to 4 Figure 2 67 External Flash Category E External Flash E 0 1 2 3 lt 1 gt External flash definition file Shows the maximum number of registrable USD files To register a USD file specify a USD file name in the File property that is expanded on display as a sub property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 63 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Enter a file name directly if specified by a relative path it should be refere
274. d number Function buttons Button Function OK Displays memory values in the specified number of columns Cancel Nullifies settings and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 370 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Address Offset Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set an offset value of the start address in the address area on the Memory panel Figure A 50 Address Offset Settings Dialog Box Address Offset Settines 1 4 Address Offset Value Hex 0 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel select View gt gt Address Offset Value Settings from the context menu Description of each area 1 Address Offset Value area Directly enter a hexadecimal value as an offset value for the address display The settable range depends on the number of bytes of the memory currently being displayed in a line on the Memory panel as follows Settable range 0x0 Set value of Size Notation x The number of view columns 1 Example When Set value of Size Notation is 1 byte and The number of view columns is 16 columns Offset Value Displayed Content of Address Area 0x0 default Function buttons Button Function OK Displays memory addres
275. d object information Download symbol Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified fileNote 1 information Default Yes Method to By selecting from drop down list change Specifiable Yes Downloads symbol information value No Does not download symbol information Specify the PIC PID Specify whether or not to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID offset Position Independent Data areas of the load module to be downloaded from those at which they were when the load module was created When this item is changed to Yes PIC Offset and PID Offset are displayed in the sub item Default No Method to By selecting from drop down list change Specifiable Specifies PIC PID offsetNte 2 value Does not specify PIC PID offset R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 58 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS PIC Offset Enter an offset value from an address that was in the load module when it was created For example if the program section s start address begins with the address 0x1000 enter 1000 for this item The subject section is downloaded to the address 0x2000 Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF value PID Offset Enter an offset value to be set in the PID register that was specified in the
276. d results are displayed by default in the mixed display mode a mixed display of disassembled text and source text By clicking the toolbar button toggle you can choose to show or not show the source text R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 76 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 82 Example Display Where Source Text is Hidden Disassemblel Fh Fh Fh mo om NM J J Fh H Fh Hh nin tm fe Fh Fh Fh Fh co J n Fh Fh Fh Fh co u J wi z2zefd _tutorial 6e68 710008 b7204100000 ef 71 05670000 _main R6 R8 28H RO 0000100 R7 R1 _init efo6 05250100 7e21 RO R6 _rand 2 Changing the display form The form in which disassembled results are displayed can be changed freely by using the toolbar buttons shown below Shows the following buttons that change the display form Displays the offset values of labels If the address has no labels defined an offset value from the closest label is displayed Displays address values in the form symbol offset value default However if the address value has a symbol defined only the symbol is displayed 3 Moving to a specified address To move to a specified address in the disassembled text select Go To from the context menu and use the Go to the Location dialog box that is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below t
277. d watch expression You can set break events in the Watch panel Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting the registered watch expression multiple selections not allowed Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions static variables inside files and I O register can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a break event access related has been set at the target watch expression and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Access Type Operation E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set Read Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading On the other hand if no value is specified reading the selected watch expression by any value will cause the break to occur E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set Write Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set Write Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the writing On the other hand if no value is specified writing the selected watch exp
278. ddress R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 65 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end address to set a range of memory to be saved in a file Enter hexadecimal values or address expressions directly in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 4 Clicking the Save button Memory contents are saved in specified form to a specified file as upload data R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 66 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Displaying and Changing Programs This section describes how to display and change programs when a load module file with the debug information is downloaded to a debug tool Downloaded programs can be displayed in the following panels Editor panel The source file is displayed and can be edited Furthermore the source level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results can be performed in this panel Disassemble panel The result of disassembling the downloaded program the memory contents is displayed and c
279. ddress of the program section is 0x1000 the corresponding section will be downloaded to 0x2000 Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hex number between 0x0 and OxFFFFFFFF R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 357 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE PID Offset Input the offset values to the PID register specified at the time of load module creation For instance if you want to set 0x200 to the PID register when executing the load module enter 200 here Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hex number between 0x0 and OxFFFFFFFF Notes 1 If any file as the subject to build in the project is selected in the Download file list area or while the program is under execution the button is not displayed 2 Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugs cannot be performed 3 Proper debug operation is not guaranteed when you have selected Yes for load modules that were created without using PIC PID function see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function Function buttons Button Function OK Terminates download file settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies download file changes made and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 358 of 471 Oct 01 201
280. de default Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string variables in UTF 16 code R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 304 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Local Variables Panel Only Items The File menu items listed below are provided exclusively on the Local Variables panel Other menu items are shared with other panels However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Local Variables Overwrites the last saved text file txt or CSV file csv with the contents of this panel see b Data Saving of local variable values If you select this item for the first time after the start of the program the operation will be the same as selecting Save Local Variables Data As Save Local Variables Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of this panel to a specified text file Data As txt or CSV file csv see b Saving of local variable values Edit menu Local Variables Panel Only Items The Edit menu items listed below are provided exclusively on the Local Variables panel All the other menu items are disabled Copy Copies the content of a selected line or a character string to the clipboard Select All Puts the item into all selected state Rename Goes to edit mode in order to change the value of a selected
281. de to register more watch expressions exceeding this limit a message is displayed 2 Ina block where a variable that is the subject of operation is not used variable data may not always exist in the stack or register due to optimization by a compiler In this case even when a variable that is the subject of operation is registered as a watch expression the displayed value remains marked with Remarks 1 Watch expressions registered on each Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 are managed separately from each other and are saved as user information on the project 2 More than one watch expression with the same name can be registered R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 312 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d e f 9 h Editing a watch expression To edit a registered watch expression double click the subject watch expression to put it into edit mode and then enter the content of editing directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode When you ve finished editing a watch expression press the Enter key to complete the editing Deleting a watch expression Click the button in the toolbar or select Delete on the context menu to delete a selected watch expression Setting various events By selecting Access Break or Trace Output on the context menu it is possible to set various events in a selected watch expression When an access related br
282. ding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 In cases where the specified address expression represents a symbol and the size is known a range of memory from the start address to end address of that symbol is selected when displayed b Specify whether to evaluate address expression manually or automatically The Move when Stop checkbox and the Move buttons are used to determine the timing with which the display start position is changed Move when Stop The address expression is automatically evaluated after the program has halted and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation F The address expression is not automatically evaluated after the program has halted In this case the address expression is evaluated by clicking the Move button Move button If the Move when Stop checkbox is not checked the address expression is evaluated by clicking this button and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation 2 Address area This area displays memory addresses always in hexadecimal The display starts from address 0x0 by default However an offset value of the start address can be set via the Address Offset Settings dialog box that is opened by selecting Address Offset Value Settings from the context menu The address width matches that of the microcontroller s memory space s
283. display mode that shows the correspondence between disassembled result and source text default Specifies that the caret position track the current PC value Moves the caret to the position at which a selected symbol is defined Moves the caret to a position address at which it was immediately before being moved with the button Shows the following buttons that change the form in which a disassemble area is displayed Displays the offset value of a label If no labels are defined at the address the offset value from the nearest label is displayed Displays an address value in the form symbol offset value default However if the address value has a symbol defined in it only the symbol is displayed Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set a scroll range R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 283 of 471 Oct 01 2012 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Disassemble Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the Disassemble panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Disassemble Data Saves the disassembled content to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see h Saving disassembled data Note that if this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Dis
284. download is executed Connect to Debug Tool Connects to the debug tool currently selected in the active project However if already connected with the debug tool this item is disabled Hot Plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Hot plugs in to the debug tool currently selected in the active project in order to debug the target system currently under execution see Section 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG However if already connected with the debug tool this item is disabled Upload Opens the Data Save dialog box to save memory contents to a file However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Disconnect from Debug Tool Terminates communication with the currently connected debug tool However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when already disconnected from the debug tool Stop Forcibly halts the currently executed program However this item is disabled when the program is already halted or disconnected from the debug tool Runs the program from the current PC position and when the condition for a set break event holds true stops the program under execution However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool
285. drag and drop operation Cautions 1 A category cannot be created within another category 2 NO registers cannot be added or removed Registration of watch expressions I O registers or categories can be registered as watch expressions on the Watch panel For details on how to do it see 1 Registering watch expressions Remarks 1 If a watch expression is registered for a category all of the I O registers belonging to that category are registered as watch expressions 2 The registered watch expressions have their scope specification automatically given Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the IOR panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the IOR panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 296 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Value area This area displays or changes I O register values The notation numeral representation
286. e lt Values lt When data is within the range of specified values the condition holds true Compare data 1 lt data lt Compare data 2 Outside the range lt Values lt When data is outside the range of specified values the condition holds true data lt Compare data 1 Compare data 2 lt data No conditions Comparison data is not specified Notes 1 For Inverse sign and Difference since comparison is made with the previous data the condition never holds true after a reset and in the first determination of whether condition is true Remark Simulator This property is not displayed only when you ve specified No conditions in the Access size property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 178 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt lt 9 gt Compare data E1 E20 Specify a data value with a hexadecimal number Compare data1 Simulator Specify a data value in hexadecimal This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less Than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less Than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Compare data2 Simulator Specify a data value with a hexadecimal number
287. e line at caret is executed see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Set Trace Start Event Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Set Trace End Event Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the corresponding address of the line at the caret position b Changing the status of events via the menu The events status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Event s Changes all events state to an Enabled state When an event is enabled and its condition is met the event occurs Disable Event s Changes all events state to a Disabled state When an event is disabled and its condition is met the event will not occur Delete Event s Deletes all events View Details in Event Panel Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event c Pop up display By hovering the mouse cursor over the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are a pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for e
288. e on the Editor panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Back to Last Cursor Position Moves the caret back to where it was before it jumped to a defined place see 7 Jumping to functions and 4 Moving to a symbol definition part Forward to Next Cursor Position Moves the caret back to where it was before Back to Last Cursor Position was executed Tag Jump b Debug If on Editor panel or Output panel there is file name or line column information on the line at which the caret exists this menu causes a jump to the relevant line column in the relevant file see 8 Jumping to a desired line tag jump Each item of the Debug menu and their functionality are as follows default Download Build amp Download Downloads a specified file to the debug tool currently selected in the active project If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However this item is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution Builds a project and executes a download to the debug tool currently selected in the active project after the build is complete If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However if a build fails no
289. e Events panel to display only timer related events Simulator Clear Coverage Information Clears all of the code coverage measurement results that the debug tool currently holds However this item is not displayed if the debug tool used does not support the coverage function Edit Disassemble Goes to edit mode to edit an instruction at the line where the caret is positioned see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly However this is disabled during program execution Edit Code Goes to edit mode to edit an instruction code at the line where the caret is positioned see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly However this is disabled during program execution Shows the following cascaded menu to set the contents displayed in the disassemble area Show Offset Displays the offset value of a label If no labels are defined at the address the offset value from the nearest label is displayed Show Symbol Displays an address value in the form symbol offset value default However if the address value has a symbol defined in it only the symbol is displayed Settings Scroll Range Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set a scroll range Mixed Display Selects mixed display mode that shows the correspondence between disassembled result and source text default Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel wit
290. e access width of the corresponding area When Memory type is an external area the access width can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Endian Displays the endians of the external area and the I O register area When Memory type is an external area the endian can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Caution Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type Verify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when the memory value is initialized from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification after download or when values are changed in the Watch panel Memory panel b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Figure 2 17 Access Memory While Running Category E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 Access by stopping execution Specify from the drop down list whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is
291. e accumulated Simulator When a timer start or end event is added deleted or edited the result of the next measurement will not be accumulated 1 Setting the timer start event and timer end event On the Editor panel Disassemble panel or Watch panel set the events at which you want a timer measurement to start and end a How to set a timer start event To set from the Editor panel Disassemble panel Move the caret to the line or address Note 1 at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Start Timer and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer start event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Move the caret to the variable at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Set Timer Start R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer start event is set for the variable at the caret position R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 157 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To set from the Watch panel Move the caret to the watch expression Note 3 Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Set Timer Start R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select A timer start event is set for the watch expr
292. e category name directly from the keyboard To remove a category Select a category you want to remove and then click the toolbar button However only blank categories can be removed To change the order in which I O registers are displayed Drag and drop an I O register name into any category That way the I O registers are classified by a category Also the order in which categories and I O register names are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a drag and drop operation 3 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 121 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal default Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII code Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of the value with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses 4 Changing the contents of I O registers The I O register values can be edit
293. e data flash 0 is displayed You cannot change the value of this property b Clock You can configure the clock in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 lt 1 gt Figure 2 9 Clock Category HOCO E Clock Main clock source HOCO Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Figure 2 10 Clock Category EXTAL E Clock Main clock source EXTAL Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Main clock source Select EXTAL frequency or internal HOCO as the main clock source EXTAL will be displayed for microcontrollers with no internal HOCO lt 2 gt Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier Specify EXTAL frequency by directly entering a number between 0 0001 and 99 9999 MHz The entered value will be truncated to 5 decimal places If the value is out of the specifiable range it will be rounded to 0 0001 when 0 or below or to 99 9999 when 100 or above This property is displayed only when you have selected EXTAL in the Main clock source property R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 17 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory Specify whether to allow a debugger to operate the clock while the internal flash memory is being rew
294. e drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes The trace time is displayed by an integral value No The trace time is displayed by a differential value Trace memory size frames Simulator Notes 1 Specify the size of memory that holds trace data by a number of trace frames Note 2 Default 64K How to change By selecting from the drop down list Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 64K 128K 256K 512K 1M 2M 3M If Start Tracing or Stop Tracing on the context menu is selected on the Editor panel Disassemble panel this property is automatically changed to Yes 2 The trade frame represents one unit of trace data One trace frame is used for a fetch write read etc respectively R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 237 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Timer E1 E20 This category displays detailed information on the timer function and changes timer settings Use 64bit counter Specify whether or not to use a 64 bit measurement counter E20 JTAG RX600 However if Yes is specified measurement is performed in only one section Series Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes One 64 bit measurement counter is used value No Two 32 bit measurement cou
295. e following features a b c d e Line assembly The displayed instruction code can be edited assembled in line For details on how to do it see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly Program execution at instruction level By stepping through a program while the focus exists on this panel it is possible to control program execution at the instruction level For details on how to do it see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps Setting various events By selecting Break Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings on the context menu it is possible to set various events at the address or line at which the caret currently exits When an event is set the corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area Also detailed information on the set event is reflected on the Events panel However events can only be set on a line that is displayed against a white background in the event area For details on how to set an event see the following sections 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Remark Breakpoints can also be set or cleared easily in the Event area See a Setting clearing a breakpoint Registering a watch expression
296. e fractions less than 100ms 500 is selected by default Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the Update display during the execution property from No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution c Register In this category make settings related to PC display in the Status bar during program execution Figure 2 51 Register Category Simulator amp Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 45 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt PC display during the execution This property specifies whether the PC value is displayed in the Status bar during program execution When you select No the status bar under execution will show Running Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Display update interval for PC ms This property is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the PC display during the execution property During program execution specify a PC display updating interval in the status bar in 100 ms units Enter an integer directly in the range 100 to 65500 with fractions below 100 ms rounded up By default 500 is specified Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the PC display during the execution property fr
297. e in the scope area The Local Variables panel shows local variable names and function names It also shows parameters to functions as local variables For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Local Variables panel is described Caution During program execution nothing is displayed on this panel The contents of each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running Figure 2 120 Displaying the Contents of Local Variables Local Variables Panel Local Variables Toolbar Notation He Encoding Scope area Value Type Byte Size Address Ox000016fc long 4 0x000016e0 Ta 7 int 4 0x000016e8 4 int 4 Rl REG 0 imt 4 0x000016dc l int 4 R6 REG Name area Value area Type Byte Size area Address area Following methods of operation are described here 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed 2 Changing the contents of local variables 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 123 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area are displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values
298. e is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 381 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Instruction Level tab APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The acquired trace data is searched at the instruction level Caution If while the Trace panel is displayed in the Source display mode an instruction level search is performed on this tab the subject data cannot be searched correctly To perform an instruction level search make sure the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode Figure A 56 Trace Search Dialog Box Instruction Level Tab Trace Search Search condition Fetch Address Mne
299. e operation depends on the settings of each property in the Execution Mode Simulator category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 105 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables This section describes how to display or change the contents of memory registers and variables 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents Use the Memory panel shown below to display memory contents or change values Choose Memory from the View menu and then Memory1 4 Up to four pieces of Memory panels can be opened at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Memory1 Memory2 Memory 3 and Memory 4 in the title bar For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Memory panel is described Figure 2 107 Displaying Memory Contents Memory Toolbars 3 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop 00000040 00000050 N00 00060 00000070 00000080 00000090 N00 000a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 j Address area Memory value area Character string area Display position specification area Remark Inthe Scroll Range Settings dialog box which opens by clicking on View gt gt button in the toolbar you can set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar on this panel This section des
300. e range 100 to 65500 with fractions below 100 ms rounded up By default 500 is specified Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the PC display during the execution property from No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 37 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Break You can configure the break function in this category lt 1 gt Figure 2 38 Break Category E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Specify from the following drop down list the type of preferential breakpoint to be used with a single click of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When setting a break point after the preferential break point type has been used up the other break point type will be automatically selected See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint preferentially Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint preferentially default e System You can configure the emulation system in this category For more information regarding the execution of a specified routine before the execution and after the break of a program see 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20
301. e same I O register are registered their displayed values may not always the same because their values are acquired with different timing 3 If hexadecimal equivalents are added the value in specified notation and its hexadecimal equivalent are read out separately Therefore the value in specified notation and its hexadecimal equivalent may not always agree because they are acquired with different timing This area has the following features a Realtime display update function By using the realtime display update function it is possible to display or change the value of a registered watch expression not only when the program is halted but also when it is under execution For details about the realtime display update function see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution b Changing the value of a watch expression To change the value of a watch expression select the value of the subject watch expression and click on it again Then enter a new value directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode When you ve finished editing the value of a watch expression press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area The value you ve changed is written into the target memory For details on how to change the value of a watch expression see 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions c Saving the values of watch expressions By choosing Save Watch Data As f
302. e timer event and then create a new one For details on timer event setting see 2 14 Measuring the Execution Time Figure A 60 Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement Dialog Box Toolbar FA Measurement item Execution cycle Execution only once No Measurement Setting This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to the timer event of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 392 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area In this area detailed information on the timer event selected in the Events panel is displayed by category in the list Also you can directly change its settings 2 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and properties selected in the detailed information display change area is displayed Toolbar Displays categories in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and rearranges only property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Measurement Setting You can display and modify the de
303. e timer related event see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 8 Event area Start timer Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executed see a How to set a timer start event Stop timer Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executed te 1 see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer Start R W Value Sets a timer start event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see a How to set a timer start event Set Timer lt N gt E1 E20 Specify a channelN te 2 in which a timer start event is set Set Timer End R W Value Sets a timer end event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to finish upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer lt N gt E1 E20 View Result of Timer Clear Coverage Information Simulator Specify
304. eSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 7 Clearing the trace memory To clear the content of the collected trace data click the toolbar button However this button is disabled while the trace function is in operation Remark Simulator If you ve selected Yes for the Clear trace memory before running property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab the trace memory is cleared each time the program is run 2 13 8 Searching for trace data To search for the collected trace data use the Trace Search dialog box that is opened by clicking the toolbar button ENM Note that the searching function is disabled during program execution In this dialog box perform the following operation Note that by selecting the appropriate tab in this dialog box you can choose to search for trace data at the instruction level or search at the source level However when you search for trace data at the instruction level be sure that the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode Also if you perform a search at the source level be sure that the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure 2 136 Searching for Trace Data Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search Tab selection area Source Level earch condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address Access Status Data Search range Number
305. eak event is set the icon of the watch expression changes shape An event mark for break events is displayed additionally below the icon of the watch expression If the event you set is a trace event there are no changes to the mark of the watch expression When an event is set detail information on the set event is reflected in the Events panel However events can be set only when the watch expression for which you re going to set an event is a global variable a static variable inside a function a static variable inside a file or an I O register For details on how to set an event see the sections listed below 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Jumping to a memory definition address Selecting Jump to Memory on the context menu opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret on it moved to the address where a selected watch expression is defined If the Memory panel Memory1 is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly However if multiple watch expressions are selected at the same time or an I O register or CPU register is selected this operation has no effect Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Watch panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Watch panel You can al
306. eam I O Category E Stream 0 Select stream 1 0 mode Simulator mode Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 1 0 address Res 0 a Select stream I O mode To use files for the same low level interface routines assembly language part as the emulator specify Emulator mode By default Simulator mode is specified b Use stream I O function This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property If you intend to perform standard I O or file I O select Yes default selection No c Stream I O address This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property If you have replaced the low level interface routines assembly language part with the sample code for the simulator enter 0 default Executing a download Choose Build amp Download from the Debug menu on the Main window Then when connected with the debug tool perform a build and a download see 2 5 1 Execute downloading Opening the Debug Console panel Open the Debug Console panel Executing the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs Performing data I O on Debug Console panel By executing the program perform data I O on the Debug Console panel This program reads 10 entries of data that have been entered from the keyboard onto the panel by the scanf function and then sorts the input data in ascending order It then
307. ean Windows 1251 Cyrillic Windows 1252 Western Europ This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu open the Open File dialog box by selecting Open with Encoding and then click the Open button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Available encodings Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list All code pages and encodings supported by the OS are displayed in alphabetical order Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed The default file encoding in the General Text Editor category of the Option dialog box is selected by default Function buttons Button Function OK Opens the selected file in the Open File dialog box using a selected file encoding Cancel Not open the selected file in the Open File dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 367 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 48 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Western European Windows
308. earch it is possible to choose whether the search is made at the instruction level or source level Figure A 55 Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search m Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address 2 4 Access Status Data Search range Number Function buttons Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the toolbar button on the Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Selecting a tab switches the level at which a search is performed This dialog box has the following tabs Instruction Level tab Source Level tab R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 380 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Search condition setting area Set specific conditions under which a search is performed For details about display contents and on how to set see the section in which the relevant tab is described Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a messag
309. ecified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified 4 Clicking the Save button Trace data is saved in the specified format to a specified file Figure 2 140 Trace Data Output Image When Saved Number Time Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data Number Time Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 154 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Measuring the Execution Time This section describes how to measure a program s execution time 2 14 1 Setting the timer measurement operation E1 E20 For timer measurements to be performed it is necessary to make the following settings related to timer measurements Make the settings in the Timer E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Note that properties in this category can only be changed while CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Figure 2 141 Timer Category RX600 Series E Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 Figure 2 142 Timer Category RX200 Series El Timer Operating frequency MH2z 25 0000 1 Use 64bit counter RX600 Series Specify whether you want the measurement counter to be used in 32 bits x 2 or in 64 bits x 1 When you select Yes a 64 bit measurement counter can be used in which case however measurements can be
310. ecimal values from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Download object Download symbol information This item is displayed only when the files to download are in load module format Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value Object information is downloaded Object information is not downloaded This item is displayed only when the files to download are in load module format Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified file Note 2 Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value Yes Downloads symbol information No Does not download symbol information Specify the PIC PID offset Specify whether to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID Position Independent Data areas of the load modules to download from those specified during the creation of load modules When Yes is selected PIC Offset and PID Offset will appear as sub items Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value Yes PIC PID offset is specifiedN te 3 No PIC PID offset is not specified PIC Offset Input the offset values from the address specified at the time of load module creation For instance if you enter 1000 here when the start a
311. eckbox is checked Reset Selected Item Colors Resets color information for the item selected in the Setting place area to restore it to its default Figure A 74 Edit Colors Dialog Box Edit Colors Basic colors ee ETE L E ERE eee ERE EE ee EEE Eee ee BEE Ee EH Custom colors it i i i oe op it i ie i oe op Define Custom Colors gt gt 2 Display example area Shows an example of how the colors and fonts specified in the Color setting area and the Font settings for text edi tor area will be displayed Although this example shows a character string AaBbCc by default any character string can be entered directly in the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Clicking the Font button will open the Font Dialog Box below in which you can select the font to be used by the text editor R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 425 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 75 Font Dialog Box Font Font style Size Microsoft Sans Serif Regular T Miriam Fixed Bold Miriam Transparent Bold Italic O MY Boli O Myriad Web Pro O Myriad Web Pro Condi EEEE Serif A 7S m T Miriam Italic 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 Effects C Strikeout Sample C Underline AaBbYyzz Script Westem 4 Buttons area Import Opens the Open Option Setting File dialog box to reflect the set cont
312. ected state that item is deleted No I O registers can be deleted Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed Hexadecimal Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal default Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal Unsigned decimal Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal Octal Displays the value of the selected item in octal Binary Displays the value of the selected item in binary ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Value Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses Reset Color R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 300 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Resets the highlighting for a selected I O register which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variables panel This panel displays the contents of local variables and changes their values see 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Cautions 1 During program execution nothing is displayed on this panel The contents of each area
313. ecting an execution history up to a halt The debug tool has a preinstalled function to collect an execution history of the program from when it starts running to when it stops Thanks to this when the program starts running collection of trace data begins automatically and it is finished at the same time the program stops For details on how to check the collected trace data see 2 13 6 Displaying an execution history Caution Simulator With string manipulation instructions and multiply and accumulate instructions only a history of the first and final accesses is collected Remark This function is actuated by an unconditional trace event one of the built in events that are set in the debug tool by default Note that this unconditional trace event and the trace event described later see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section and 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met are used exclusively of each other Therefore if the trace event is Enabled the unconditional trace event is automatically Disabled When no trace event has been set trace data is collected even if the checkbox for the unconditional trace event is deselected i e Disabled 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section By setting a trace event it is possible to collect only a history of execution in a given section as trace data during program execution process This trace event consists of a trace start event a
314. ed Depth Call stack 0 Call stack information 1 Call stack information R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 133 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Collecting an Execution History This section describes how to collect an execution history of the program Generally a program s execution history is referred to as a trace the term of which is used in the pages below If the program goes wild it is very difficult to find the cause of the problem from the memory contents or stack information after the program has run out of control However analysis of the content of collected trace data makes it possible explore a process of malfunction until the program starts running wild providing an effective means for discovering potential bugs in the program Cautions 1 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace functions and real time RAM monitor functions RRM functions can be used only on a mutually exclusive basis 2 E1 E20 When you use a Printf event an action event and it occurs the execution history up to that point is cleared and the onward execution history is recorded 2 13 1 Setting up a trace operation When the trace function begins trace data which has recorded in it an execution history of the currently executed program is collected in trace memory when program execution stops the trace function also automatically stops Before the trace function c
315. ed Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Seta break event access related to a variable I O register Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Break Option R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Opens the Property panel to set a break function 2tENESAS Page 285 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Settings Shows the following cascaded menu to set a trace related event Note that events can only be set on event settable lines see 1 Event area Start Tracing Sets a trace start
316. ed The target function 1 resides in an active project The focus is in the Editor panel A file te 2 with the symbol information is selected for Download files In case it is disconnected from the debug tool the above file is specified as the first file in Download files Notes 1 A jump to a static function cannot be made when the debug tool is disconnected 2 When the file is in the hex format setting for downloading the symbol information is required see 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files Caution When multiple statements are described in a line a jump to an illegal location may be made Remark The judgement of words will depend on the build tool being used 8 Jumping to a desired line tag jump If the information of a file name a line number and a column number exist in the line at the caret position you can open the file in another Editor panel and jump to the corresponding line and the corresponding column if the Editor panel is already open you can jump to the panel Select Tag Jump from the context menu after moving the caret to the line on the source text The tag jump is operated as follows Table 2 4 Operation of Tag Jump Example of Character String Operation C work src c Jumps to the top line of the file C work src c Tmp src c Jumps to the top line of the file Tmp src c C work src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from
317. ed In the Value area click the selected I O register value again to set it in the Edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then press the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory Cautions 1 This operation cannot be performed during program execution 2 The values of read only I O registers cannot be changed Remarks 1 If a number with fewer digits than the size of the I O register is entered the higher order digits will be padded with zeroes 2 Ifa number with more digits than the size of the I O register is entered the higher order digits will be masked 3 1 O register values can also be entered using ASCII characters When 0x41 is entered as the value of I O register CRC CRCDOR gt gt 0x41 is written to CRC CRCDOR When ASCII character A is entered as the value of I O register CRC CRCDOR gt gt 0x41 is written to CRC CRCDOR 5 Displaying and changing I O register contents during program execution Select an I O register that is the subject you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on Watch panel That way you can display or change the value of any I O register in real time even while the program is running not just when the program is halted For details about watch expressions see Section 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 6 Saving the displayed I
318. ed as if a trace event access related has been set for the selected variable or I O register and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management Access type Operation Read write Trace start event Choose Record Start R W Value from Trace Settings and then hit the Enter key Trace end event Choose Record End R W Value from Trace Settings and then hit the Enter key If a value is specified in the text box of the menu at this time collection of trace data is started finished only when the specified value is used for the reading or writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading or writing the selected variable by any value will start finish the collection of trace data Cautions 1 Only the variables in current scope are selectable 2 No trace event can be set for a variable or I O register on a line whose background color in the event area is grayed indicating that the line cannot be converted into a corresponding address To set this trace event select a variable or I O register on a line whose background color in the event area is white 3 The types of access that can be set from the source text or disassembled text are only a read write To change the access type to a read or write after setting trace start and end events edit them in a dialog box that opens from the Events panel see 4 Editing trace start and trace end events To set events for registered watch exp
319. ed content Note1 Hardware Break Display lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt Generation condition form 1 Execution related Display Before Execution main c 39 0x100 example Before Execution 0x300 Execution main c 39 0x300 Simulator Display lt Generation condition gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt form 2 Display Before Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 example Before Execution 0x300 Hardware Break Display lt Generation condition gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Address range gt Generation condition form 1 lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Access related Display Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 example Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 0x7 Read Write sub2 c variable3 0x300 0x303 0x8 Display lt Generation condition gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt form 2 lt Address range gt lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Display Read main c func1l variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 example Display lt Generation condition gt lt Variable name gt lt Address range gt lt Comparison form 3 condition gt lt Comparison value gt Display Write variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 example Software Break Display lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt E1 E20 form1 Display Before Execution main c 40 0x102 example
320. ed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Enter a value directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory At this time CubeSuite checks the value to see if it fits to type If inappropriate the editing you ve done is ignored Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution Remarks 1 If the numeral entered for a variable is smaller than the size of the variable its high order digits are padded with zeroes 2 Ifthe numeral entered for a variable is larger than the size of the variable its high order digits are masked 3 For character arrays char type or unsigned char type if ASCII is selected for the display form it is possible to use character strings ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP or Unicode UTF 8 UTF 16 to enter values R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 124 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Local variables can also be entered using ASCII characters When using ASCII characters to enter values Enter the letter A in the Value area for the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using numerals to enter values Enter the numeral 0x41 in the Value area for the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using chara
321. ed long long int signed long int value unsigned short unsigned short int unsigned unsigned Hexadecimal value added in following unsigned int unsigned long unsigned long int decimal value float float Complex float _Imaginary Float value when 4 bytes in size Note double long double double Complex long double Double value when 8 bytes in size _Complex double Imaginary long double _ Imaginary Note Pointer to char singed char unsigned char String Encode Shift_JIS Pointer to other than char singed char unsigned char Hexadecimal Array of type char signed char unsigned char String Encode Shift_JIS bit boolean _boolean Hexadecimal value added in following unsigned decimal value Enumeration type Hexadecimal value added in following enumerated constant Label immediate address EQU symbol Hexadecimal value added in following signed decimal value Bit symbol Hexadecimal value added in following unsigned decimal value Other Hexadecimal Note The values of floating and complex types are rounded to an approximate value nearest whole value before being displayed The meaning of marks displayed as values of watch expressions and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Exa
322. edit or while the caret is moved to the subject instruction code select Edit Code from the context menu and the subject you re going to edit is placed into the edit mode b Editing instruction code Edit the character string of instruction code directly from the keyboard c Writing into memory Press the Enter key when you ve finished editing and instruction code is written into memory However if this alteration results in an invalid instruction the character string you ve edited is displayed in red color and not written into memory When instruction code is written into memory the disassembled result is updated at the same time R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 81 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function The PIC PID function enables the code and data in the ROM to be reallocated to desired addresses without re linkage even when the allocation addresses have been determined through previously completed linkage To use the PIC PID function a master program and an application program must be prepared In the PIC PID function a program whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID is called an application and the program necessary to execute an application is called the master This section describes debugging of an application program load module whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID and reallocated to different addr
323. el dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Close file name Closes the currently editing Editor panel When the contents of the panel have not been saved a confirmation message is shown Save file name Overwrites the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is read only the same operation is applied as the selection in Save file name As Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Save file name As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode File name Save Opens the Save Settings dialog box to change the encoding and newline code of the file being Settings opened in the currently editing Editor panel Print Opens the Windows dialog box for printing the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window to preview the file contents to be printed Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Editor panel other items are all invalid Cancels the previous operation and restores the characters and the caret position up to 100 times Note that this item is disabled when this panel is
324. emble1 with the caret on it moved to the disassembled result corresponding to the address where a selected eventNotet is set Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel with the caret on it moved to the source line corresponding to the address where a selected eventNotet set Edit Condition Opens the detailed settings dialog box corresponding to a selected eventNote2 If a Trace event or combination break is selected the Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 is opened If a Printf event is selected the Action Events dialog box is opened Edit Comment Places a comment on a selected event into editing mode If a comment for the event already exists the whole of its character string is selected Notes 1 This does not include trace events timer measurement events and built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events 2 This includes the following events Hardware break execution related events access related events and timer measurement events E1 E20 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 345 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This facility displays the messages output by various components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including the debug tool as well as display the results of global searches conducted using the Find and Replace dialog box and the output results by Printf events see
325. ems are disabled during program execution Save IOR Data Saves the content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see b Saving of I O register values If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save IOR Data As would have been selected is performed Save IOR Data As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the content of this panel to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see b Saving of I O register values Edit menu IOR Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the IOR panel is as follows All other items are disabled Cuts a selected range of character string and moves it to the clipboard No I O registers and categories can be cut Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If an I O register or category is in selected state that item is copied Note that the copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Pastes the content of the clipboard to the caret position when text is in editing mode I O registers and categories cannot be pasted Delete Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in selected state that item is deleted No I O registers can be deleted Select All Selects all character strings whose text is in edit mode If the text is in other than edit mode all I O registers and categories are placed in se
326. end on how the Timer E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab is set as shown below Microcontroller Use 64bit counter property Function RX600 Series Specifiable from 2 sections 32 bit Set Timer 1 and Set Timer 2 Only 1 section 64 bit Set Timer 1 is specifiable RX200 Series Only 1 section 24 bit Set Timer 1 is specifiable Simulator Only one section is available and desired timer channels cannot be specified the Set Timer menu is not displayed 3 This watch expression can only be a global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file and an IO register Cautions 1 E1 E20 Timer measurement is possible even if either a timer start or timer end event is set When only a timer start event is set measurement ends as soon as the program stops running When only a timer end event is set measurement starts as soon as the program starts running Simulator Timer measurement works only when both timer start and end events are specified If only one of the start and end events is specified execution time cannot be measured R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 158 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Simulator Only a single event can be specified for each of timer start and end events Multiple events cannot be specified in combination Figure 2 146 Example of Setting a Timer Start
327. entered pass count The specifiable value for the pass count differs with each debug tool as follows E1 E20 1 to 256 Simulator 1 to 16 383 Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including access related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series No values other than 1 can be specified for the pass count 2 Editing access related events The address condition and data condition for access related events can be edited For details on how to edit the pass count see a Editing the pass count or the number of times passed To edit access related events use the Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box that is displayed by performing the following operation on the Events panel Move the caret to an access related event in a trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Point Trace Move the caret to an access related event in a point trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Combination Break Move the caret to an access related event in a combination break you want to edit and then E1 E20 select Edit Condition from the context menu Timer Result Move the caret to an access related event in a timer result you want to edit and then select Edit
328. ents that were saved in a file to this category Export egory to a file Opens the Save Option Setting File dialog box to save the set contents of this cat Initialize Settings Function buttons Restores specifications for all of the currently displayed items to their default Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all of the set items in this dialog box to their default state For the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted Applies changes and closes this dialog box Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Applies changes without closing this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2012 Page 426 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category In this category you can configure settings related to build and debug Figure A 76 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category A General m AR ET Startup and Exit General Build Debug E Display 1 G External Text Editor gt Enable Rapid Build Font and Color G Extemal Tools If Tepid build is ea an build is zered mien e Gee saurer file ba i saved As a result the build is executed in parallel with editing When rapi 2 EEE build is selected we recommend saving a file with Ctrl S after the file edit is e lal completed l Te
329. er for display in tree form By default there are no categories Cautions 1 No other categories can be created within a category 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one Watch panel If an attempt is made to create beyond the upper limit a message is displayed a To create a new category Move the caret to the position at which you want to create and then click the toolbar button gt and enter a new category name directly from the keyboard b To edit a category name Select a category name you want to edit and then click on it again and edit the category name directly from the keyboard c To remove a category Select a category you want to remove and then click the toolbar button P d To change the order in which watch expressions are displayed Drag and drop a registered watch expression directly onto the category you ve created That way watch expressions are classified by a category Also the order in which categories and watch expressions are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a drag and drop operation Remark If categories or watch expressions in a watch panel are drag and dropped into another Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 the categories or watch expressions are copied into the target Watch panel Editing the registered watch expressions The watch expressions you ve registered can be edited Double click on a watch expression you want to edit and the subject watch expression will
330. er file Assemble file src Assembler source file Map file map Ibp Map file Hex file hex Hex file Assemble list file Ist Assemble list file S record file mot S record file Text file txt Function buttons Text format Button Function When you select Open File from the File menu The selected file will open When you select Open with Encoding from the File menu Encoding dialog box will open Cancel This dialog box will close R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 stENESAS Page 439 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box Saves the file being edited under a new name or saves the content of any panel in a file with a specified name Figure A 82 Save As Dialog Box gt Save in sample EG My Recent Documents Desktop 2 lt a Ly My Documents 99 My Computer i wt E 3 L My Network File name Save Function buttons a Save as type C source file c Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open While focus is present on Editor panel chose Save File Name As from the File menu While focus is present on CPU Register panel choose Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu While focus is present on W
331. esponding column if the target file is already opened in the Editor panel you can jump to the panel See Table 2 4 Operation of Tag Jump for details on the operation of the tag jump Current PC line display When the current PC position PC register value corresponds to the source text lines those lines are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened Lines with breakpoints display Lines where the breakpoints are set are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened f Code coverage measurement result display Simulator When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage measurement This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened g Pop up display of variables When hoveri
332. ess break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event Sets a read write access break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 318 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Output This item is usable when the selected watch expression is a global variable a static variable inside a function a static variable inside a file or an I O register multiple selection not accepted Shows the following cascaded menu to set trace related events see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section and 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met After an event is set a watch expression that is the subject of operation is marked with an Event mark at the beginning Record Reading Value Sets a point trace event that when a selected watch expression is accessed for read records the accessed value in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Writing Value Sets a point trace event that when a selected watch expression is accessed for write records the accessed value in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record R W Value Sets a point trace event that when a selected watch expression is accessed for read wri
333. ess the Enter key when you ve finished editing and the altered instruction is automatically line assembled and the resulting code is written into memory However if this alteration results in an invalid instruction the character string you ve edited is displayed in red color and not written into memory Note that if space is created in memory by overwriting the disassembled result being displayed on panel with another instruction bytes are automatically compensated for with nop instructions as in the example shown below Examples 1 When the ADD instruction on third line 6 byte instruction is overwritten with a BCLR instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 5020 R2 UB RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 700 b98a322a 2A328AB9H RO R15 5327 R2 R7 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 80 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS After editing 5020 R2 UB RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 22a45b2 2 0B245H R2 03 03 2 When an MOV W instruction on second line 2 byte instruction is overwritten with a BCLR instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 5020 R2 UB RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 700fb 98a322a 2A328AB9H RO R15 5327 R2 R7 After editing 5020 R2 UB RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 22a45b2 2 0B245H R2 03 03 03 03 2 Editing instruction code To edit instruction code follow the procedure described below a Switching to the edit mode Double click instruction code you want to
334. esses PIC When the pic option is specified for compilation the PIC function is enabled and the code in the code area P section becomes PIC The PIC always uses PC relative mode to acquire branch destination addresses or function addresses so it can be reallocated to any desired addresses even after linkage PID When the pid option is specified for compilation the PID function is enabled and the data in ROM data areas C C_2 C_1 W W_2 W_1 and L sections becomes PID A program executes relative access to the PID by using the register PID register that indicates the start address of the PID The user can move the PID to any desired addresses by modifying the PID register value even after linkage Remarks 1 For details on the PIC PID function see Chapter 7 Startup in CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Coding 2 For setting of the PIC PID function by the build tool see Chapter 2 Functions in CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Build To start debugging after changing the allocation of a load module whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID take the following steps 1 Add a download file Add the application load module file as a download file for the master see 2 7 1 Changing the allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function 2 Set conditions for downloading of the load module file Specify two offset values for the applicati
335. ession on the Watch panel b How to set a timer end event To set from the Editor panel Disassemble panel Note 1 Move the caret to the line or address at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then select Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Stop Timer and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer end event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Move the caret to the variable at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then select Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Set Timer End R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer end event is set for the variable at the caret position To set from the Watch panel Move the caret to the watch expression Note 3 select Timer Settings from the context menu and from it choose Set Timer End R W Value and then Set x Note 2 at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then Timer A timer end event is set for the watch expression on the Watch panel Notes 1 Timer start event timer end event cannot be set to lines with no address indication 2 E1 E20 The asterisk in the menu Set Timer denotes a channel number as a number for a timer measurement section To set timer start and end events in one section be sure to select the same channel number Note that the selectable channel numbers vary with each microcontroller used and dep
336. etting file to import to the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Figure A 84 Open Option Setting File Dialog Box Open Option Setting File Look in sample My Recent Documents File name Font and Color mtpu J My Network I Function buttons Files of type Option Setting File mtpu The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box click the Import button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder which contains the option setting file you want to open When you first open this dialog box the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of an option setting file you want to open R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 444 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following type of the file file type is shown Option Setting File mtpu Option setting file Function buttons Open Imports the specified file to the General Font and Color cate
337. ettings tab R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 135 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 131 Trace Category E20 E Trace Usage of trace function Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch External trace output CPU execution Trace memory size MByte 1 Output timestamp Yes Trace clock count source MHz a Usage of trace function Part of the trace functions and real time RAM monitor functions RRM functions can be used only ona mutually exclusive basis Therefore in this property specify which function you want to be used preferentially Here select Trace from the drop down list below Uses the trace function preferentially default The real time RAM monitor function cannot be used Real time RAM Uses the real time RAM monitor function RRM preferentially Note 1 monitor Trace function Use subject to limitations Note Also trace related events are disabled Notes 1 E20 Serial The real time RAM monitor function is not supported Therefore do not specify Real time RAM monitor for this property value 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace function cannot be used Following limitations apply Operation after trace memory is full Stop trace and Stop cannot be used Only Overwrite trace memory and continue execution can be used Trace data type Branch and
338. etween the program break and R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 155 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS the measurement break Note that this result is used only for a reference purpose as it contains clock error of the measurement clock source 2 The execution time displayed in the Status bar and the Events panel is the time measured while the program is being executed The execution time will be incorrect when Step In Step Over or Return Out is performed E1 E20 Values smaller than 100 us are discarded Remark This function is actuated by a Run Break timer event which is one of the built in events set in the debug tool by default The Run Break timer event is always Enabled settings not changeable 1 Checking the status bar for confirmation When a program has stopped running the measurement result is displayed in the status bar on the Main window While no measurements are made this status shows Not measured Figure 2 143 Example of a Run Break Timer Event Measurement Result Status Bar oxfffFe6dc G RX E20 ITAG Measurement result displayed in this area m BREAK 2 Checking the Events panel for confirmation When a program has stopped running the measurement result is displayed as a Run Break timer event on the Events panel that is opened by selecting Event from the View menu Figure 2 144 Example of a Run Break Timer Event Measurement Result Events Panel E1
339. event that causes collection of trace data indicating a program execution history to start when an instruction at the address where the caret exists is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator The setting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a trace end event that causes collection of trace data indicating a program execution history to end when an instruction at the address where the caret exists is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator The setting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record Reading Value Sets a point trace event that when the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register is accessed for read causes the accessed value to be recorded in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Writing Value Sets a point trace event that when the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable inside a function or static variable inside a file or an I O register is accessed for write causes the accessed value to be recorded in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred
340. ever this is disabled during program execution Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal default Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Scrolls the Editor panel in synchronism with a selected line Scrolls the Disassemble panel in synchronism with a selected line Changes the display mode to a Mixed display mode default However this is disabled during program execution Changes the display mode to a Disassemble display mode However this is disabled during program execution Changes the display mode to a Source display mode However this is disabled during program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 331 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Menu Trace Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the Trace panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Trace Data Saves the content of trace data to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see e Saving of trace data If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Trace Data As would have been selected is performed Save Trace Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box in order to save the content of trace
341. everal different status at the same time each status is shown separated by amp However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 208 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Tool Displayed Content CPU Status E1 JTAG Reset Reset state E20 JTAG Pow Off Target not supplied with power Sleep Now in sleep mode Standby Now in standby mode Remark Nothing is displayed here when the CPU is in status other than those listed above e Current PC position Displays a hexadecimal value representing the current PC position Clicking this area moves the caret to the current PC position on the Editor panel Note that the content displayed during program execution changes according to settings in the Register category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab as follows Program state State of PC display during the Displayed content execution property While halted Current PC position During execution Current PC position at update intervals set in Display update interval for PC ms property Running Placing the cursor over this area will pop up the following information Current PC 0x current PC value source name number of linesNote However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Note If this information cannot be obtained it is substit
342. ew Toolbar j D E SELER void main void Start user code Do not edit comment ge TMPO_Start TMP1 Start an 1 4 AD Start while 10 funci ans func2 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Print Preview from the File menu Description of each area 1 Preview area This window displays a form showing a preview of how and what is printed Toolbar Opens the Print dialog box provided by Windows to print the current Editor panel as shown by the print preview form Copies the selection into the clipboard Increases the size of the content Decreases the size of the content Displays the preview at 100 percent zoom default Fits the preview to the width of this window Displays the whole page a 00 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 378 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays facing pages Context menu Increase Zoom Increases the size of the content Decrease Zoom Decreases the size of the content R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 379 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search dialog box This dialog box searches for trace data see Section 2 13 8 Searching for trace data Before performing a s
343. execution are collected as trace data Branch Data Source destination address information of branching during program execution as well as data accessNote 1 information on access events that occurred are collected as trace data Data accessNote 2 Data information on access events that occurred during program execution are collected as trace data Notes 1 E1 Serial RX200 Series Trace data for Branch Data access cannot be collected Therefore this item is not displayed in the drop down list 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series To collect trace data for Data access it is necessary to set address conditions in a point trace For details about the point trace see 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met d Output timestamp This property specifies whether timestamp information is added to the trace data to be collected Specify Yes when you want timestamp to be output Caution E1 Serial RX200 Series If Branch is specified in the Trace data type property timestamp cannot be output If you want it to be output specify Data access e Trace clock count source MHz Enter a count source for the timestamp in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 Note that if this property is blank the set value of the Operating frequency MHz in the Timer category is used in place of the count source 2 For E20 Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool S
344. ff ffSLCShb 42 a i 0 43 isnuminput FALSE ffffef90 6606 MOV L Code on this line executed at 0 Not 45 ret scanf c tmp ffffSf92 7eab mmm xoCutcd ffff8f94 7eaa PUSH L R10 ffffSf96 osfe0300 BSR A _scant fLffstfIa 6280 ADD 8H RO 46 if ret EOF ffffSf9c Seater CMP 01H R1 ffLffsfort 2074 BEQ B _tmain B6H if tmp 0 LF jf b Display of code coverage rates for each function Check the Code Coverage item in the Function List panel of the analysis tool for the code coverage rates of each function i e function coverage rates For details on the code coverage ratio of functions see the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Analysis 2 Data coverage rates Check the Data Coverage item in the Variable List panel of the analysis tool for the data coverage rates of each variable For details on the data coverage ratio of variables see the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Analysis R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 167 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Set an Action into Programs This section describes how to set the specified action into the program 2 16 1 Insert printf Setting the Printf event as one of action events allows you to output the value of the specified variable expression to the Output panel This can be done by executing a printf command after
345. ff 8 gap 5 33 f while gap gt 0 ji Break Settings LY hr Set Hardware Break 34 f for k 0 k lt gap k Trace Settings gt ll Set Software Break 35o os gor aerga tc 36 for 3 i 1 Timer Settings gt Set Combination Break 37 f ne Set Read Combination Break to 38 39 t A Set Write Combination Break to Cox A i Gol Set R W Combination Break to 4 a j 42 N Break Option 43 elg 44 raak 45 From the context menu above the variable g_IntBuf 46 47 select Break Settings gt gt Set Write Combination 29 E86e0 gap gap 2 49 Break to Enter a value in the text box in the menu 50 g_CharBuf char g IntBut amp Ox00FF ot then press the Enter key Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the variable g_IntBuf R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 99 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 101 Example of a Break Event Access related in the Events Panel E1 E20 Events Name Detail Comment Unconditional Trace 9 Run Break Timer Not measured M 8 Combination Break OR Detail Write q_IntBuf 0x1 42c 0x1 42f Oxb j Figure 2 102 Example of Setting a Break Event Access related on a Variable in the Source Text Simulator ZZ J 23 int g_IntBuf Set PC to Here 24 char g_CharBuf z 25 Jj 4 Jump to Function as eer 26 amp Tag
346. file property Description of each area 1 Look in area Selects the folder in which a file to download is stored from the drop down list 2 File list area Display the list of files that match the conditions specified in Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specifies the file name to be registered R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 430 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Selects the file type to be registered from the following drop down list USD files usd User system definition file format default All files All file formats Function buttons Open Adds the specified file to the File property in the External flash definition file property Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 431 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Log File dialog box This dialog box selects a log file in which to save the displayed content of the Debug Console panel Figure A 78 Open Log File Dialog Box Open Log File Save in sample N DefaultBuild WY My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents pH My Computer j My Network Save as type Log file log Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function butt
347. file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Go To Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Forward to Next Cursor Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cursor Position Position Back to Last Cursor Goes back to the position before operating Jump to Function Position Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 7 Jumping to functions Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position see c Tag jump R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 262 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Advanced CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operat
348. flash definition file the definition file name start and end addresses and whether to erase the external flash ROM before downloading are displayed for each index 1 to 4 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 225 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Peripheral Function Simulation Simulator Displays detailed information on peripheral function simulation or changes settings made in it Peripheral function Displays usable peripheral function simulation modules allowing to specify whether or not to use simulation module Default Main item lt Number of usable peripheral function simulation modules gt Sub items lt Peripheral function simulation module name gt Not use Main item Not changeable Sub items Peripheral function simulation module names not changeable Whether or not to use a peripheral function simulation module is specified by selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Use Peripheral function simulation module is used value Not Peripheral function simulation module is not used Use Display Main item content Number of usable peripheral function simulation modules Sub items Peripheral function simulation module name Usage status of peripheral function simulation module Peripheral clock rate Specify the ratio of peripheral clock to internal clock ho
349. for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Watch Data As would have been selected is performed Save Watch Data As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the content of this panel to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see c Saving the values of watch expressions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 317 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit Menu Watch Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Watch panel is as follows All other items are disabled Cuts a selected range of character string and copies it to the clipboard If a watch expression or category is in selected state the item is cut However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If a watch expression or category is in selected state the item is copied However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Inserts the content of the clipboard into the caret position when text is in edit mode If when text is in other than edit mode a watch expression is copied to the clipboard the copied watch expression is registered at the caret position Delete Deletes a selected range of character string If a watch expression or category is in selected state the item is deleted However this is disabled when an ex
350. g file func prog file Static functions prog func prog Global Global functions file func Current file Static functions func Current Current AllNote 2 Notes 1 If a load module name or file name contains a space or one of the following symbols enclose the name in double quotes Example c folder prog abs file c func 46 LL amp 4 S45275b lt gt 2 A search is made for static functions and global functions from the scope of the current PC value in that order Static functions out of scope are not searched for To specify a function defined in a name space do not write scope Example Scope func Also if functions with the same name exist write the type of parameter expressly Example func int int Table A 7 Handling of a C Variable when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Scope specification Load module Source file Function Function Subject to be searched nameNote 1 nameNote 1 nameNote 2 nameNote 2 Ee een prog Static variables inside a static functionN t 2 3 prog file var prog Static variables inside a file prog var prog Global Global Global variables file func var Current file func Static variables inside a static functionN 2 3 file var Current Global Static variables inside a file A Note 4 Current Current Current Notes 1 If a load module name or file name contains a space or one of the following symbols enclose the name in
351. g the content in it Toolbar 4 Figure A 30 IOR Panel 1 4 AQ ADCSR ADIE ADCSR ADST ADCSR CH ADCR ADCR TRGS Value Type Byte Size 0x0000 IOR Z 0x00088040 E 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x00 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x00 0x0 IOR 2 IOR 2 IOR 2 IOR 1 TOR lbits IOR lbits IOR 4bits IOR 1 IOR 3Sbits Address A 0x00088042 0x00088044 0x00088046 0x00088050 0x00088050 6 0x00088050 5 0x00088050 0 0x00088051 0x00088051 5 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu IOR Panel Only Items Edit menu IOR Panel Only Items Context Menu How to open Choose IOR from the View menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 294 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search area This area performs a search of I O register names Specify the character string to be searched not case sensitive Enter a character string directly from the keyboard specifiable in up to 512 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches for I O register names that include the character string specified in the text box in upward direction with the search result placed in selected state Searches for I O register names that include the character str
352. gory of the Option dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 445 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to save the set contents of the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box to an option setting file Figure A 85 Save Option Setting File Dialog Box Save Option Setting File Look in sample My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 58 My Computer File name Font and Co lor mtpu My Network L Function buttons Files of type Option Setting File mtpu This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box click the Export button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder in which you want to save the option setting file When you first open this dialog box the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Save in and Save as type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of an option setting file under which you want to save R20UT21
353. gram execution Source View Changes the display mode to a Source display mode However this is disabled during program execution Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify notation numerical representation However this is disabled during program execution Hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal default Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Octal Displays values on this panel in octal Binary Displays values on this panel in binary R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 332 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Connecting Shows the following cascaded menu to link the display with other panels see c other panels Linkage with Connect Source Window Scrolls the Editor panel in synchronism with a selected line Connect Disassemble Window Scrolls the Disassemble panel in synchronism with a selected line Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret on it moved to the fetch address on a selected line Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel with the caret on it moved to the source line corresponding on a selected line Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel with the caret on it moved to the memory value corresponding to the line where the caret is positioned R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 333 of
354. gure 2 55 Status Bar Indicating the Successful Connection to the Debug Tool DISCONNECT m BREAK GGRX E1 JTAG Not measured The information of the debug tool appears at this area Remark When the button on the Debug toolbar is clicked it will download the specified file after connecting to the debug tool see 2 5 1 Execute downloading When the button on this toolbar is clicked it will build the project connect to the debug tool and then download the specified file 1 Display the Version Information E1 E20 After successful connection to the debug tool the version information such as the emulator firmware version and the emulator information such as supplied voltage are displayed on the Output panel Figure 2 56 Output Panel after Connection E1 Version Information FFWEZORX600 d11 BfwEZ0rx600 sl LEVELO LEVEL communi dll FPGA Communication FPGA Emulator Information Emulator Board Revision User VCC EOF R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 49 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 57 Output Panel after Connection E20 Version Information FFWEZORX600 d11 X XX XX XXX BfwEZ0rx600 sl LEVELO X XX XX XXX LEVEL1 X XX XX XXX conmuni dll X XX XX XXX FPGA xx Communication FPGA xx Trace Control FPGA XXa Emulator Information Emulator Board Revision E20 Rev XX4 User VCC 3 27 V USE Bus Power 4 81 V User I F Cable 38 pin cable
355. h Process A script file specified by Python script path is executed After CPU reset under Specify a process to be executed immediately after the CPU is reset during a break breaking Default After CPU reset under breaking 0 The value in denotes a currently specified number of processes How to By specifying in the Text Edit dialog box change Format One of the following I O register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of an I O register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value CPU register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of the CPU register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value Source single byte space Python script path Process A script file specified by Python script path is executed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 246 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Before running Specify a process to be executed immediately before the program is started to run Default Before running 0 The value in denotes a currently specified number of processes How to By specifying in the Text Edit dialog box change Format One of the following O register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of an I O register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value CPU register name single byte space numeric val
356. h expression consists of 8 byte data Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of the value with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses However this information is not added when values are displayed in hexadecimal 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions The values of watch expressions can be edited Double click the value of the watch expression in the Value area that you want to edit and the value you ve clicked is placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory However only the watch expressions that correspond one for one to C variables CPU registers I O registers or assembler symbols can have their values changed Nor can the values of read only I O registers be changed This operation can be taken place while the program is in execution See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on how to operate it Remarks 1 If the numeral entered for a variable is smaller than the size of the variable its high order digits are padded with zeroes If the numeral entered for a variable is larger than the size of the variable its high order digits are masked For character arrays char type or unsigned char type if ASCII is selected for the display f
357. h expressions in order 3 Editing the registered watch expressions 4 Removing watch expressions 5 Changing the form in which values are displayed 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions 7 Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution 8 Exporting importing watch expressions 9 Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions 1 Registering watch expressions There are following three methods to register watch expressions By default no watch expressions are registered Cautions 1 Up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one Watch panel If an attempt is made to register beyond the upper limit a message is displayed 2 Because of optimization by a compiler for blocks where variables or the subject to be operated on are not in use there may be no variable data in the stack and registers In this case those unused variables even when registered as watch expressions will have their displayed values marked with Remarks 1 The respective watch expressions registered in each Watch panel Watch1 through Watch4 are managed individually and saved as user information for the project 2 Plural watch expressions with the same name can be registered a To register from other panels Watch expressions can be registered from other panels of CubeSuitet In one of other panels select the subject you want to register as a watch expression and drag and drop it directly onto any W
358. h the caret on it moved to a source line corresponding to the address at the caret position Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory 1 with the caret on it moved to a memory value corresponding to the address at the caret position Note The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 287 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Event area E1 E20 Hardware Break First Defines the type of break that can be set by clicking the mouse once to be a hardware breakpoint reflected in the setting of the Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used in the Break E1 E20 category on the Property panel Software Break First Defines the type of break that can be set by clicking the mouse once to be a software breakpoint reflected in the setting of the Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used in the Break E1 E20 category on the Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 288 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CPU Register panel This panel displays the contents of the CPU registers general purpose and control registers and change register values see 2 11 2 Displaying and changing the CPU registers Note that this panel can be
359. he Ctrl key mouse wheel combination R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 67 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 71 Displaying the Source File Editor Panel f main c 88 void main void zx B9 gt 90 Start user code Do not edit cor 91 I 92 ffffe d1 A RB 93 EEff8 d4 TMP1_Start 94 Efff86d7 D 96 97 EEff86e0 funci 98 Efff86e3 func2 99 100 End user code Do not edit comme 101 3 102 E v g gt Main area Characters area Event area Address area Coverage area Line number area This section describes the following 1 Changing the display mode 2 Setting the columns to display 3 Displaying multiple source files in a single panel 4 Displaying variables 5 Searching for characters 6 Moving to a specified line 7 Jumping to functions 8 Jumping to a desired line tag jump 1 Changing the display mode When the debug tool is connected and the downloaded source file is opened the instruction code label and disassembled text can be displayed combined with the corresponding source code by clicking the button toggle on the toolbar mixed display mode Figure 2 72 Editor Panel Normal Display Mode void main void f fff8783 9 ffff8788 ffffs792 W R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 68 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Cu
360. he I O register names in each category are sorted in the same way This area has the following features a Edit the tree The tree form can be edited by classifying each I O register by any category folder To create a new category move the caret to the I O register name for which a category is to be created and click the gt button in the toolbar or select Create Category from the context menu Then enter any category name specifiable in up to 1 024 characters To remove a category select the category to be removed and click the button in the toolbar or select Remove from the context menu Note however that only blank categories can be removed Also to edit a category name select the category name to edit and follow one of the following procedures Click the category name again and edit it directly from the keyboard R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 295 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b c Choose Change Name from the Edit menu and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard Press the F2 key and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard When a category is created drag and drop I O register names directly into the category That way I O register names can be displayed in tree form classified by category Similarly the order in which categories or I O register names are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a
361. he equivalent enclosed in parentheses 2 Changing the CPU register contents The CPU register values can be edited Double click the subject CPU register value in the Value area and the selected value will be placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then press the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution 3 Displaying and changing the CPU register contents during program execution Select a CPU register that is the subject you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on Watch panel That way you can display or change the value of any CPU register in real time even while the program is running not just when the program is halted For details about watch expressions see Section 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 4 Saving the displayed CPU register contents By choosing Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of CPU registers in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 119 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 117 CPU Register Value Output Image When Save
362. he event is set Function buttons 4 i This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to the interrupt event of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 409 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an interrupt event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays a category in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and sorts only the property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Address Address Displays the address at which an interrupt event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Not changeable 2 Pass Count Pass count Specifies a pass count in decimal The relevant event
363. he item is deleted However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Cuts a selected range of character string and moves it to the clipboard If a watch expression or category is in a selected state the item is cut However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If a watch expression or category is in a selected state the item is copied Inserts the content of the clipboard into the caret position when text is in edit mode If when text is in other than edit mode a watch expression is copied to the clipboard the copied watch expression is registered at the caret position However this is disabled when an expanded item of a watch expression is selected Rename Renames the selected watch expression category Import Watch Expression Opens the Open Watch Expression Data File dialog box to import watch expressions see 8 Exporting importing watch expressions Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify a display form AutoSelect Displays the value of a selected watch expression in per variable predetermined notation default See Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default Hexadecimal Displays a selected item in hexadecimal Signed Decimal Displays a selected item in signed decimal Uns
364. he on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops 6 E Trace Usage o ace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch Output timestamp Yes Trace clock count source MHz 7 E Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz trace functior Timer Connect Settings R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 227 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 11 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 Serial RX200 Series Property Sl AX E1 Serial Property 1 Memory Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory 2 B Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interval ms 500 3 E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 4 gt Break _Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts
365. he register The operating mode that can be specified depends on the type of the microcontroller lt 3 gt Endian Display the project endian Acquires endian information from the project and displays its value Can be selected only when the debug tool is disconnected External Flash In this category you can configure external flash The settings in this category are required when downloading to an external flash memory For more details regarding property setting see 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you configure the basic settings of the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Register d Break e System f Trace g Timer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 21 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuitet V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 16 E Memory E Memory mappings 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Verify on writing to memory lt 1 gt Memory mappings Memory Category 28 On chip RAM area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 1 0 registers area 1
366. he specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 5 gt Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Specify whether to execute a specified routine after the user program break Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 6 gt Routine to run immediately after execution stops Specify the address to be executed immediately after the user program break This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution f Trace You can configure the trace function in this category Figure 2 40 Trace Category E20 Serial RX600 Series E Trace Usage of trace function Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch External trace output CPU execution Trace memory size MByte 1 Output timestamp Yes Trace clock count source MHz lt 1 gt Usage of trace function Specify whether to use it as real time RAM monitor function RRM function utilizing the trace function If you select Real time RAM Monitor part of the trace functions will be disabled For details on applicable restrictions see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents du
367. he subject section R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 244 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hook Transaction Settings tab The Hook Transaction Settings tab displays detailed information for each category shown below and changes hook process settings For details on how to set the hook process see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process 1 Hook Transaction Settings Figure A 19 Property Panel Hook Transaction Settings Tab Property S AX E20UTAG Property al Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 After CPU reset under breaking After CPU reset under breaking 0 Before running Before running 0 After breaking After breaking 0 Hook Transaction Settings Connect Settings Debug Tool Settings Download File Setti A Hook Transactio Description of each category 1 Hook Transaction Settings This category displays detailed information on hook process and changes hook process settings To set properties on this tab use the Text Edit dialog box that is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column when you select any property Settings cannot be changed on this panel Caution Up to 64 characters per process can be entered and up to 128 processes per property can be specified One line in the Text area of the Text Edit dialog box corresponds to one process R20UT2175EJ010
368. history 4 Editing trace start and trace end events To edit a trace start or trace end event you ve set choose Event from the View menu select the trace start or trace end event execution related or access related displayed in the detailed information on the trace on the Events panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu Edit the events in a dialog box that is opened by this operation For details on how to edit in an execution related event dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events Also for details on how to edit in an access related event dialog box see 2 Editing access related events 5 Deleting a trace start or trace end event To delete a trace start or trace end event you ve set right click the event mark in the event area and select Delete Event from the context menu that is displayed You can also delete a trace start or trace end event on the Events panel which opens by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the trace start or trace end event execution related or access related displayed in the detailed information on the trace in the Events panel click x button on the toolbar to delete it See 2 17 5 Deleting events Caution If either a trace start or trace end event is deleted from the event marks on the event area all of the corresponding event marks are deleted R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 143 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Cube
369. hitespace character remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines Register to Watch1 Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace Characters area Line number area when connected to the debug tool Registers a selected character string or a word at the caret position to the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression the judgment of the word depends on current build tool Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Register to Analysis Chart Registers a selected character string or a word at the caret position to the Analysis Chart panel of the analysis tool as a variable If variables have been already registered to all channels a message is displayed and this operation will have no effect Note that this item is disabled when the active project does not support a plug in of the analyze tool Register Action Event R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the correspond
370. ich data are displayed on this panel Choose Save Disassemble Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below is opened At this time if you perform this operation while a range is selected on panel it is possible to save only the selected range of disassembled data In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to save the displayed contents of disassembled results Figure 2 84 Saving Disassembled Result Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data File Name E WorkSpace Tutorial E 1E20 RX600 T utorial_LittleEndian Tutori v File Type Text files txt v Save Range Address Symbol _sorteOxde z a _sort 0x63 z a Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Enter it directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file using the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button b Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated csv CSV format gt te R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 78 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note Each piece of data are separated
371. ick the button in the File Name area of the Data Save dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area From the drop down list select the folder which contains the file you wish to save 2 File list area Displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of a file you wish to save R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 442 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of file to save file type from the drop down list below The selectable file format is determined by the type of data you are saving a When saving the displayed content of a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format gt te Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting b When saving upload data For the selectable file format see Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats Function buttons Open Specifies a specified file in the Data Save dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 443 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to select an option s
372. igned decimal Displays a selected item in unsigned decimal Octal Displays a selected item in octal Binary Displays a selected item in binary ASCII Displays a selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with Value the equivalent enclosed in However this does not apply when the value is displayed in hexadecimal Displays a selected item in Float However if a selected watch expression is not 4 byte data or has type information the selected item is displayed in predetermined notation see Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default Double Displays a selected item in Double However if a selected watch expression is not 8 byte data or has type information the selected item is displayed in predetermined notation see Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default Decimal Notation for Array Index Displays the indices of all arrays in decimal Hexadecimal Notation for Array Index Displays the indices of all arrays in hexadecimal R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 320 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify character code ASCII Displays a selected item in ASCII code Shift_JIS Displays
373. ile Type Text files txt Save Range Number 121 v 167 1 Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Enter it directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button 2 Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formate R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 153 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting 3 Specifying the Save Range Number Specify the start trace number and end trace number to set a range of data to be saved in a file Enter numeric values in decimal notation directly in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If you want to save all trace data select All Trace Data in the drop down list on the left side right side text box disabled Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is sp
374. iles of type Importable CS Comma Separated Variables csv Y This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Watch panel select Import Watch Expression from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder which contains the file you want to import 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of a file you want to import 4 Files of type area The following type of the file file type is shown Importable CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV format to enable import R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 436 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Imports the specified file to the Watch panel Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 437 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open File dialog box You can select files you want to open in this dialog box Figure A 81 Open File Dialog Box Open File 1 Look in B sample DefaultBuild 4 El sample mtpj My Recent Documents 2 T Desktop My Documents My Computer e File name i gt My Network Files of type
375. in R1 MOV SIM_I0 R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 JSR R3 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R2 Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 454 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS FGETC Reads 1 byte of data from a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 input buffer Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 EOF detected File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Beginning address of input buffer input Beginning address of the buffer to which input data is written Detailed Description Reads 1 byte of data from a file Example _fcharget MOV R2 R5 Set the value of R2 file number in R5 MOV PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 MOV R1 4h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 input buffer in R2 4 bytes MOV R5 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R5 in R2 1 bytes file number MOV 01270000h R1 Set the function code of FGETC in R1 MOV SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 JS
376. in R5 MOV PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 MOV R1 4h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 first address of the filename in R2 4 bytes R5 2h 5 R2 Set the value of R5 in R2 2 bytes open mode 01250000h R1 Set the function code of FOPEN in R1 SIM_I0 R5 Set the address of the system call in R5 R5 System call PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R3 h 5 R2 R1 Set the value of R2 1 byte file number in R1 R1 R3 Set the value of R1 in the location pointed to by R3 file number pointer R2 R1 Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 453 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS FCLOSE Closes a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Detailed Description Closes a file Example _fileclose MOV PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 MOV R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes MOV 01060000h R1 Set the function code of FCLOSE
377. in a project Configure the operating environment for the debug tool Configure the operating environment for the debug tool selected in step 5 E1 E20 Simulator Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite to start communication Execute downloading Download the load module created in step 3 to the debug tool Displaying source files Display the contents of the downloaded load module source files on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 9 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 10 Execute programs Execute the program using the operation method that matches your purpose If you wish to stop the program at the arbitrary position set a breakpoint break event before executing the program see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting when you use events 11 Stop the program manually Stop the program currently being executed Note that if a breakpoint break event has been set in steps 10 the program execution will be stopped automatically when the condition of the breakpoint break event is met 12 Check the result of the program execution Check the following information that
378. in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 384 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Source Level tab The acquired trace data is searched at the sou
379. in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 150 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Searching at the source level Search for trace data at the source level Select the Source Level tab Figure 2 138 Search for Trace Data at Source Level Trace Search Instruction Level Source Level Search object The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable Search condition Source and Line Search range Number a To specify a source line before performing a sear
380. in which values are displayed can be selected using the appropriate toolbar button or selecting from the context menu Also it is possible to select a display form that always adds hexadecimal equivalents to the ordinary display The meaning of marks displayed as I O register values and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue The value of the I O register that the user is changing press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color Text color Sienna The value of the I O register that has been changed because of the execution of a program To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar or Reset Color from the context menu Background color LightYellow Text color Gray Values of I O registers protected against read Note Background color Standard color Note This refers to the I O registers that get the microcontroller actuated by a read operation To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu Caution The 1 byte or 2 byte I O registers and the 1 bit I O registers mapped to those 1 byte or 2 byte I O registers differ in timing with which values are retrieved Therefore while a value from the same I O register is being displayed it i
381. included herein Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration modification copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades Standard and High Quality The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots etc High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems and safety equipment etc Renesas Electronics products are neithe
382. ing Example S ample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc Address C Test 2 6 Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set an action event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit Condition from the context menu after selecting the action event R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 360 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Tab selection area You can switch action events to be registered by the selection of a tab This dialog box has the following tabs Printf event tab Interrupt event setting tab Simulator Caution When you open this dialog box by selecting Edit Condition from the context menu this area will be hidden 2 Event conditions settings area You can set detailed conditions for each action event in this area See the section of the corresponding tab for the details of the setting procedure Function buttons Ends the sett
383. ing View menu gt gt Event After selecting the trace event access related displayed in the detailed information on the point trace event click Edit Condition on the context menu See 2 Editing access related events When deleting a trace event access related you have set as a point trace event first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the trace event access related you wish to delete in the detailed information on the point trace event in the Events panel click dx button on the toolbar to delete it See 2 17 Event Management 2 13 5 Stopping Restarting Collection of Execution History E20 It is possible to temporarily stop or restart the collection of execution history during program execution Cautions 1 If the trace function is halted or restarted during program execution realtime capability may be impaired This facility cannot be used when a trace start or trace end event is set 3 E1 E20 RX200 Series Simulator The facility to stop or restart the trace function during program execution is not supported 4 E20 JTAG RX600 Series If Do not output is selected in the External trace output property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab this facility cannot be used To use it select CPU execution or Trace output 5 E20 JTAG RX600 Series If Real time RAM monitor is selected in the Usage of tra
384. ing a range of character strings with the mouse you can copy it to the clipboard as character strings and then paste it to the caret position To perform these operations select the appropriate item from the context menu or from the Edit menu Note that pasting is possible only when ASCII is specified for the character code If any other character code is specified a message is displayed Toolbar Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display Resets the highlighting that indicates the spot whose value has changed as a result of program execution However this button is disabled during program execution Shows the following buttons that change the form in which memory values are displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution Displays memory values in hexadecimal default Displays memory values in signed decimal Displays memory values in unsigned decimal Displays memory values in octal Displays memory values in binary Shows the following buttons that change the form in which memory value size is displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution Displays memory values in 4 bit width Displays memory values in 8 bit width default Displays memory values in 16 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Displays memory v
385. ing address of the line at the caret position 1 Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret 2tENESAS Page 263 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position Note that this item is disabled when the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters or or this panel is in the mixed display mode The mode selected for the current source file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Go To Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Forward To Next Cursor Position Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cursor Position Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Back To Last Cursor Position Goes back to the position before operating Jump to Function Note that this item is disa
386. ing of the action event and sets the specified action event at a specified location Cancels the action event setup and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 361 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Printf event tab This tab is used to configure Printf events as action events see 2 16 1 Insert printf A Printf event momentarily stops the execution of the program at a specified location and executes the printf command via software processing When a Printf event is set the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the command at the location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel Figure A 44 Action Events Dialog Box Printf Event Tab Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output string Example S ample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc m Address C Test Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 cee 30 Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each areal Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel
387. ing point a EEA Displays character strings in UTF 8 code Shows the following buttons that change the display form Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range Column Opens the Column Number Settings dialog box to set the number of view columns in the memory value Number area Settings Address Opens the Address Offset Settings dialog box to set an offset value for addresses displayed in the Offset Value address area Settings Note For details on the display of a floating point value see the section for the Memory panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 108 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Changing memory contents Memory values can be edited In the memory value area or character string area move the caret to the target memory value and then edit it directly from the keyboard When a memory value is edited the altered portion is displayed in a different color While in this state press the Enter key and the altered value will be written into the target memory Pressing the Esc key before you hit the Enter key cancels editing However the character strings that can be entered when changing memory contents are limited to only those that are handleable by the currently specified system of notation Also changes in the character string area are only possible when character encode in ASCII is specified You can edit memory values even when the p
388. ing specified in the text box in downward direction with the search result placed in selected state Remarks 1 The I O register names that are hidden as classified by category folder also are searched expanded and placed in selected state 2 After entering the character string to be searched press the Enter key and the same option as would be when the button is clicked is performed or press the Shift Enter keys and the same operation as would be when the button is clicked is performed 2 IOR area This area displays I O register names in list form as classified by type of I O register as category folder The meaning of each displayed icon is as follows Indicates that names of I O registers in this category are currently displayed Double clicking this icon or clicking will close the category and hide the names of corresponding I O registers Note that categories are by default nonexistent If necessary create a new category and then Edit the tree Indicates that names of I O registers in this category are currently hidden Double clicking this icon or clicking will open the category and display the names of corresponding I O registers Note that categories are by default nonexistent If necessary create a new category and then Edit the tree Displays I O register names Remark By clicking the header part of this area it is possible to sort category names in order of character code T
389. ings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 Displays the detailed information on timer events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box Displays the detailed information on execution related events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box Displays the detailed information on access related events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator Displays the detailed information on interrupt events and modifies the set tings Port Setting dialog box Sets COM port in the Debug Console panel Scroll Range Settings dialog box Sets a scroll range on the Memory panel Disassemble panel Go to Line dialog box Go to the Location dialog box Data Save dialog box Progress Status dialog box Option dialog box Moves the caret to a specified line Moves the caret to a specified position Saves displayed content of each panel and upload data Displays progress of processing Sets various environment parameters External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 Selects external flash definition files USD files Open Log File dialog box Selects log files Select Download File dialog box Selects a download file Open Watch Expression Data File dialog box Selects a file for importing watch expressions Open File dialog box Selects a file to open Print Preview windo
390. ion For details on how to edit in an execution related event dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events Also for details on how to edit in an access related event dialog box see 2 Editing access related events R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 163 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Deleting a timer start event or timer end event To delete a timer start event or timer end event you ve set right click the event mark in the event area and then select Delete Events on the context menu that is displayed You can also delete a timer start or timer end event on the Events panel which opens by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the timer start or timer end event execution related or access related displayed in the detailed information on the timer result in the Events panel click X button on the toolbar to delete it see 2 17 5 Deleting events Caution If either a timer start or timer end event is deleted from the event marks on the event area all of the corresponding event marks are deleted 2 14 4 Range of measurable time There is a finite range of measurable time for timer measurements by Run Break timer events see 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop or timer measurement events see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section as shown below Table 2 17 Range of Measurable Time Debug tool Run Break timer event Timer measurement e
391. ion will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one w
392. ion will show Running Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution lt 2 gt Display update interval for PC ms This property is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the PC display during the execution property During program execution specify a PC display updating interval in the status bar in 100 ms units Enter an integer directly in the range 100 to 65500 with fractions below 100 ms rounded up By default 500 is specified Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the PC display during the execution property from No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution d Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 19 Break Category E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break lt 1 gt Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Specify from the following drop down list the type of preferential breakpoint to be used with a single click of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When setting a break point after the preferential break point type has been used up the other break point type will be automatically selected See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint preferentially Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint p
393. irmware at a designated RAM location address is indicated in Work RAM size bytes property Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Although this area can also be used in the user program because memory contents are saved and restored to and from the memory of the host machine by the debugger firmware do not specify this area as the source or destination of transfer for the DMA or DTC function lt 4 gt Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of the work RAM to be used by the debugger f Operating Modes of CPU In this category you configure the operating mode of the microcontroller to be emulated Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 Figure 2 15 Operating Modes of CPU Category E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data lt 1 gt Mode pins setting Specify the operating mode set by the mode pin of the microcontroller R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 20 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 9 Caution E1 RX630 RX631 RX63N When you activate the CubeSuite in user boot mode when using a microcontroller that contains the USB boot program an activation error will occur Be sure to erase the USB boot program through the Flash Development Toolkit or Renesas Flash Programmer lt 2 gt Register setting Specify the operating mode to be set by t
394. irst byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 458 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Moves the file pointer to a specified position Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Direction Unused 4 Offset 6 Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Direction input 0 Offset in bytes from the beginning of a file 1 Offset in bytes from the current file pointer 2 Offset in bytes from the tail end of a file Offset input Number of bytes from the position specified by direction Detailed Description Moves the file pointer to a specified position R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 459 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuitet V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Example R2 R5 PARM R2 R5 4h 5 R2 R1 1h 5 R2 R3 2h 5 R2 010C0000h R1 SIM I0 R5 R5 SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Set t value of R2 offset in R5 Set t address of the parameter block in R2 Set t value of R5 in R1 4 bytes offset Set the value of R1 file nu
395. is a word Long word The specified access size is a long word Compare data Specify compare data in hexadecimal Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify the data mask Specify whether or not to specify a data mask Default No Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Yes Data mask is specified No No data mask is specified Note Mask value Specify mask data in hexadecimal This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the data mask property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 403 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compare condition Specify data comparison condition This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the data mask property Default Specified value Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Specified value Condition holds true with the access of the data value that matches the result of the mask Any other value Condition holds true with any access of the data value that does not match the result of the mask Note The data value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for
396. isplay update interval ms 500 PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 Use trace function Yes Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time Yes Trace memory size frames 64K 8 gt E Coverage Use coverage function Yes Reuse coverage result No 9 p E Stream 70 Select stream 0 mode Simulator mode Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 1 0 address E 0 1 op E Execution Mode Select execution mode Stop Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when floating point exception occurs Yes Stop when interrupt occurs Yes Stop INT instruction is executed Yes Stop BRK instruction is executed Yes 11 gt E Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation No Register Connect Settings R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 230 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 17 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab Simulator RX200 Series Property 13 2 gt E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 3 p E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 6 P E Trace Use trace function No Clear trace memory before ru
397. ite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Untabify Selected Lines Make Uppercase Make Lowercase Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possi
398. ition breakpoint 94 Stop the program manually 94 Stop the program with the access to variables 98 Stop Trace 146 332 Structure 302 309 Subjects that are registrable as watch expressions 126 309 Supervisor mode 92 163 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 stENESAS Page 466 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX C INDEX T Tag jump 74 256 347 Target range for the RRM real time RAM monitor 111 Text Edit dialog box 359 Timer end event 158 337 Timer measurement 155 184 336 337 393 Timer measurement event 157 Timer start event 157 337 Timestamp information 237 327 Trace 136 184 185 336 340 Trace end event 139 337 Trace event 139 Trace memory 134 137 Trace number 327 Trace panel 326 Trace Search dialog box 380 Trace start event 139 337 Type of breakpoint 94 234 Types of events 185 U Unconditional trace 336 337 Unconditional trace event 139 174 Union 302 309 Upload 53 65 Uploadable file formats 65 Usage of PIC PID Function 82 USB boot program 21 33 USD file 63 User boot mode 21 33 Vv Vector read access 331 Verify 232 WwW Watch panel 307 Watchdog timer 109 Watch expression 125 307 Watch expression input form 310 Window reference 201 Work RAM 20 Z Zoom in or out on a view 258 R2
399. k Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OxXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Document Name Document No CubeSuite Start R20UT2133E Integrated Development Environment V850 Design R20UT2134E User s Manual R8C Design R20UT2135E RL78 Design R20UT2136E 78KOR Design R20UT2137E 78KO Design R20UT2138E RX Coding R20UT0767E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT2139E R8C Coding R20UT0576E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT2140E 78KO Coding R20UT2141E RX Build R20UT0768E V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT2142E R8C Build R20UT0575E RL78 78KOR Build R20UT2143E 78KO Build R20UT0783E RX Debug This manual V850 Debug R20UT2144E R8C Debug R20UT0770E RL78 Debug R20UT2145E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78KO Debug R20UT0731E Analysis R20UT2146E Message R20UT2147E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 8 1 1 Summary 8 1 2 Features 8 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 9 2 1 Overview 9 2 2 Preparation before Debugging
400. kpoints cannot be done See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on how to set the breakpoint b Configuring breakpoints via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 254 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set Breakpoint Sets a breakpoint in the area at the current source line see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint E1 E20 By default the debug tool will set a hardware break when resources are available This behavior can be customized by using the Hardware Break First or Software Break First menu items Set Hardware Breakpoint Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the line at the caret position E1 E20 Set Software Breakpoint Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the line at the caret position E1 E20 Hardware Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a E1 E20 hardware breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used property in the Break E1 E20 category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel Software Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a E1 E20 software breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the Type of b
401. l Displays messages output by the build tool debug tool or each plug in or displays result of global search performed in Find and Replace dialog box Debug Console panel Performs standard 1 0 Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Sets memory mapping Download Files dialog box Selects a file to be downloaded and sets download condition Text Edit dialog box Enters or edits plural lines of text Action Events dialog box Sets action events Encoding dialog box Selects file encode Save Settings dialog box Sets file encode and new line code Column Number Settings dialog box Ses the number of view columns of memory values on the Memory panel Address Offset Settings dialog box Ses an offset value for the address display on the Memory panel Memory Initialize dialog box Initializes memory Memory Search dialog box Searches memory Print Address Range Settings dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Sets a print range on the Disassemble panel 2tENESAS Page 201 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window panel and dialog box names Functional description Print Preview window Previews the source file before printing Trace Search dialog box Searches for trace data Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 Displays the conditions for event combination and modifies the settings Detailed Sett
402. lays string variables on this panel in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables on this panel in EUC JP code Oct E coding asa EJ E Displays string variables on this panel in UTF 8 code Displays string variables on this panel in UTF 16 code F 2 Jumping to the source line 3 4 Double clicking on a line will open the Editor panel with the caret moved to the source line from which the function indicated by the selected line is called The view will jump to the Editor panel if it is already open Remark Selecting Jump to Disassemble from the context menu will open the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret moved to the address from which the function indicated by the selected line is called The view jumps to the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 if it is already open Displaying local variables Selecting Jump to Local Variable at This Time from the context menu will open the Local Variables panel which displays local variables of the function indicated by the selected line Saving the displayed contents of call stack information Selecting Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu will open the Save As dialog box in which you can save the entire call stack information either in a text file txt or a CSV file CSV format When saving to a file the latest information will be retrieved from the debug tool Figure 2 129 Call Stack Information Output Image When Sav
403. le menu used exclusively for the Output panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Output tab name Saves the contents displayed on the currently selected tab to a text file txt that has been saved previously See c Saving logs If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as you ve selected Save Output tab name As is performed However this is disabled during build execution Save Output file name Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents displayed on the currently selected tab to a As specified text file txt See c Saving logs Edit menu Output Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Output panel is as follows All other items are disabled Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Select All Selects all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected Context menu Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Select All Selects all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Clear Clears all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Tag Jump Opens the Editor panel with control jumping
404. le of Setting a Timer Start Event Access related on a Variable in the Source Text Simulator ee SENE EE re EEE mosi Eee ees Set Pc to Here pa ee a che eer tee eee E R Jump to Function F12 POEET NSA A Tag Jump Shift F12 void sort long a i Jump to Disassemble long t int i j k gap Advanced gt Break Settings gap 5 while gap gt 0 i Trace Settings for k 0 k lt gap k Timer Settings gt f for i k gap ix g gt A Start Timer for 3 i 2 __Clear Coverage Information 9 Stop Timer Sse aint Set Timer Start R W Value f ali it Set Timer End R W Value j a j gap s atisgap t 49 View Result of Timer e1 From the context menu above the variable g_IntBuf select Timer Settings gt gt Set Timer Start R W Value gap gap 2 Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press g_CharBuf char g IntBuf amp 0x00F the Enter key Here the timer measurement will start when the value Oxb is read from or written to the variable g_IntBuf R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 159 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 148 Example of Setting a Timer Start Event Access related on a Watch expression E1 E20 Watchl Zl Z BX Notation Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo Seg IntBut D ox00001404 K Set Timer Start R W Value gt Set Timer 1 Joxb
405. le the specified routine is in execution 11 While the specified routine is in execution its event settings will be disabled along with the trace break real time RAM monitor and timer functions 12 Non maskable interrupt is always prohibited while the specified routine is in execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 92 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 13 When starting a program after executing the specified routine the state of microcontroller will be as follows General Register Remains in the state at which the program stopped or reflects the user setting The contents of the register following the execution of the specified routine are not reflected Memory Reflects the memory access made after the execution of the specified routine Peripheral Functions The operation of microcontroller peripheral functions after the execution of the specified routine continues R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 93 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Stop Programs Break This section describes how to stop the program in execution Remark When the program in execution is stopped a statement of the cause of the break appears on the Status bar in the Main window 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The program in execution is forcibly stopped by clicking the button on the debug toolbar 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary p
406. lected state Rename Edits the name of a selected category Find Moves the focus to the text box in the search area Go To Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to a specified I O register R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 299 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Context Menu Register to Watch1 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Registers the selected I O register or category to the Watch panel Watch Refresh Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display No data are reloaded for the I O registers protected against read However this button is disabled during program execution Force Read Value Forcibly loads a value once for I O registers protected against read Go To Opens the Go to the Location dialog box Create Category Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly into the text box While you can create any number of new categories note that a category cannot be created within another category However this button is disabled during program execution Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If an I O register or category is in selected state that item is copied Note that the copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Delete Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in sel
407. lected watch expression see b How to set a timer end event jNote Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channe in which a timer end event is set E1 E20 Periodic Updating Shows the following cascaded menu to set realtime display updating see a Realtime display update function Periodic Updating Options Opens the Property panel to set the realtime display update function generally Refresh Reacquires all values of registered watch expressions to update the display However the I O registers protected against reads are not reloaded Force Read Value Forcibly loads the values of I O registers protected against reads once However this is disabled during program execution Add New Watch Registers a new watch expression Enter a watch expression directly in the text box see c Registering a new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one Watch panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 319 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Category Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one Watch panel no other categories can be created within a category Delete Deletes a selected range of character string If a watch expression or category is in a selected state t
408. lick Rapid Build on the Build menu This is a toggle switch which is by default enabled Caution For this function to be enabled when you use an external editor it is necessary to check the Observe registered files changing checkbox in the General Build Debug category of the Option dialog box Remarks 1 Itis recommended that after editing the source file you should always be sure to press the Ctrl S keys to save it each time 2 When you ve chosen to enable or disable the rapid build function your selection is applied to the entire project main project and sub projects 3 If while a rapid build is under execution the rapid build function is switched off disabled execution of the rapid build is aborted on the spot 2 6 4 Performing line assembly The instructions and instruction codes displayed on the Disassemble panel can be edited line assembled Following methods of operation are described here 1 Editing instructions 2 Editing instruction code 1 Editing instructions To edit instructions follow the procedure described below a Switching to the edit mode Double click an instruction you want to edit or while the caret is moved to the subject instruction select Edit Disassemble from the context menu and the subject you re going to edit is placed into the edit mode b Editing instructions Edit the character string of the instruction directly from the keyboard c Writing into memory Pr
409. local variable see 2 Changing the contents of local variables However this item is disabled during program execution Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab selected Context menu All the items in the context menu are disabled during program execution Register to Watch1 Registers a selected local variable in the Watch panel Watch1 Copy Copies the content of a selected line or a character string to the clipboard Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed AutoSelect Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Octal Displays values on this panel in octal Binary Displays values on this panel in binary Decimal Notation for Displays array indexes on this panel is decimal default Array Index Hexadecimal Notation Displays array indexes on this panel is hexadecimal for Array Index Float Displays values on this panel in Float Note that non 4 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Displays values on this panel in Double Note that non 8 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notati
410. ls of settings in each category see 2 5 1 Execute downloading 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on hook transaction and the settings in each category R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 27 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 3 E20 Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using E20 Note that the contents of the Property panel differ depending on the communication method FINE communications E20 Serial or JTAG communications E20 JTAG between E20 and the target system Figure 2 24 Property Panel E20 Serial R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Property Sl RX E20 Serial Property z of intem IM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes of DataFlash memory KBytes Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator Max 200m4 Communications method FINE baud rate bps E Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Mork RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file No E20 XXXXXXXXX No FINE 2000000 Specify the ID
411. ltered part of it changes in display color While in this state hit the Enter key and the changed value is written into the target memory Pressing the Esc key before pressing Enter key cancels editing For details on how to change memory values see 3 Changing memory contents Search and initialize memory values Open the Memory Search dialog box in which you can search memory contents in the specified address area by selecting Find from the context menu see 5 Searching for memory contents Also selecting Fill from the context menu will open the Memory Initialize dialog box in which you can collectively modify memory contents in the specified address range see 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents Copy and paste By selecting a range of memory values with the mouse you can copy the content of the selected part as a character string to the clipboard and then paste it to the caret position To perform these operations select the appropriate item from the context menu or from the Edit menu Note that pasting is possible only when the display format notation and bit width of the character string matches that of the area to which it is pasted A message will appear if the formats do not agree The following table shows the character code and character strings that can be used in this area A message will appear when a character string other than those listed here is pasted Character code
412. lue or address expressions in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is specified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 116 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Clicking the Save button Memory data is saved in specified form to a specified file Figure 2 115 Memory Data Output Image When Saved Saved to Text File txt Example for data displayed in hexadecimal 8 bit width and ASCII code 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000001011 1111 1111111111111111 11 11111111 00000020 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 pas 00000030 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3333333333333333 Saved to CSV File csv Example for data displayed in hexadecimal 8 bit width and ASCII code 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 000 0000001014 14 14 14 14 19 17 19 99 17 11 11 11 11 11 11 00000000 00000020 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 2222 22 22 22 22 22 _
413. lue representable in 32 bits Remarks 1 By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Ifthe start address text box is blank address 0x0 is assumed 3 If the end address text box is blank the upper limit address of the microcontroller s address space is assumed d Clicking the Search Backward and Search Forward buttons If you click the Search Backward button a search is conducted in the direction toward smaller addresses within the specified range and the searched spot shown on Memory panel is in a selected state If you click the Search Forward button a search is conducted in the direction toward larger addresses within the specified range and the searched spot shown on Memory panel is in a selected state 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents Memory values can be changed collectively initialized Selecting Fill from the context menu opens the Memory Initialize dialog box that permits you to change memory values in a specified address range collectively In this dialog box follow the procedure below to change memory values collectively Figure 2 113 Changing Memory Contents Collectively Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address symbol l End address symbol s ihput the end address or sy lnitialize data Hex Input the initial data i
414. lues on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code default Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Adds a module file name to the information displayed default Adds function call parameters to the information displayed default File Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the Call Stack panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Call Stack Data Saves the contents of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see b Saving the call stack information If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Call Stack Data As would have been selected is performed Save Call Stack Data As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of this panel to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see b
415. m execution time gt The maximum execution time measured by a timer is displayed The time is expressed in one of ns us ms s min units However if expressed in min a s digit is displayed at the same time lt Minimum execution time gt The minimum execution time measured by a timer is displayed The time is expressed in one of ns us ms s min units However if expressed in min a s digit is displayed at the same time lt Total number of cycles executed gt Displays the total number of cycles executed between Run Break as the result of measurements made lt Total number of instructions executed gt Displays the total number of instructions executed between Run Break as the result of measurements made lt Print event setting gt The lt Output character string gt lt Variable expression gt specified in the Action Events dialog box is displayed lt Interrupt vector gt lt Interrupt priority gt 3 Comment area This area permits the user to enter freely a comment on any event that is set Displays the interrupt vector specified in the Action Events dialog box or Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator Displays the priority level specified in the Action Events dialog box or Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator When this line is clicked detailed information on the lines below that is displayed To enter a comment sele
416. m the keyboard the characters to add when output to the Output panel Characters must be in one line spaces allowed b Specify Variable expression Specify the variable expression for the Printf event to take place Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box opens with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default For the basic input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event see Table A 14 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function c Specify Address Designate an address that specifies the Printf event By default the presently specified address is displayed When editing you can either type an address expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters or select one from the input history from the drop down list up to 10 items Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS
417. mal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses File Menu CPU Register Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the CPU Register panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save CPU Register Data Saves the content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see b Saving of CPU register values If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save CPU Register Data As would have been selected is performed Save CPU Register Data Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the content of this panel to a specified text file txt or As CSV file csv see b Saving of CPU register values R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 292 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit Menu CPU Register Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the CPU Register panel is as follows All other items are disabled Cuts a selected range of character string and copies it to the clipboard However this is enabled only when character strings are being edited When in editing mode copies a selected character string to the clipboard If a line is selected a register or category on the line is copied to the clipboard Note that a co
418. marks 1 If you have started the execution with this operation the occurrence of Printf event will also be ignored 2 The PC value can be displayed in the status bar at any update interval during program execution See e Current PC position 3 Execute after changing PC value The program is executed after you have forcibly changed the current PC value to an arbitrary position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction at which you wish to start the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Set PC to Here from the context menu the current PC value is set to the address of the line instruction where the caret currently exists Then execute either one of the execution method described in 2 Execute from the current address 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps When either of the following operation has occurred the program will stop automatically after conducting step execution in the source level 1 line of source text or in the instruction level 1 instruction Once the program is stopped the contents of each panel will be updated automatically As such step execution is suited for debugging the program execution in transition either in source or instruction level The unit in which the program is step executed is determined by the setting of the Editor panel as follows When the button on the toolbar is invalid default Step execution is conducted in source level Note however that
419. mber in R1 1 bytes offset Set the value of R3 direction in R2 2 bytes direction Set the function code of FSEEK in R1 Set the address of the system call in R5 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R1 Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called Parameter block area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 460 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS FTELL Obtains the current position of the file pointer Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 4 6 Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Offset output Current position of the file pointer Number of bytes from the top of the file Detailed Description Obtains the current position of the file pointer R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 461 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Example R2 R5 Set the value of R2 offset in R5 PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes direction 010D0000h R1 Set the function code of FTELL
420. me gt The total execution time measured by a timer is displayed The time is expressed in one of ns ys ms s min units However if expressed in min a s digit is displayed at the same time If the timer has overflowed see 2 14 4 Range of measurable time or the value is invalid OVERFLOW is displayed lt Combination condition for trace Start gt One of the following conditions is displayed OR AND Sequential lt Combination condition for trace end gt An OR condition is displayed lt Total number of trace start trace end event gt The total number of trace start and trace end events is displayed lt Start end gt Displays whether the content of the detailed information is about start event or end event lt Detailed information on trace Start trace end gt lt Pass count gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Detailed information on trace start and trace end events is displayed The pass count of a timer is displayed If the timer has overflowed see 2 14 4 Range of measurable time or the value is invalid OVERFLOW is displayed ztENESAS Page 342 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 2 lt Average execution time gt APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The average execution time measured by a timer is displayed The time is expressed in one of ns ys ms s min units However if expressed in min a s digit is displayed at the same time lt Maximu
421. mediately before program execution immediately before This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Execute the specified routine execution starts immediately before execution of the user program property Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Depends on selected microcontroller value Execute the specified Specify whether or not to run a specified routine immediately after the program breaks routine immediately after the user program stops How to By selecting from the drop down list Default No change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes A specified routine is run immediately program breaks value No A specified routine is not run immediately after program breaks Routine to run Specify the address to be executed immediately after the program breaks immediately after This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Execute the specified routine execution stops immediately after the user program stops property Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Depends on selected microcontroller value 6 Trace This category displays detailed information on the trace function and changes trace settings C
422. menu Description of each area 1 Color setting area This area is where colors are set a Setting place area ABCD abed 0123 hhitialize Settings Select from the list a spot whose display color is to be specified The relationship between the items displayed in the list and the colors set for each by default is as follows tem R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ExampleDisplay Display Background White color ztENESAS Standard display colors on all windows and panels Page 422 of 471 Warning CubeSuite V1 03 00 Example Display Text color Blue Background color Standard color APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description Display colors of warning messages on the Output panel as well as display colors for file names with warnings included on the Project Tree panel AaBbCc Text color Red Background color WhiteSmoke Display colors of error messages on the Output panel as well as display colors for file names with errors included on the Project Tree panel Reserved word AaBbCc Text color Maroon Background color Standard color Display colors of reserved words on the Editor panel for compilers assemblers used Comment Text color Green Background color Standard color Display colors of comment parts for C source files to on the Editor panel String literal Control code Highligh
423. mits you to check detailed information on the currently set events in list form as well as delete events switch the state of settings enabled or disabled display detailed information and change settings For details on how to read each area and about their functionality see the section in which the Events panel is described Remark When multiple load module files are downloaded the load module names are displayed as the detailed information on the Events panel Figure 2 159 Displaying the Set Events Events Panel E1 E20 Events Toolbar 4 7 Name Detail Comment C Unconditional Trace B M SP Trace Start OR End OR Start End 2 Detail Start After Execution sort c 1 Oxffff85de fEnd Read Write g_IntBuf 041404 0x1407 0x3 Name Detail Comment B M 8 Timer Result Total O ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Min Ons 0 Ons Ons Detail Start After Execution sort c 19 Oxffffe5ea End Read Write q_CharBuf 01000 0x1000 0x5 Name Detail Comment MP Software BreakOOO1 Before Execution sort cH12 Oxffff85c0 Run Break Timer Total 0 ns E M Point Trace Detail Read g_IntBuf 01404 Name v Detail Comment wa Hardware Break0001 Before Execution sort c 33 Osffff85fd M 88 Combination Break OR Detail Read Write gq CharBuf 0 1000 041000 0x1 l i Il Name area Detail area Comment area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 173 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2
424. monic 1 4 Access Address Gnput when range is s pp Input when range is s pp Access Status Data Search range Number Hex Anput when range p gt Function buttons 4 Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the toolbar button on the Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2012 Page 382 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search condition area a b c d Fetch Address Specify a fetch address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The fetch address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address expressions in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values
425. move the caret to the address where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit Condition from the context menu after selecting the Printf event Description of each area 1 Output string area Type in the string to add to the Output panel directly via the keyboard up to 1024 characters R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 362 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Note that the output string can only be one line spaces allowed Variable expression area Specify the variable expression s for the Printf event Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box is opened with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default The basic input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event are as follows Table A 14 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Variable Expression Output Value Name of a C C language variable ne Value of a C C language variable Variable expression Variable expression Element of an array Note 2 Variable expression Member name Value of a
426. mple display default Text color Blue Background color Standard color Description Values of watch expressions which have had their values changed by the user Written into the target memory by hitting Enter key Text color DeepPink Background color Standard color Values of watch expressions which have their display updated in real time Realtime display update function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 314 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Example display default Description Text color Sienna Values of watch expressions whose values have changed as a result of program execution Highlighting is reset by clicking the button in the toolbar or selecting Reset Color on the context menu Background color LightYellow Text color Gray When nonexistent variables are registered as watch expressions or when values of watch expressions could not be acquired e g variables gotten out of scope Background color Standard color Remarks 1 The I O registers that may get the microcontroller operated unintentionally by a read operation are protected against reads so that they are not loaded with values To load the contents of the I O registers protected against reads select Force Read Value on context menu 2 Watch expressions have their values acquired in the order they are registered Therefore if two or more of th
427. n breakpoint Combination break E1 E20 When while the debug tool successively is checking plural break conditions during program execution the combination condition is met this event causes the program to break gt See 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 Unconditional Trace Trace data is automatically collected at the same time the program starts running and collection of trace data is halted simultaneously when the program stops Since this event is a built in event Note2 Enabled by default gt See 2 13 2 Collecting an execution history up to a halt it cannot be deleted This event is Run Break Timer A measurement of the program s execution time automatically begins at the same time the program starts running and the measurement of execution time is halted simultaneously when the program stops Since this event is a Note2 built in event it cannot be deleted This event is Enabled by default gt See 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop This event is such that when the condition set by a trace start and a trace end event is met collection of trace data begins and then ends displayed when either a trace start or a trace end event is set gt See 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Timer ResultNotes This event is such that when the condition set by a timer start and a timer end event is
428. n unnecessary process to confirm the lock bit status 2 5 3 Executing an upload The memory content of the currently connected debug tool can be saved uploaded to any file To do an upload use the Data Save dialog box that is opened by choosing Upload from the Debug menu Follow the procedure described below to make the necessary setting in this dialog box Figure 2 70 Uploading Memory Contents Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Upload File Name input file name here File Type ntel Hex format hex Save Range Address Symbol input the start of saving range h Input the end of saving range he 1 Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you save Enter directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button 2 Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats List display Format Intel Hex format hex Hex formatNote Motorola S format mot S Record format Binary data bin Binary data format Note In the Intel hex format memory contents are always saved in extension linear address code 32 bit a
429. n below a Current display area default Prints only a currently displayed range on the Disassemble panel b lt Current selected area Prints only a currently selected range on the Disassemble panel However this is disabled if nothing is selected on the Disassemble panel c Range of specified Specify an address range of the subject to be printed by Start address and End address Enter an address expression directly in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Remark By pressing the Ctrl Space keys in this text box it is possible to complement a symbol name at the current caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 376 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and opens a Windows printing dialog box to print a specified range of contents of the Disassemble panel Cancel Closes this dialog box ignoring range selection settings Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 377 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Preview window This window is used to preview the source file before printing Figure A 54 Print Preview Window Print Previ
430. n binary ASCII Displays the character string of a selected item including a low level item in ASCII code If the subject to be displayed consists of 2 bytes or more characters of 1 byte each are displayed in a row Displays a selected item in Float Except for 4 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Double Displays a selected item in Double Except for 8 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Include Hexadecimal Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with the equivalent Value enclosed in parentheses R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 293 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE IOR panel This panel displays the contents of I O registers and changes their values see Section 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Caution The I O registers that get the microcontroller actuated by a read operation are protected against reads so that no values are read from those registers Value marked with To obtain the contents of the I O registers protected against reads select Forcibly Load Values from the context menu Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omittin
431. n button How to open Automatically displayed when a message is generated while a time consuming process is underway Description of each area 1 Message display area Displays a message generated during a process not editable 2 Progress bar Shows the progress of the currently executed process by means of the length of a bar Note that when the progress rate reaches 100 when the right edge of the bar is reached this dialog box closes automatically Function button Cancel Aborts the currently executed process and closes this dialog box However if the process under execution cannot be aborted this button is disabled R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 419 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box makes various environment settings of CubeSuite The settings in this dialog box are saved as settings for the current user of CubeSuite Figure A 72 Option Dialog Box TEM i B Startup and Exit G Display 1 A External Text Editor A Font and Color G External Tools 3 Build Debug G Python Console G Text Editor GQ Update Others E User Information 2 gt h _ This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool menu Description of each area 1 Category selection area Sele
432. n connection CPU clock 100 MHz JTAG clock 16 5 MHz 6 RX630 RX631 RX63N and RX63T Groups Confirm that the endian settings of the endian select registers MDEB MDES written on the microcontroller match the endian information of the project See the hardware manual of the microcontroller for the details of endian select registers Hot plug ins cannot be used while a flash rewrite program is running R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 52 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Download and Upload This section describes how to download the program to be debugged e g load module files into CubeSuite and how to upload the memory content under debug from CubeSuite to files 2 5 1 Execute downloading Download the load module files to be debugged Following the procedure below make the necessary settings for downloads on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab before you execute a download 1 Setting the Download category Figure 2 62 Download Category E1 JTAG E1 Serial E20 JTAG E20 Serial E Download Download files 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Erase data flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main Figure 2 63 Download Category Simulator E Download E Download files 1 E 0
433. n emulator like I O method is used Only standard I O can be used R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 238 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Use stream I O function APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify whether or not to use the stream I O function This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property Default No How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stream I O function is used No Stream I O function is not used Stream I O address Specify the start position of a stream I O that is used to perform standard I O or file I O from the user program This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property Default 0 How to change By entering directly from the keyboard However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value 10 Execution Mode Simulator Select execution mode Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a simulation error or an exception occurs Default Stop How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Stop Sto
434. n hexadecimal here The two or more data R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 114 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 7 a b c Specifying the Start address symbol and End address symbol Specify the Start address symbol and End address symbol to set an address range in which you want memory contents to be initialized Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the address expressions you ve entered are respectively handled as the start address and end address No address values can be specified that are greater than the address space of the microcontroller Caution Note that an address range that covers areas with different endians cannot be specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Specifying the Initialize data Specify the initialization data to be written into memory Directly enter a hexadecimal value in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries To specify multiple pieces of initialization data specify a maximum of 16 pieces of up to 4 bytes 8 characters of data by separating each with a space
435. n the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 369 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Column Number Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the number of view columns of memory values on the Memory panel Figure A 49 Column Number Settings Dialog Box Column Number Settings 1 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel select View gt gt Column Number Settings from the context menu Description of each area 1 Column Number area Directly enter a decimal value as the number of columns you want to display The settable range depends on Size Notation currently being set on the Memory panel as follows Size Notation Settable Range 4 Bits 2 512 Note 4 Bytes 8 Bytes 1 32 Note Only an even number is specifiable if an odd number is specified then it will be changed to a value one greater than such od
436. n the program is halted you can click the subject icons of the trace and coverage functions to change their Enable or Disable state Also the set contents of the following properties on Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab toggle between Yes and No Use trace function property in the Trace category Use coverage function property in the Coverage Simulator category R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 210 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel shows the constituent elements of the project e g microcontroller build tool and debug tool in tree form Note that the debug tools used are selected or switched from one to another on this panel Figure A 3 Project Tree Panel Project Tree Toolbar UR Tutorial Project ME RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool S RX E1 JTAG Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Ei File c Tutorial c c dbsct c c intprg c c resetprg c c sbrk c c sort c vecttbl c This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open Choose Project Tree from the View menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 211 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area This area displays the project s
437. n with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 Lommunications method FINE baud rate bps E Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file No E1 KXXKKKKKX No FINE 2000000 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal es FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF F 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of the internal ROM ztENESAS Page 15 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 7 Property Panel E1 JTAG Property Sl AX E1UTAG Property size of intemal ROM K Bute Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator Mx 200m4 Lommunications JTAG clock MHz B Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian B External Flash External flash definition file method No E1 XXXXXXXXX No JTAG 16 5 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Fee 1000
438. n you set an execution related event as the trace end event move the caret to the line or addressNote at which you want the collection of trace data to finish and then choose Stop Tracing from Trace Settings on the context menu A trace end event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Note Trace start and trace end events cannot be set on lines that have no addresses displayed When trace start and trace end events are set the following event marks are displayed in the event area of the relevant line or address Table 2 12 Trace Start Event and Trace End Event Marks Execution related Events Trace start Trace end Figure 2 133 Example of Trace Start and Trace End Events Set by Using Execution related Events For the Disassemble panel Event area z 40 void tutorial void Indicates that a trace start N i _tutorial event is set as execution Lp ip ffff8561 6e68 related event EreTOS09 pais J 47 p_sam eg Sample ffffS566 fb7204100000 indicates that a traceend 48 init p sam po ffffssse ef event is set as execution Lp dy pie Sees 05670000 elated event J 50 fori i O i lt 10 i b For access related events By setting access related events for the trace start and trace end events it is possible to start and finish the collection of trace data when a specified access is made to any v
439. nal ROM A B D Automatic setting Entire range Note area Internal RAM Data flash Target memory CPU register Not available Note E20 JTAG RX600 Series The subject area of the RRM function is limited to a maximum of 4 096 bytes 4 areas each containing maximum 1024 bytes Therefore CubeSuite automatically determines the subject of realtime display updates within the above limit according to the determination rules order of priority shown below Only the panel that is displayed in front of others immediately before program execution becomes the subject 1 Watch expressions displayed on Watch panel are set in order from the top If multiple Watch panels are open they are set in increasing order of panel number 2 Memory contents displayed on Memory panel are set in increasing order of address If multiple Memory panel are open they are set in increasing order of panel number Note that if the subject area includes a read prohibited area display of that area is not updated b For write Table 2 11 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Write by DMM Function Area E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial Simulator E20 JTAG Internal ROM Not available Entire range Data flash Not available a T A CPU register Impossible o ae I O register ID Entire range Caution Local variables are not the subject of the real time display update function Remark For details on how to rewrite values on Memory
440. name Watch expression Value cast to specified type CPU register name Value of a CPU register I O register name Value of an I O register Label name te 3 EQU symbol nameN e 3 immediate value Value of label value of EQU symbol value of immediate address Integer constant Constant value of an integer Floating constant Constant value of a floating point Character constant Notes 1 Constant value of a character It represents C89 C99 and C variables 2 To specify a member variable of base class specify scope before a member name Example variable BaseClass member 3 Ifa label name or EQU symbol name contains a enclose the name in braces Example Label If there is an imaginary number multiply it by the uppercase letter I example 1 0 2 0 l The letter I constitutes a keyword so that when you specify of a CPU register add REG example I REG Also scope can be specified for a watch expression when it is registered When a watch expression is registered by specifying scope it is handled as shown below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 310 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 6 Handling of a C C Variable when Registered in Watch by Specifying Scope Scope specification Load module Source file Function Subject to be nameNete 1 nameNete 1 nameNte 2 searched pro
441. nced to the project folder or select a file in the External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 that is opened by clicking the button which is displayed at the right edge in the setup column of this property when it is selected After a USD file is registered the Start address End address and Erase external flash ROM before download sub properties are added to the displayed information For the Start address and End address properties the external flash memory area defined in the registered USD file is displayed this information cannot be modified For the Erase external flash ROM before download property select Yes or No from the drop down list To erase the external flash ROM before downloading select Yes No is selected by default To delete registration of a USD file move the caret to the file name on the relevant File property and then click the Delete key For more information on USD files visit Renesas website and see the user s manual for the External Flash Definition Editor Figure 2 68 Opening the External flash memory Dialog Box E External Flash E External flash definition file 4 E 0 E Sample USD ExtFlash usd NN EASonriAUSDEaochusd G HEX Hes Erase external flash ROM before download No 1 2 3 Cautions 1 The endian information in USD files is not reflected on the Memory mappings property in the Memory category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab
442. nd Read Write g_IntBuf 0x1404 041407 025 Name Detail Comment Unconditional Trace 3 Editing a timer measurement event E1 E20 To edit detailed information on a timer measurement event that has had start and end events set use the Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 This dialog box is opened by selecting the timer measurement event you wish to edit on the Events panel then selecting Edit Condition from the context menu a To edit a measurement item In the Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box a measurement item can be specified from the following R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 162 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Measurement item Function Note Measures the number of elapsed cycles ICLK in a specified section Execution cycle Execution cycle Supervisor mode Measures the number of elapsed cycles ICLK while operating in supervisor mode Exception and interrupt cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process interrupts including exceptions Exception cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process exceptions Interrupt cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process interrupts Execution count Measures the number of instructions that have their execution completed Exception and interrupt count Measures the number of times interrupts including exceptions
443. nd a trace end event To use this function follow the procedure described below Setting a trace start event and a trace end event 2 Combining multiple events E1 E20 3 Executing the program 4 Editing trace start and trace end events 5 Deleting a trace start or trace end event Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on trace settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 Simulator With string manipulation instructions and multiply and accumulate instructions only a history of the first and final accesses is collected 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel set the events at which you want the collection of trace data to start and finish a For execution related events By setting execution related events for the trace start and trace end events it is possible to start and finish the collection of trace data at any place Note at which To set an execution related event as the trace start event move the caret to the line or address you want the collection of trace data to start and then choose Start Tracing from Trace Settings on the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 139 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS A trace start event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Also whe
444. nd emulation RAM area Simulator Specify one of the following Little endian data or big endian data Areas other than the above No endian information is displayed 2 Access Memory While Running This category displays detailed information on memory access during program execution and the realtime display update function see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution and changes memory access settings Access by stopping For a memory area not accessible during program execution specify whether access to the area is execution permitted E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Execution is temporarily halted before a read or write is performed value No Memory is not accessed during execution Update display during Specify whether or not to update the displayed content of the Watch panel Memory panel during the execution program execution Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Display is updated during execution value No Display is not updated during execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 232 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Display update Specify the interval in 100 ms unit to update the displayed contents of the Watch panel or Memory interval ms panel while executing a program Note that this
445. ne tmp i a i MOV L R4 R5 Disassembled result line MOV L RS R3 le SUB 1H R2 Offset value Instruction code Instruction Label line Shows a label name if a label is defined at the address and highlights the entire line in pale green color Current PC line Highlights a line corresponding to the address of the current PC position PC register value Note 1 Breakpoint set line Highlights a line where a breakpoint is set Note 1 Note 2 Source text line Shows source text corresponding to code data Disassembled Offset value Shows an offset value from the nearest label if no labels are defined at the address te 3 result line one Instruction Shows the code that was disassembled in hexadecimal code Instruction Shows an instruction resulting from disassembly The mnemonic is highlighted in blue R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 281 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1 The highlighting color depends on how the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box are set 2 By clicking the button toggle in the toolbar or unchecking Mixed Display on the context menu it is possible to hide the source text By default this menu item is checked 3 The offset value is by default not displayed To show it click the Eel button in the toolbar or select Show Offset on the context menu This area has th
446. ng the mouse cursor over a variable in the source text a pop up that shows the name and value of the variable is displayed lt variable name gt lt variable value gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 256 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE h i The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default depending on the type of the variable This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened Setting of various events Various events can be set to the addresses or lines where the caret currently exists by selecting Break Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings from the context menu The corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area by setting the event In addition the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened See the following for details on how to set events 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section Remark A breakpoint can be set or deleted easily in the Main area as well
447. nnect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you configure the connection with the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Internal ROM RAM b Clock c Connection with Emulator d Connection with Target Board e Flash f Operating Modes of CPU g External Flash R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 29 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this category Figure 2 26 Internal ROM RAM Category E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 3 gt Size of DataFlash memory KBytes The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate the data flash 0 is displayed You cannot change the value of this property b Clock You can configure the clock in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 Figure 2 27 Clock Category HOCO E Clock Main clock source HOCO Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Figure 2 28 Clock Category EXTAL E
448. nning Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time No Trace memory size frames 64K 8 p E Coverage Use coverage function Yes Reuse coverage result No 9 P E Stream z0 Select stream 0 mode Simulator mode Use stream 1 0 function No Stream I O address Fe 0 10 p gt E Execution Mode Select execution mode Stop Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when interrupt occurs Yes Stop INT instruction is executed Yes Stop BRK instruction is executed Yes 1 1 am E Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation Memory Connect Settings N Debug Tool Settings A Download File Settings Hook Transaction Settings X Description of each category 1 Memory This category displays detailed information on memory and changes memory settings For details about the displayed types of memory see the section where the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator is described Note 1 Memory mappings Displays the current state of memory mapping per type of memory area Default Sum total by microcontrollers inherent type of memory mapped area How to Simulator change Specification by Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator The Memory Mapping dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column when this
449. ns the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Replace tab selected Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Outlining Displays a cascading menu for controlling expand and collapse states of source file outlining see a Code outlining Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Collapse to Definitions Collapses all nodes that are marked as implementation blocks e g function definitions Toggle Outlining Expansion Toggles the current state of the innermost outlining section in which the cursor lies when you are in a nested collapsed section Toggle All Outlining Toggles the collapsed state of all outlining nodes setting them all to the same expanded or collapsed state If there is a mixture of collapsed and expanded nodes all nodes will be expanded Stop Outlining Stops code outlining and remove all outlining information from source files Start Automatic Outlining Starts automatic code outlining and automatically displayed in supported source files Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Note that this item is disabled when this panel is in the mixed display mode Increase Line Indent
450. ntents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 25 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio e Tab select area Select a tab showing the source from which a message is output The debug tool uses the following tabs Tab name Description All Messages Displays the messages output by all components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including the debug tool This does not apply to the messages associated with execution of a rapid build Debug Tool Displays only the messages output by the debug tool out of those output by various components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including the debug tool Find and Replace Displays the results of global searches conducted from the Find and Replace dialog box Caution Even when anew message is output on some unselected tab the panel does not have its tabs automatically switched to show the new message In this case the relevant tab is marked with an asterisk at the beginning of its name indicating that a new message has been output R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 347 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Output Panel Only Items The Fi
451. ntering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable 0 to end address of address space address expression value Specify the debugged If the downloaded load module has overlay sections in it select the section to debug overlay section Default When the load module has no overlay sections No When the load module has overlay sections Yes How to Not changeable change Overlay sections Displays address groups in which overlay sections are present From the overlay sections defined in each address group select the section to debug priority section Note that this property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the debugged overlay section property item Default None How to File Start address End address items change Not changeable Priority section item By selecting from the drop down list Display Clicking the mark on any address group number displays the following detailed content information The section name selected in the Priority Section item is the section to be debugged File Start address End address Priority section Cautions 1 The contents of overlay section related settings are not saved in a project file After downloading the load module reset the section to be debugged 2 The information changed by an alteration of the Priority Section item is only debug information The debugger does not copy data of t
452. nters are used Operating Specify the operating clock frequency that is referenced when count values are converted into time frequency MHz Default Blank How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable 0 0001 to 999 999 in MHz value 8 Coverage Simulator Use coverage function Specify whether or not to use the coverage function Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes The coverage function is used value No The coverage function is not used Reuse coverage result Specify whether the coverage measurement result is loaded or saved when connected to or disconnected from the debug tool This property is displayed only when you selected Yes in the Use coverage function property Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes The coverage measurement result is loaded or saved value No The coverage measurement result is not loaded or saved 9 Stream I O Simulator Select stream I O Specify stream I O mode mode Default Simulator mode How to By selecting from the drop down list change Changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool however Specifiable Simulator mode A simulator inherent I O method is used Standard I O value and file I O can be used Emulator mode A
453. nts panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event and then perform the following operations Note that event name differs depending on the debug tool to use a E1 E20 After selecting the break event access related you wish to delete in the detailed information on the combination break click x button on the toolbar in the above panel see 2 17 5 Deleting events Each break event access related can also be deleted by clicking on the event mark on the disassembled text b Simulator After selecting the hardware break access related you wish to delete click x button on the toolbar in the above panel see 2 17 5 Deleting events 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 By setting more than one break event execution related and or access related in combination you can stop the program when the combination condition is satisfied by the set break event Only one combination break can be set Therefore when two or more break events have been set break event will be added consecutively to the detailed information of one combination break in the Events panel Combination conditions listed below can be specified for the combination break Table 2 7 Combination conditions for the combination break Combination Description conditions OR Break will occur when any one of the break event conditions is satisfied AND Break will occur when all the break event conditions are s
454. nu Disassemble Panel Only Items Context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 279 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open Choose Disassemble from the View menu and then select Disassemble 1 4 Description of each area 1 Event area The lines where an event can be set are displayed against a white background If a line is displayed against a gray background it means that no events can be set on that line If there is a currently set event on a line an Event mark denoting the type of event is displayed on the line This area has the following features a b c Setting clearing a breakpoint Click a place with the mouse where you want to set a breakpoint That way it is possible to set a breakpoint easily A breakpoint is set in an instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line position you ve clicked When a breakpoint is set an Event mark is displayed on the line where you ve set the breakpoint Also detailed information on the set breakpoint is reflected on the Events panel Note that if you ve done this operation at a place where any event mark is already displayed the event is deleted and no breakpoint is set Also note that an event can be set on only a line that is displayed against a white background For details on how to set a breakpoint see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Alte
455. nverts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace Window menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the Window menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Splits the active Editor panel horizontally Only the active Editor panel can be split Other panels will not be split A panel can be split up to two times Remove Split Context menu Title bar area Close Panel Removes the split view of the Editor panel
456. o change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop BRK instruction is executed Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a BRK instruction is executed This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation 2tENESAS Page 240 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 11 Instruction Decode Cache Simulator Cache the results of Specify whether or not to use the instruction decode cache function decoding instructions and accelerate simulation How to By selecting from the drop down list Default No change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Uses the decode cache function value No Does not use the decode cache function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 241 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download File Settings tab The Download File Settings tab displays detailed information for each ca
457. o no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Specify Mnemonic Specify a character string of instruction if needed as the search condition The character string specified here is searched from within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel Enter an instruction directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 149 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c d e f 9 Specifying the Access Address Specify an access address if needed as the search condition Enter an address value in hexadecimal directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The access address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by
458. o Move to a specified address Figure 2 83 Move to the Specified Address in Disassembled Result Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location ddress Symbol a Specifying Address Symbol Specify an address to which you want to move the caret Enter an address expression directly in the text box specifiable in up to 1024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 77 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Clicking the OK button The caret moves to the specified address 4 Moving to a symbol definition part The caret position can be moved to the address at which a symbol is defined Move the caret to an instruction that is referencing the symbol and then click the toolbar button Also if subsequently to the above operation you click the toolbar bal button the caret position is returned to the instruction that was referencing the symbol before the caret was moved 5 Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results The contents of disassembled results can be saved to a text file txt or CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool and saves it in the form in wh
459. o a symbol definition part 78 N Newline code 368 Number of trace frames 138 0 Offset value 270 281 329 371 Open File dialog box 438 Open Log File dialog box 432 Open Option Setting File dialog box 444 Open Watch Expression Data File dialog box 436 Operation mode 64 Option dialog box 420 General Build Debug category 427 General Font and Color category 422 OR 103 180 Output panel 346 Overlay section 55 85 P Pass count 172 176 342 397 404 410 Point trace 184 185 336 337 Point trace event 144 267 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 stENESAS Page 465 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Pointer type variables 302 309 Pop up display of variables 256 Port Setting dialog box 412 Power down mode 185 Print Address Range Settings dialog box 376 Print Preview window 378 Printf 336 337 Printf event 168 184 185 362 Priority section 85 86 Progress Status dialog box 419 Project Tree panel 211 Prolog of functions 302 Property panel 214 Connect Settings tab 217 Debug Tool Settings tab 227 Download File Settings tab 242 Hook Transaction Settings tab 245 Pseudo RRM 109 R Rapid build function 79 Realtime display update function 109 130 Real time RAM monitor function 109 136 Recycle mode 70 251 Register Action
460. o open On the Events panel move the caret to the hardware break of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the execution related event in trace of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the execution related event in timer result of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu E1 E20 On the Events panel move the caret to the execution related event in combination break of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 396 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an execution related event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays a category in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change a
461. o that the latest trace data will be displayed Note that this panel can be opened only when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace functions and Real time RAM Monitor RRM functions can be used only on a mutually exclusive basis Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on the panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Toolbar Figure A 34 Trace Panel E1 E20 w By Notation o Eke Ef Line Number Address Number Time h min s ms ps ns 25 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 39ps360ns 26 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 39ps680ns 27 27 OOhOOminOOs038ms1 40ps320ns 27 1 27 1 OOhOOminOOsO38ms1 40ps320ns 27 2 27 2 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns 27 3 27 3 OOh0OminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns 27 4 27 4 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns 27 5 27 5 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 40ps320ns 28 OOhOOminO0s038ms1 44ys160ns 29 OOhOOminOO0s038ms1 44ys480ns 30 OOhOOminOOs038ms1 44ys800ns sort c 3 Oxffff8624 sort c 37 Oxffff862a sort c 38 Oxffff862c sort c 38 Oxffff862e sort c 38 Osffff8630 sort c 38 Oxffff8632 sort c 40 Oxffff8634 sort c 41 Source Disassemble Address Data 0x000016d8 eee 0x00001 6de g_IntBuf j 56 MOV L g_IntBuf j 62 MOV L R1 R14 iffalil gt afi aap 64 MOV L R15 R2 iffalil gt afj aap 66 MOV L R4 R3 iffali gt ali gap 68 CMP R3R2 iffali gt ali gap lt lt lt g
462. oad The files specified in the project main project or sub project as the subject to build are automatically registered as the subject files to be downloaded not removable Figure A 41 Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list Download file property E Download file information e File Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No 1 File Specify the file to be downloaded Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the Download files property in the Download category on the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel and then click the button that is displayed Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during program execution Description of each area 1 Download file list area a Displaying a list This area displays a list of file names to download By default the file names specified in the project main project or sub project as the subject to build are displayed not removable Files are downloaded in the order in which they are listed here To add a new download file click the Add button in this area and then specify the download conditions for the file to be added in the Download file property area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 355 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1
463. oard change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable 1 to 1000 in MHz value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 221 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Connection with Emulator E1 E20 Emulator serial No Select the serial No of the emulator to be connected Note Default Serial No of the connected emulator How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value Depends on the emulator used Note When E1 JTAG or E1 Serial is selected in the debug tool used serial Nos of E1 emulator are enumerated Similarly when E20 Serial or E20 JTAG is selected serial Nos of E20 emulator are enumerated 5 Connection with Target Board E1 E20 This category displays detailed information on a state of connection with the target board and changes connection settings Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA Specify whethe r power is supplied from E1 to the target system The E20 does not support the power supply function Therefore the displayed property value is No Default How to change No For E1 By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool For E20 Not changeable Specifiable Yes Power is supplied value
464. ock source on writing internal flash memory No 4 gt E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 XKXXKXKKX 5 G Connection with Target Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 No Communications method JTAG JTAG clock MHz 16 5 6 gt E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address Fes 1000 Work RAM size bytes 1024 7 gt E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data 8 p E Extemal Flash External flash definition file Internal ROM RAM Property S AX Simulator Property 1 gt 2 Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes 1032 Size of internal RAM KBytes 64 2 gt i Endian Endian of CPU Little endian data S gt E Clock System clock ICLK frequency MHz 50 9 gt E Peripheral Function Simulation Peripheral function simulation module Peripheral clock rate Size of internal ROM KB ytes Displays the size of the internal ROM R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 219 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Internal ROM RAM Displays detailed information on internal ROM RAM Size of internal Displays the internal ROM size of a selected microcontroller ROM Kbytes Default For product
465. ode This area shows the instruction code corresponding to the source code Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific code displays the area title OpCode Label area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in the mixed display mode This area shows the label name when a label is defined for the address Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific label displays the area title Label Event area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened Trace or timer events can be set at lines that have valid addresses In addition the Event mark corresponding to an event that has been currently set is displayed Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific event mark displays the area title Event This area is provided with the following functions a Configuring events via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed Set Timer Start Event Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executed see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 253 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set Timer End Event Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when th
466. oding dialog box 367 Endian 21 23 36 43 115 Epilog of functions 302 Event area 253 280 Event management 173 Allowable number of valid events 183 Changing states of event setting 174 Deleting events 182 Displaying only a specific type of event 175 Editing detailed settings of events 175 Jump to an event address 175 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution 185 Event mark 95 140 160 164 336 Event type 337 Events panel 334 Execute programs 88 Execute a specified routine 91 Execute programs 88 Execute programs in steps 90 Execution only once 163 393 Execution related event 139 175 External flash memory 21 63 External flash memory dialog box 430 F Features 8 File I O 448 File monitor 257 Flash Development Toolkit 21 33 Floating point value 108 273 G General Build Debug category 427 General Font and Color category 422 General purpose registers 118 289 Global variable 123 Go to Here 89 184 Go to Line dialog box 415 Go to the Location dialog box 416 H Hardware break 94 183 184 185 336 337 Hex format 56 59 62 Hook transaction 245 Hot plug in connection 51 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 464 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Hot plug Adapter 51 l I O registe
467. of disassembly on each line always displayed in hexadecimal Also the current PC mark gt denoting the current PC position PC register value is displayed The address width is equal to that of the memory space of the microcontroller that is specified in the project Note that for the source text line during mixed display mode a line number xxx in a source file corresponding to the beginning address is displayed This area has the following features a Popup display When the mouse cursor is hovered over an address source line number the following information is displayed in a popup box Address Format lt load module name gt lt abel name gt lt offset value gt Example1 test1 out main 0x10 Example2 sub function 0x20 Source line number Format lt load module name gt lt file name gt lt line number gt Example1 test1 out main c 40 Example2 main c 100 Note The load module name is displayed only when there are multiple load module files that have been downloaded 3 Disassemble area Following the source text line concerned a disassembled result line is displayed as shown below Figure A 28 Contents of Displayed Disassemble Area When Displayed in Mixed Display Mode void change long a Label line _change Current PC line dood pp een Roy Ro for i O i lt 10 i Breakpoint set line 5 efo3 MOV L RA R3 7 efi4 MOV L Ri R4 Source text li
468. of file names that are not actually present on the Project Tree panel Background Standard color color Note The Default text and background colors depend on how Windows is set on the host machine used Here the default settings of Windows namely text color black and background color white are shown b Use default color The items selected in the Setting place area are displayed using the standard text color Specify any color for the text color of the items selected in the Setting place area The Font Color button is enabled c Use default background color The items selected in the Setting place area are displayed using the standard background color Specify any color for the background color of the items selected in the Setting place area The Background Color button is enabled R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 424 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Buttons Font Color Opens the Edit Colors Dialog Box making it possible to specify a text color for the item selected in the Setting place area However this button is disabled when the Use default color checkbox is checked Background Color Opens the Edit Colors Dialog Box making it possible to specify a background color for the item selected in the Setting place area However this button is disabled when the Use default background color ch
469. of the program or during execution of the tracer timer are as follows 1 ovo x Notes 1 Table 2 24 Types of Events that Can Be Set or Removed during Execution Type of event Software break Debug tool E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG Note1 Note2 A Simulator Hardware break execution related before execution Note2 Break event execution related after execution Break event access related Read Write Read Write Trace trace start trace end x Point trace x Timer result timer start timer end x Action Printf event Note1 Note2 A Action Interrupt event Possible Impossible during tracer execution Not supported Impossible Internal RAM area only Possible if program execution is momentarily halted Events cannot be set while the microcontroller is in a power down mode 3 Other precautions Here is the method for doing it No events can be set to local variables by selecting Go to Here from the context menu When debug information is available No events occur during step execution including Return Out as well as during program execution actuated If the program to be debugged is downloaded again and the position at which some existing event is set happens as a consequence of it to be in the middle of an instruction the relevant event needs to be reset The event set position always move
470. ogram execution Note that this property is displayed only when you ve selected Yes in the PC display during the execution property Default 500 How to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable An integer in the range 100 to 65500 Unit fractions below 100 ms rounded up value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 233 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Break E1 E20 This category displays detailed information on the break function and changes break settings Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E1 E20 5 System E1 E20 Specify the type of breakpoint that will be used first before the other when you set a breakpoint at the source line or execution address by clicking once with the mouse on the Editor panel Disassemble panel Default Hardware break How to change By selecting from the drop down list Specifiable value Software break A software breakpoint is set first Hardware break A hardware breakpoint is set first Displays detailed information on emulation system or changes settings made in it Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Specify whethe r or not to debug a program that involves rewriting the internal program ROM e g a program making use of ROM P E mode Default How to change By selecting from the drop down list Howeve
471. oint value gt Float Imaginary Imaginary number of single precision floating point lt Single precision floating point value gt Double Imaginary Imaginary number of double precision floating point lt Double precision floating point value gt Caution Nothing is displayed when the minimum size of a character code or a floating point value is greater than the number of bytes of display width of memory values x the number of view columns This area has the follo wing features R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2012 Page 273 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Edit character strings Character strings can be changed only when ASCII is specified for the character code You can edit a character string directly from the keyboard by simply moving the caret to the character string you wish to change When a character string is edited the altered part of it changes in display color While in this state hit the Enter key and the changed value is written into the target memory Pressing the Esc key before pressing Enter key cancels editing Caution Character strings displayed as floating point values cannot be edited b Searching character strings The Memory Search dialog box is opened to search for character strings by selecting Find from the context menu see 5 Searching for memory contents c Copying and pasting By select
472. ollowing cascaded menu to limit the event types to be displayed By default all items are selected Hardware Break Displays hardware break related events Software Break Displays software break related events Timer Event Displays timer related events Trace Event Displays trace related events Action Event Displays action events Printf event Built in Event Displays built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events Timer Settings Shows the following cascaded menu to make timer related settings However this is enabled only when a timer related event is selected Init Timer Initializes the timer to be used in a selected event not including the Run Break timer event Nanosecond Displays the result of a selected event measured by a timer in nanosecond ns units Microsecond Displays the result of a selected event measured by a timer in microsecond us units Millisecond Displays the result of a selected event measured by a timer in millisecond ms units Second Displays the result of a selected event measured by a timer in second s units Minute Displays the result of a selected event measured by a timer in minute min units Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret on it moved to the memory value corresponding to the address where a selected eventNotet is set Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disass
473. ollowing features a Registration of watch expressions CPU registers or categories can be registered as watch expressions in the Watch panel For details on how to do it see 1 Registering watch expressions Remarks 1 If watch expressions are registered for a category as the subject of registration all CPU registers belonging to the category are registered as watch expressions 2 The registered watch expressions will have scope specification automatically added 2 Value area This area displays the value of each CPU register and changes register values The desired notation numerical representation can be selected by clicking the appropriate toolbar button or by selecting from a context menu Also it is possible to select a display form that always adds hexadecimal equivalents to the ordinary display The meaning of marks displayed as CPU register values and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue Values of CPU registers which have had their values changed by the user Written into the target memory by hitting the Enter key Background color Standard color Text color Sienna Values of CPU registers whose values have changed as a result of program execution Background color LightYellow Highlighting is reset by ree
474. om No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution d Trace You can configure the trace function in this category e See 2 13 Collecting an Execution History for details on the trace function and this category configuration Coverage You can configure the coverage function in this category See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage function and this category configuration f Stream I O You can configure the stream I O for performing standard I O or file I O to from the user program in this category Figure 2 52 Stream I O Category E Stream 0 Select stream 1 0 mode Simulator mode Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 1 0 address rex 0 lt 1 gt Select stream I O mode In this property specify an I O mode from the drop down list in which mode you want standard I O to be executed To use files for the same low level interface routines assembly language part as the emulator specify Emulator mode By default Simulator mode is specified Remark File I O is usable only when Simulator mode is specified File I O cannot be used when Emulator mode is specified Caution This property cannot be changed when a simulator is connected R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 46 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Use stream I O functi
475. on R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 305 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Include Hexadecimal Adds the hexadecimal equivalent in bracket at the end of the value Value Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify character code ASCII Displays string variables in ASCII code Shift_JIS Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code default EUC JP Displays string variables in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays string variables in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret moved to the address indicated by the selected line R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 306 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Watch panel This panel displays the content of a registered watch expression or changes the displayed value see 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions Up to four instances of this panel can be opened at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Watch1 Watch2 Watch3 or Watch4 in the title bar allowing you to register delete or move a watch expression independently of the panel Watch expressions can also be registered from the Editor panel Disassemble panel Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel or IOR panel as well as from this p
476. on This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property Specify from the drop down list whether or not to use the stream I O function while simulator mode is in use Select Yes when using this function No is selected by default Stream I O address This property is displayed only when Simulator mode is specified in the Select stream I O mode property Specify the position at which stream I O starts while simulator mode is in use Directly enter the desired address 0x00000000 is specified by default g Execution mode You can configure the operation that is required in the event of simulation error or exception in this category Figure 2 53 Execution mode Category E Execution Mode lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Select execution mode Stop Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when access exception occurs Yes Stop when floating point exception occurs Yes Stop when interrupt occurs Yes Stop INT instruction is executed Yes Stop BRK instruction is executed Yes Select execution mode In this property you can select the execution mode from the following drop down list Stp Stops simulation default Continue Continues simulation Property items in the bottom section will be enabled Stop when undefined instruction exception is encountered This proper
477. on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running 2 Because of optimization by a compiler for blocks where variables or the subject to be operated on are not in use there may be no variable data in the stack and registers In this case no variables are displayed that are the subject to be operated on Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 31 Local Variables panel Local Variables Toolbar E Notation Hes Encoding 7 1 Value Type Byte Size Address Ox000016fc long i4 0x000016e0 7 imt 4 0x000016e8 4 imt 4 Rl REG 0 int 4 O0x000016dc l int 4 R6 REG This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Local Variables Panel Only Items Edit menu Local Variables Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Local Variable from the View menu Description of each area 1 Scope area This area selects the scope of local variables to be displayed from the drop down list The selectable items are as follows R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 301 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Item Operation Current Displays local variables at scope of the current PC value lt depth gt lt Func
478. on is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within the range specified in the Search Range area and Address area The searched spot is placed in selected state on Memory panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search for memory value is not performed Also if the Memory panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies settings for a search of memory value and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 375 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Address Range Settings dialog box When printing the content of the Disassemble panel specify an address range of the subject to be printed Figure A 53 Print Address Range Settings Dialog Box Print Address Range Settings Select a specifying type of the printing addresses Range of specified Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Disassemble panel choose Print from the File menu Description of each area 1 Range specification area To specify a range to be printed select one of the option buttons give
479. on load module PIC Offset which is an offset from the original address and PID Offset which is an offset to be set in the PID register selected at the time the load module was created 3 Download Download the master and the application load module file see 2 5 1 Execute downloading Debugging of the code and data in the ROM allocated to new addresses is now possible R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 82 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 1 Changing the allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function An application load module file can be added to the master through the Download files property under the Download category on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 86 Download Category E Download E Download files 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Download files Click on the button to open the Download Files dialog box Click on the Add button in the Download file list area of the Download Files dialog box and set up information on the application load module in the Download file property area File Specify the application load module file to be downloaded Specify the PIC PID offset Select Yes PIC Offset and PID Offset will appear PIC Offset Specify an offset from the original address allocated at the time the load module was created PID Offset Specify an offset to be set in the PID register selec
480. ondition from the context menu after selecting the interrupt event Description of each area 1 Interrupt Vector area Specify the interrupt vector by directly entering a corresponding number between 0 and 255 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 365 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Priority area RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 8 When 8 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Non RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 16 When 16 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Function buttons Button Function Finishes configuring the interrupt event and sets it to the line address at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Cancel Cancels the interrupt event setup and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 366 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Encoding dialog box This dialog box is used to select a file encoding Figure A 47 Encoding Dialog Box main c Encoding Available encodings 1146 IBM EBCDIC UK Euro 1147 IBM EBCDIC France Euro 1148 IBM EBCDIC International E uro 1 4 1149 IBM EBCDIC Icelandic Euro 1200 Unicode 1201 Unicode Big Endian 1250 Central Europ
481. onment such as breakpoints event configuration information file download information dis play condition position of the panel etc can be saved R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 8 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the debugging process using CubeSuite as well as main debugging functions 2 1 Overview Following shows the basic sequence of program debugging using CubeSuite 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Start CubeSuite Launch CubeSuite from the Start menu of Windows Remark For details on Start CubeSuite see CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start Set a project Create a new project or load the existing one Remark For details on Set a project see CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start Create a load module Once you are finished with the setting of the active project and the build execute the build to create a load module Remark For details on Create a load module with CC RX see CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Confirm the connection to a host machine Connect the debug tool E1 E20 or Simulator to be used to a host machine Select the debug tool to use Select the debug tool to be used in a project Remark The selectable debug tool differs depending on the microcontroller type to be used
482. onnect Settings tab of the Property panel When JTAG is specified CPU clock 100 MHz JTAG clock 16 5 MHz User program execution starts about 20 ms after the specified routine is executed before execution of the user program Execution of the specified routine starts about 20 ms after the stop of user program execution When FINE is specified CPU clock 100 MHz FINE baud rate 2000000 bps User program execution starts about 30 ms after the specified routine is executed before execution of the user program Execution of the specified routine starts about 40 ms after the stop of user program execution Execution of a specified routine starts in the supervisor mode Do not switch it to the user mode When executing a specified routine do not perform memory access download break point setting to the program area of the specified routine When executing a specified routine the 4 bytes indicated by the interrupt stack pointer will be used for the control on the debug tool side 10 Following restrictions will apply to the general registers and flags used in the specified routine ISP Register Once the specified routine is executed the value should be returned to the one at the start of the execution U Flag Switching to the user mode is prohibited while the specified routine is in execution Flag Interrupt is prohibited while the specified routine is in execution PM Flag Switching to the user mode is prohibited whi
483. ons How to open On the Debug Console panel select Log File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select a folder in which to save a log file 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Save in area and Save as type area 3 File name area Specify a file name under which data is saved 4 Save as type area This area displays the following types of files file types Log file log Text format default All file All the formats R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 432 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Save Saves a file under a specified file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 433 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Download File dialog box This dialog box selects a file to download Figure A 79 Select Download File Dialog Box Select Download File My Recent Documents My Documents gs My Computer e File name D m Function buttons My Network Files of type J Load module file abs 3 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the button in the File item in the Download file pro
484. opened only when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on the panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 29 CPU Register Panel CPU Register E Toolbar E Notation Heg Jf Control Registers E ISP 0x00001838 E usp ox000016a8 INTE Oxfff F S8154 Ej pc Oxfff fSsedd HH rsu 0x00130004 E BPC 0x00000000 E BPSW Oxdo0000000 EJ FINTV 0x00000000 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File Menu CPU Register Panel Only Items Edit Menu CPU Register Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose CPU Register from the View menu Description of each area 1 Register Name area This area displays register names in list form with the types of registers classified by category folder The meaning of each icon displayed here is described below Note that the category names or register names displayed here cannot be edited nor deleted Indicates that the register names belonging to this category are displayed Double clicking the icon or clicking the mark closes the category and hides the register names Indicates that the register names belonging to this category are hidden Double clicking the icon or clicking the mark opens the category and displays register names
485. opment Environment User s Manual Start b CPU Reset after download Specify from the drop down list whether or not to reset the CPU after a download is completed To reset the CPU select Yes default c Erase flash ROM before download E1 E20 Specify from the drop down list whether or not to erase the flash ROM program ROM before a download is executed To erase the flash ROM select Yes By default No is selected d Erase data flash ROM before download E1 E20 Specify from the drop down list whether or not to erase the data flash ROM before a download is executed To erase the data flash ROM select Yes By default No is selected e Automatic change method of event setting position If as debug work proceeds a program which has had changes added is downloaded again the position address at which a currently set event is set may happen to be in the middle of an instruction In such a case use this property to specify how the subject event should be handled Select one of choices from the drop down list below Move to the head of Resets the subject event at the beginning address of the instruction instruction Suspend event Leaves the subject event pending default However specification on this property applies to only the event set positions for which debug information is nonexistent For the event set positions that have debug information the event is always moved to the beginning of
486. options in this property vary depending on the microcontroller series and the specified value of Trace data type property as follows R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 40 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Microcontroller Data type Change options RX600 Series Branch Branch Data access Changeable only when program is halted Data access RX200 Series Branch Not changeable No is always displayed Data access Changeable only when program is halted lt 7 gt Trace clock count source MHz This property is displayed only when you ve specified Yes in the Output timestamp property Enter a count source with which a timestamp value is calculated from a count value To specify this enter a value directly in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 Note that if this property is blank the set value of the Operating frequency MHz property in the Timer category is used in place of the count source Cautions 1 You cannot change this property while the program is in execution 2 The property s set value is not reflected in the trace data that has already been collected The property you ve set is reflected beginning with the trace data that is collected after it is set g Timer You can configure the timer function in this category Figure 2 41 Timer Category RX600 Series E Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 Figure 2 42 Timer Category RX200 Series
487. orial c 40 void tutorial void 590 2 Tutorial cH47 p_sam g Sample 590 3 Tutorial c 48 init p_sam 2 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which values are displayed in the Line Number Address Address and Data areas can be freely changed by using the toolbar buttons shown below However these buttons are disabled during program execution Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal default Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary 3 Getting linked to other panels With the address of the currently selected line referenced as a pointer it is possible to have the corresponding place simultaneously displayed on other panels the focus not moved Clicking the toolbar button In starts a linked display on the Editor panel Clicking the toolbar button starts a linked display on the Disassemble panel Clicking the button again stops the linked display Remark When you select Jump to Source or Jump to Disassemble from the context menu the Editor panel or Disassemble panel opens with the caret on it moved to the source line or address corresponding to the address of the currently selected line the focus moved R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 147 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Cub
488. orm it is possible to use character strings ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP or Unicode FTF 8 UTF 16 to enter values Watch expressions can also be entered using ASCII characters When using ASCII characters to enter values Enter the letter A in the Value area of the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using numerals to enter values Enter the numeral 0x41 in the Value area of the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using character strings ASCII to enter values R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 129 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Set the display form of the character array str to ASCII and enter the letters ABC in the Value area gt gt The numerals 0x41 0x42 0x43 and 0x00 are written into the memory area to which the array str is mapped 7 Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution The Memory panel and Watch panel come with a realtime display update function that permits you to update display of or even rewrite the contents of memory or watch expressions in real time By enabling this realtime display update function it is possible to display or change the values of memory or watch expressions even while the program is running not just when the program is halte
489. ormat Note Precautions to take when using IAR compilers made by IAR Systems of Sweden Supported versions IAR Embedded Workbench for Renesas Ver 2 30 1 or above Supported options General options Byte order Little endian big endian double type size 32 bits 64 bits int type size 16 bits 32 bits Denormal number Handled as zero Data model Far Position dependence Off C C compilers Language C C and GNU C extended specification are not supported Derived languages of C C89 C99 LVA permission Off C inline semantic Off Type of CHAR Signed unsigned Optimization None low Output Generate debug information On Assemblers Language Discriminate user symbols between uppercase and lowercase On Output Generate debug information On Linkers Output Include debug information in output files On Precautions to take when debugging Static variables inside a file cannot be referenced on Watch panel etc The static variables defined in functions can be referenced It is only the current function that can be displayed on the Call Stack panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 56 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Ifa defined variable is composed of multiple registers the value of the subject variable cannot be displayed correctly Example 1 long long data 0x123456789abcdef0 A case where the variable data is mapped to the registers R7 and R8 Ex
490. osition breakpoint The program in execution can be stopped at the arbitrary position by setting a breakpoint A breakpoint can be set with a single click of the mouse You need to configure the type of breakpoints to use before setting a breakpoint This section describes the following Set the type of breakpoints break timing to use E1 E20 2 Seta breakpoint 3 Edit a hardware breakpoint 4 Delete a breakpoint Caution E1 E20 RX630 RX631 RX63N RX63T and RX210 Groups If a break is generated by an execution related break that is set to the WAIT instruction or an instruction immediately preceding it an error may occur To cause the target program to break at the WAIT instruction or an instruction immediately preceding it use a breakpoint 1 Set the type of breakpoints break timing to use E1 E20 The type of breakpoints break timing to use can be set in the Break E1 E20 category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel Figure 2 96 Break Category E1 E20 E Break E Tye of breakpoints to be preferentially used gt Hardware break Specify the type of preferential breakpoint breakpoint that can be set with a single click of the mouse in the Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used property Note however that if the number of the set breakpoints of the specified type exceeds the limit settable see 1 Allowable number of valid events a breakpoint of another type will be
491. ot set trace data collection starts when program execution starts Likewise if the trace end event is not set trace data collection ends when program execution stops 3 The event mark varies with the set states of events see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled Also if a new event is set at a place where an event has already been set the event mark 8 is displayed indicating that multiple events have been set 4 Simulator If either one of the trace start and trace end events set is Enabled the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab has its specification automatically changed to Yes with the trace function enabled 2 Combining multiple events E1 E20 If there are two or more events set for the trace start event collection of trace data can be made to start when the trace start event satisfies the following combination conditions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 142 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Also if there are two or more events set for the trace end event collection of trace data is finished when the condition for any one of trace end events is met Table 2 14 Combination Conditions for the Trace Start Event Combination condition Description Collection of trace data begins when any one of the trace start events set occurs i e its designated condition is met Collection of
492. otal number of trace start trace end event gt Note2 lt Start end gt lt Detailed information on trace start trace end gt Display example Start OR End OR Start End 6 Start After Execution main c 100 0x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x100 0x300 Start Write variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 End After Execution main c 200 0x100 End After Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 End Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Trace Generation condition Execution related Access related Simulator Display form Start OR End OR Start End lt Total number of trace start trace end events gt Note2 lt Start end gt lt Detailed information on trace start trace end gt Display example Start OR End OR Start End 6 Start Before Execution main c 100 0x300 Start Before Execution funcA 0x100 0x300 Start Write variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 End Before Execution main c 200 0x100 End Before Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 End Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Timer Result Generation condition Execution related Access related E1 E20 Display form Total lt Total execution time gt Start End lt Total number of timer starts timer ends gt Note 2 lt Total execution time gt lt Pass count gt lt Average execution time gt lt Maximum execution time gt lt Minimum execution time gt lt Start end gt lt Detailed information on timer start timer end gt Dis
493. ott 1 5 Baudrate srt Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Debug Console panel select COM Port from the context menu Description of each area 1 COM Port area Select a COM port to which communication is redirected If there are no COM ports available on the host machine this drop down list is blank 2 Baudrate area Select a baud rate at which communication is performed with the redirected COM port The drop down list displays the following baud rates If System is selected the baud rate set by the device manager applies System 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 115200 Function buttons Button Function Connect Disconnect Connects to default or disconnects from a COM port When connected to a COM port the button is labeled Disconnect When disconnected from a COM port the button is labeled Connect Cancel Nullifies COM port settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 412 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Scroll Range Settings dialog box Set a range in which the vertical scroll bar of the Memory panel or Disassemble panel is scrolled When an appropriate range is set the slider on the vertical scroll bar of the panel changes in si
494. outputs data onto the panel using the printf function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 193 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug Console HHH Data Input HHH a0 The element names of the array a in which data is stored are output onto the panel by the printf function in the main function When data is entered from the keyboard onto the panel the data is read in by the scanf function in the main function Debug Console HHH Data Input HHH 0 0 a4 i a 1 21468 a 2 9988 xxx The sorted data is output onto the panel by the printf function in the main function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 194 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If you disable the local echo back function in Echo Back selected from the Debug Console panel s context menu the character strings you have entered will not be displayed local echo back will not be performed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 195 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 20 About Input Value This section describes consideration to take when inputting values in each panel and dialog box 2 20 1 Input rule Following is the rules for input to each panel and dialog box 1 Character set Character sets that are allowed to input are as follows Table 2 26 List of Character Set Character Set Outline ASCII 1 byte alphabets numbers s
495. p information is calculated based on the set value of the Trace clock count source MHz property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab and a value counted with the inherent count source of each microcontroller used The counter width in bits of each microcontroller series is as follows RX600 series 20 bits RX200 series 24 bits Note that if the count value of the microcontroller overflows an overflowed content is corrected before timestamp information is displayed However if an overflow occurs twice or more between successive trace frames correct timestamp information will not be displayed in the subsequent trace data 4 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series A timer measurement counter is used for the count source of the microcontroller Therefore if a timer measurement event is set on the Events panel expected timestamp information will not be displayed 5 E1 E20 The timestamp information differs in count sources with each microcontroller RX610 RX621 RX62N RX62T and RX62G Groups If EXTAL x 8 lt 100 MHz Count frequency for timestamp information EXTAL x 8 If EXTAL x 8 gt 100 MHz Count frequency for timestamp information EXTAL x 4 RX630 RX631 RX63N and RX63T Groups When using EXTAL Selected clock source 2 or selected clock source x 1 when division ratio of 1 1 is set by SCKCR ICK When not using EXTAL Selected clock source x 1 RX210 Group ICLK timer
496. p watch on values Also the watch expressions permit display of values to be updated successively even while the program is under execution see section 7 Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution The Watch panel is opened by choosing Watch from the View menu and then selecting Watch 1 4 Up to four pieces of Watch panels can be opened at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Watch1 Watch2 Watch3 and Watch4 in the title bar The respective Watch panels have their watch expressions registered and managed individually and saved as user information for the project For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Watch panel is described R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 125 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 122 Displaying the Contents of Watch expression Watch panel Watch1 wal X Notation Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo F abo ADDPR IOR 0x00 IOR 1 Ox00088052 Toolbar 1 Ox00000001 int 4 R6 REG 0Ox00000006 General Registers 4 E R4 REG Ox00000007 General Registers 4 g RS REG 0x00001700 General Registers 4 Watch area Value area Type Byte Size area Address area Memo area Following methods of operation are described here x Registering watch expressions 2 Putting the registered watc
497. panded item of a watch expression is selected Select All Selects all character strings when text is in edit mode If the text is in other than edit mode all watch expressions and categories are placed in selected state Rename Edits the name of a selected watch expression or category Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Context menu Access Break Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected This item is usable when the selected watch expression is a global variable a static variable inside a function a static variable inside a file or an I O register multiple selection not accepted Shows the following cascaded menu to set access related break events see 1 Set a break event access related to a variable I O register Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a read access break event in a selected watch expression Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a write access break event in a selected watch expression Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a read write access break event in a selected watch expression Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a read access break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a write acc
498. panel Disassemble panel Cancel Cancels the Printf event setup and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 364 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Interrupt event setting tab Simulator You can set an interrupt event in this tab see 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator An interrupt event is a function with which you can generate an interrupt request at a specified point When an interrupt event is set an interrupt request will occur immediately before the execution of an instruction for which the event is set Once the interrupt request is accepted by the CPU interrupt exception will take place Figure A 46 Action Events Dialog Box Interrupt event setting Tab Action Events peme Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Interrupt Vector 1 Priority 2 l Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set an interrupt event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set an interrupt event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit C
499. panel and Watch panel see 3 Changing memory contents and 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 111 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The memory values watch expressions updated by the pseudo RRM function are highlighted in pink on the Memory panel whereas those updated by the RRM function are highlighted as follows in accordance with the access status The font and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Access Condition Display Example ic 9 Read or fetch Write ae aor Note The watch expression value will be displayed as in the event of Lost on the Watch panel Figure 2 109 Example of Memory Display by the Pseudo RRM Function Memory Panel E1 E20 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ta b te td D eD eD eD M OO J 9 3 a e CO e an9 ea Fam oaJ oa oaJ ee a 8 8 d Lolo uu gt 2 2 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop 0 1 2 3 4 a e e e e s aJ and ond ae s s a o TEA aJ and ond ond R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 112 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 111 Example of Memory Di
500. part Simulator To execute stream I O in simulator mode you need to edit the content of a file lowlvl src for low level interface routines assembly language part to make it usable for a simulator Replace the contents of lowlvl src with the following sample code for the simulator R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 191 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS GLB _charput GLB _charget EQU Oh SECTION _charput IO_BUF R2 R1 R2 1220000h R1 PARM R3 R2 R3 R3 R2 SIM IO R3 _charget MOV 1210000h R1 MOV IO_BUF R2 MOV PARM R3 MOV R2 R3 MOV R3 R2 MOV SIM_IO R3 JSR R3 MOV L IO _BUF R2 MOVU B SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 SECTION B_ 1 DATA BLKB END 3 Selecting the debug tool to be used To select or switch the debug tool use the context menu shown by right clicking on the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Remark For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 192 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 5 6 7 8 Changing settings in the Property panel Simulator When the simulator is to be used the following settings must be made in the Stream O Simulator category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel Figure 2 171 Str
501. pecified in the project This area cannot be edited Caution The offset value that has been set is automatically changed in accordance with the number of view columns in the Memory value area 3 Memory value area This area displays or changes memory values for the program mapped to the microcontroller To specify the display notation display width of memory values and the number of view columns use the toolbar buttons or select Notation Size Notation and View from the context menu respectively see 2 Changing the display form of values The following table describes the meaning of marks and colors used to represent memory values The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue Memory values that have been changed by the user Pressing the Enter key will write them into the target memory Background color Standard color 00 Text color Standard color Memory values at addresses for which symbols are defined Underlined Background color Standardcolor Watch expressions can be registered See Register watch expressions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 270 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Example display default Text color Sienna Background color LightYellow APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description Memo
502. perty area of the Download Files dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area From the drop down list select the folder which contains the file you wish to download 2 File list area This area displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of a file you wish to download R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 434 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of a file to download file type from the drop down list below Load module file abs Load module format default Hex file hex Hex format S record file mot S Record format Binary data file bin Binary data format All files All file formats Function buttons Open Adds a specified file to the Download Files dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 435 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Watch Expression Data File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a file that imports watch expressions to the Watch panel Figure A 80 Open Watch Expression Data File Dialog Box Open Watch Expression Data File Look in sample EG My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 93 My Computer TNS L Function buttons gt F
503. pied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Pastes a copied character string from the clipboard to the caret position However this is enabled only when character strings are being edited Select All Selects all items Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected Context menu Register to Watch1 Registers a selected register name or category to the Watch panel Watch 1 Copy When in editing mode copies a selected character string to the clipboard If a line is selected a register item or category on the line is copied to the clipboard Note that a copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed AutoSelect Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in predetermined notation default Hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in hexadecimal Signed Decimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in signed decimal Unsigned Decimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in unsigned decimal Octal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in octal Binary Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item i
504. play example Total 10ms Start End 6 Total 10ms Pass Count 5 Average 2ms Max 4ms Min ims Start After Execution main c 100 0x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x30 0x100 Start Write variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 End After Execution main c 100 0x300 End After Execution funcA 0x50 0x100 End Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 340 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Type of event Timer Result Generation condition Execution related Access related Simulator Display form APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displayed content Note1 Total lt Total execution time gt Start End lt Total number of timer starts timer ends gt Note 2 lt Total execution time gt lt Pass count gt lt Average execution time gt lt Maximum execution time gt lt Minimum execution time gt lt Start end gt lt Detailed information on timer start timer end gt Display example Total 10ms Total 10ms Max 4ms Start Write End Before Execution Start End 2 Pass Count 5 Average 2ms Min 1ms 0x100 0x101 0x10 main c 100 0x300 variable1 Point Trace Generation condition Access related Display form 1 lt Generation condition gt lt Variable name gt lt Address of variable gt Display example variable1 0x100 Display form 2 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Addres
505. plays the value of a selected watch expression in per variable predetermined notation default See Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default B Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal kE Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Bin Displays the value of a selected item in binary NE Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII code D Ss Displays the value of a selected item in Float However this is enabled only when a selected watch expression consists of 4 byte data Displays the value of a selected item in Double However this is enabled only when a selected watch expression consists of 8 byte data Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in However this does not apply when the value is displayed in hexadecimal File Menu Watch Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the Watch panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Watch Data Saves the content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see c Saving the values of watch expressions Note that if this item is selected
506. plications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products who distributes disposes of or otherwise places the product with a third party to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2012 4 How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integr
507. pressions using a symbol can be specified as watch expressions 4 If there exist a C C variable a CPU register and an I O register with the same name that are registered without specifying scope the symbols are resolved in the order given below to display values C C variable gt CPU register gt I O register 5 If there exist a local variable and a global variable with the same name that are registered by only a symbol name without specifying scope the symbols are resolved based on the scope of the current PC value to display values 6 If a watch expression is registered from the IOR panel or CPU Register panel the watch expression will have scope specification automatically added to it 7 Ifthe letter I alone is specified as a watch expression it is interpreted as an imaginary keyword To acquire the value of a register I add REG after the register lt 3 gt Registering from another application Select a character string representing a C C variable CPU register I O register or assembler symbol from an external editor or the like and then perform one of the following operations Drag and drop the subject character string into this area on any Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Copy the subject character string to the clipboard and then select Paste on the Edit menu in this area on any Watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Cautions 1 Up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one Watch panel If an attempt is ma
508. property is displayed only when you selected Yes in the Update display during the execution property Default 500 How to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable An integer in the range 100 to 65500 Unit fractions below 100 ms rounded up value Enable the automatic Specify whether RRM area is automatically set update of realtime Note that this property is displayed only when Realtime RAM Monitor is specified in the Usage of display trace function property and also Yes is specified in the Update display during the execution E20 JTAG RX600 property Series Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Realtime display update is automatically set value No Realtime display update is not set 3 Register Change PC value display in the Status bar and display updating intervals during program execution PC display during the Specify whether the PC value is displayed during program execution execution Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes PC value is displayed in the Status bar during execution value No PC value is not displayed in the status bar during execution Running is displayed in the Status bar Display update interval Specify an update interval in 100 ms units for the PC value which is displayed in the Status bar for PC ms during pr
509. ps simulation Continue Continues simulation Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an undefined instruction exception occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a privileged instruction exception occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation 2tENESAS Page 239 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Stop when access exception occurs APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an access exception occurs This property is displayed only when there is MPU module in the Peripheral function simulation module property and also Stop is specified in the Select
510. r 1 133 4 4 is 4 Function buttons ok This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Go To On the Editor panel select Go To from the context menu Description of each area 1 Line number valid line range area valid line range shows the range of valid lines in the current file Directly enter a decimal value as the number of the line you want to move the caret to You can also enter a symbol in this area By default the number of the line where the caret is currently located in the Editor panel is displayed Function buttons Button Function OK Places the caret at the start of the specified source line Cancel Cancels the jump and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 415 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box Move the caret to a specified position Figure A 69 Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location 1 Address Symbol Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Choose Go To from the Edit menu On the Disassemble panel select Go To on the context menu On the IOR panel
511. r changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value Yes A program that involves rewriting the internal program ROM is debugged A program that involves rewriting the internal program ROM is not debugged Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Specify whethe r or not to debug a program that involves rewriting the internal data flash e g a program making use of data flash P E mode Default No How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value Yes A program that involves rewriting the internal data flash is debugged No A program that involves rewriting the internal data flash is not debugged Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Specify whether or not to run a specified routine immediately before program execution Default No How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes A specified routine is run immediately before program execution No A specified routine is not run immediately before program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 234 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Routine to run Specify the address to be executed im
512. r both the combination break and trace start event Similarly Sequential cannot be used as the combination condition for both the combination break and trace start event When AND and Sequential are selected as the combination condition for either of the combination break or trace start event only OR can be selected for the other b Editing the subject event Change the order of events in the Object event list using the Up or Down button These buttons are enabled only when you ve selected Sequential for the combination condition and moved the caret to an event in the Object event list R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 180 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 163 Changing the Order of Events in the Object Event List Sequential Combination Condition Break Combination Seaueni Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 Oxffff865t 2 After Execution sort cH36 Oxffff860e 3 Read g CharBuf 0 1000 041000 0x55 4 Write g_IntBuf 0x142c 0x142f Oxb Reset event Event Rel c Editing the reset event To register a reset event click the R Event button This button is enabled only when you ve selected Sequential for the combination condition and moved the caret to an event in the Object event list Also if you want to clear registration of a reset event click the Release button This button is enabled when you move the
513. r intended nor authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations etc or may cause serious property damages nuclear reactor control systems military equipment etc You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics prod
514. race data to be collected Specify Yes when you want timestamp to be output Caution E20 Serial RX200 Series If Branch is specified in the Trace data type property timestamp cannot be output If you want it to be output specify Data access g Trace clock count source MHz Enter a count source for the timestamp in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 Note that if this property is blank the set value of the Operating frequency MHz in the Timer category is used in place of the count source R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 137 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 For Simulator Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Figure 2 132 Trace Category Simulator E Trace Use trace function No Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time No Trace memory size frames 64K a Use trace function Specify from the drop down list whether or not to use the trace function To use the trace function specify Yes by default No is selected b Clear trace memory before running Specify from the drop down list whether or not to clear initialize the trace memory once before the trace function begins To clear specify Yes default Remark The trace memory can be forcibly cleared by clicking the button in the Trace panel toolbar c
515. rce level Caution If while the Trace panel is displayed in the Disassemble display mode a source level search is performed on this tab the subject data cannot be searched correctly To perform a source level search make sure the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure A 57 Trace Search Dialog Box Source Level Tab Trace Search Instruction Level Search object The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable Search condition Source and Line Search range Number v Function buttons search Backwart Sear orward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the toolbar button on the Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 385 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search object area Select the subject to search from the option buttons below The execution part is retrieved specifying Searches the specified source for an executed part default the source line Only Source and Line is valid as the search condition The execution part is re
516. rd file mot S record file b For the CPU Register panel Watch panel IOR panel Call Stack panel and Local Variables panel Following file types are displayed The panel content is saved to a file in the file format selected from the drop down list Text file txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated csv CSV formatNote Note Each piece of data are separated with a comma when saved To avoid the problem of an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file c For the Output panel Following file types are displayed Data can be saved in only text format Text file txt Text format default Function buttons Saves a file with a specified file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 441 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Data Save File dialog box Select a file in which to save the data Figure A 83 Select Data Save File Dialog Box Select Data Save File Look in sample 5 My Recent Documents T Desktop My Documents 58 My Computer a F File name My Network pE i Function buttons Files of type Text files txt This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Cl
517. rea and rearranges only property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Address Address Displays the address at which an execution related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event modifying Not changeable 2 Pass Count Pass count Specify a pass count in decimal The relevant event occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values E1 E20 1 to 256 Simulator 1 to 16 383 Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including access related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series No values other than 1 can be specified for the pass count R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 397 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Buttons Functions Applies detailed settings made in this dialog box to execution related events before closing the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 398 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03
518. reakpoints to be preferentially used property in the Break E1 E20 category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel c Changing the status of breakpoints via the menu The events status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Breakpoint Changes the selected breakpoint state to an Enabled state Event occurs when the specified condition is met When the event mark RS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are enabled Disable Breakpoint Changes the selected breakpoint state to a Disabled state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met When the event mark RS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are disabled Delete Breakpoint Deletes the selected breakpoint When the event mark 3 which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are deleted View Details in Event Panel Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event d Pop up display By hovering the mouse cursor over the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are a pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each event up to a m
519. referentially default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 24 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS e System You can configure the emulation system in this category For more information regarding the execution of a specified routine before the execution and after the break of a program see 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 Figure 2 20 System Category E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops lt 1 gt Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal program ROM area such as those that use ROM P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E1 lt 2 gt Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal data flash area such as those that use data flash P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E1 lt 3 gt Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Specify whether to execute a specified routine before executing the user program Caution You
520. ression by any value will cause the break to occur Read Write E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set R W Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu a break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading or writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading or writing the selected watch expression by any value will cause the break to occur R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 101 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark A watch expression within the current scope can be specified To target a watch expression outside the current scope select a watch expression with a specified scope Figure 2 104 Example of Setting a Break Event Access related on a Watch expression E1 E20 Watchl a JE 7 3 x Notation Value ae Byte Size Address Memo ah Set Read Combination Break to A Set Write Combination Break to CONE a Combination Break to Pe From the context menu above the watch expression E Refresh g_IntBuf select Access Break gt gt Set Write Timer Settings Periodic Updating ra Force Read Value Combination Break to Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press the Enter key Here the program
521. ressions Perform this operation on the Watch panel After selecting the watch expression for which you want to set an event multiple selections not accepted perform the following operation from the context menu However the watch expressions you can select are only global variables static variables inside a function static variables inside a file and I O registers Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a trace event access related has been set for the selected watch expression and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 141 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Access type Operation Read write Trace start event Choose Record Start R W Value from Trace Output and then hit the Enter key Trace end event Choose Record End R W Value from Trace Output and then hit the Enter key If a value is specified in the text box of the menu at this time collection of trace data is started finished only when the specified value is used for the reading or writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading or writing the selected watch expression by any value will start finish the collection of trace data Cautions 1 Only the watch expressions in current scope are selectable To use any watch expression outside the current scope for a trace event select a watch expression that has its
522. rial for a debug tool in the Project Tree panel will display FINE in this property and specifying RX E1 JTAG will display JTAG You cannot change the value of this property For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use JTAG clock MHz From the drop down list select the baud rate JTAG clock to be used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when JTAG is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 16 5 default 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Depending on the length or the method of JTAG signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected JTAG clock In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication FINE baud rate bps From the drop down list select the baud rate FINE baud rate to be used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when FINE is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 2000000 default 750000 500000 250000 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Depending on the length or the method of FINE signal wiring on the target sy
523. ring program execution This property can be changed only when the program is not running Caution E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX200 Series The real time RAM monitor function is not supported As such the property value is displayed as Trace and becomes unchangeable lt 2 gt Operation after trace memory is full Select the trace acquisition mode from the following drop down list Overwrite trace memory and continue Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory execution is full Stop trace Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 39 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as Overwrite trace memory and continue execution and becomes unchangeable lt 3 gt Trace data type Select the type of data for which trace is to be acquired from the drop down list The type of data that can be selected differs depending on the series of the microcontroller Following data types are displayed in the drop down list RX600 series Branch Branch Data access Data access RX200 series Branch Data access Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as Data access and be
524. ring states of various events Right clicking any event mark brings up the menu shown below allowing you to change the state of a selected event Enable Event Changes the state of a selected event to an Enabled state When a specified condition is true the event concerned occurs Note that if the event mark FS denoting that there are multiple events set is selected all of the set events are enabled Disable Event Changes the state of a selected event to a Disabled state Even when a specified condition is true the event concerned does not occur Note that if the event mark FS denoting that there are multiple events set is selected all of the set events are disabled Delete Event Deletes a selected event Note that if the event mark FS denoting that there are multiple events set is selected all of the set events are deleted View Details in Event Panel Opens an Events panel that shows detailed information on a selected event Popup display When the mouse cursor is hovered over an Event mark the event name of the event detailed information on it and the comment added to the event are displayed in a popup box Note that if there are multiple events set at the relevant place information on each event for up to three is enumerated 2 Address area R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 280 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area displays the beginning address
525. ritten Caution E1 RX630 RX631 RX63N RX63T RX210 When Yes is selected if internal flash ROM is rewritten by the debugger while the FlashlF clock FCLK of the microcontroller is outside of the guaranteed operating range that is while operating with LOCO or subclock the E1 will switch the clock source After rewriting to the internal flash ROM is completed the clock will be restored to the previous clock source Note that the operating frequency of the peripheral clock will change during internal flash memory rewriting because the clock source is switched The clock manipulation enabling setting takes effect when the internal flash ROM is rewritten after program execution or step execution Note that the clock source is forcibly switched regardless of the clock manipulation enabling setting if FCLK is outside of the guaranteed operating range immediately after the debug tool is activated or when the CPU Reset button is clicked c Connection with Emulator You can configure the connection between E1 and the host machine in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 Figure 2 11 Connection with Emulator Category E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E1 XXXXXXXXX lt 1 gt Emulator serial No Serial numbers of all connected E1 emulators are displayed in the drop down list Select the one to be connected to the target system The drop down list is updated ever
526. rogram is in execution For details see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution In the case shown below caution is required when editing the memory values Examples 1 When the maximum value of the displayed bit width is exceeded If while memory is displayed in decimal 8 bits you edit the displayed value 105 by entering 3 for 1 then the altered value becomes 127 which is the maximum value 2 When is entered in the middle of a numeric value If while memory is displayed in signed decimal 16 bits you edit the displayed value 32768 by entering in the middle of it like 32 68 then numerals 3 and 2 change to spaces and the altered value becomes 68 3 When a space character is entered in the middle of a numeric value If while memory is displayed in decimal 16 bits you edit the displayed value 32767 by entering a space in the middle of it like 32 67 then numerals 3 and 2 change to spaces and the altered value becomes 67 4 When the same value is entered Even when you enter the same value as the current memory value the specified value is written into memory 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution The Memory panel and Watch panel come with a realtime display update function that permits you to update display of or even rewrite the contents of memory or watch expressions in real time By enabling this realtime display update function it is po
527. rom the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the entire content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save the values of watch expressions see 9 Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 315 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 4 5 Type Byte Size area This area displays the type information of watch expressions in the form shown below Watch expression Display form Single CPU register lt Type of CPU register gt lt SizeN 1 gt Single I O register lt Type of I O register gt lt Access attribute gt lt Access type gt lt SizeNe 1 gt Access attribute R Read only W Write only R W Read write Access type Ae Accessible in 1 bit 8 Accessible in byte 16 Accessible in half word 32 Accessible in word Not determinable 2 Other than above lt Type of watch expression as determined by C compilerN 2 gt lt SizeN 1 gt Notes 1 The sizes of watch expressions are expressed in byte units For bit ORs and C bit fields however the sizes are displayed in bit units with the bit notation added at the end of the value 2 Watch expressions are handled as having the type indicated here when they are compiled In the case of double long double type type name is output in accordance with Precision of the dou
528. rom the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 387 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 This dialog box is used to change the detailed information on combination condition for the combination break or for
529. routines provided by the debug tool implemented in it see 2 19 Using the Debug Console Remark Simulator For details about the I O functions provided by the simulator see APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS a Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Debug Console panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Debug Console panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 25 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 349 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Debug Console panel only items The Edit menu items provided exclusively on the Debug Console panel are as follows The other items are shared Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Paste Inserts the content of the clipboard into the caret position Select All Selects all of the character strings displayed on this panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 350 of 471 Oct 01 20
530. rs the condition holds true Word When an access in word size occurs the condition holds true Long word When an access in long word size occurs the condition holds true lt 3 gt Compare condition Specify a data comparison condition The comparison condition differs with each debug tool as follows E1 E20 Specified value When data comparison conditions match the condition holds true Any other value When data comparison conditions do not match the condition holds true Simulator Equal When data and specified value match the condition holds true Not equal When data and specified value do not match the condition holds true Inverse sign Note 1 When the sign is inverted between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time the condition holds true Difference Note 1 When the difference between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time exceeds a specified value the condition holds true Greater than gt When data is greater than a specified value the condition holds true Less Than lt When data is smaller than a specified value the condition holds true Greater than or equal to gt When data is equal to or greater than a specified value the condition holds true Less Than or equal to lt When data is equal to or smaller than a specified value the condition holds true Inside the rang
531. rs protected against read 297 ID code 20 Initialization data 115 372 I O functions 448 FCLOSE 454 FEOF 458 FGETC 455 FOPEN 452 FPUTC 456 FSEEK 459 FTELL 461 GETC 450 PUTC 451 Instruction code 281 Instruction level debugging 67 Internal static variables 302 Interrupt event 170 184 185 336 338 409 IOR panel 294 J Jump to subroutine instruction 91 L Label line 281 Label name 329 Line assembly 80 282 Little endian 115 Load module file 53 173 Load module format 56 Local variable 111 123 185 Local Variables panel 301 Lock bit 65 Lost 112 Low level interface routine 190 M Main area 254 Main window 203 Measuring the execution time 155 Measuring execution time from start to stop 155 Measuring execution time in a section 157 Range of measurable time 164 Setting the timer measurement operation 155 Memory access 23 36 45 Memory Initialize dialog box 372 Memory mapping 22 35 44 352 Memory Mapping dialog box 352 Memory panel 269 Memory Search dialog box 374 Memory settings 44 Memory type 352 Menu bar 204 Methods to register watch expressions 126 Mixed display mode 68 147 248 329 Motorola S format 56 59 62 Moving to a specified address 77 Moving to a specified line 73 Moving t
532. rupt priority will be valid 3 Edit interrupt event You can edit an interrupt event which has already been set When editing click the target interrupt event in the Events panel and select Edit Condition from the context menu This will open the Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator in which you can edit the items When finished click OK a Edit Pass Count Directly enter a value between 1 and 16383 The event will be encountered when the event conditions meeting the number of specified passages are satisfied b Edit Interrupt You can edit an interrupt vector and the priority order The procedure for editing is the same as that for Interrupt event setting tab Simulator in the Action Events dialog box see a Specify Interrupt Vector and b Specify Priority R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 172 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Event Management An event refers to a specific state of the microcontroller in debugging like the address 0x1000 was fetched or data was written to the address 0x2000 CubeSuite uses this event as an action trigger of the debug function to break at a given place start or stop a trace operation or start or stop a timer measurement This section describes how to manage those events The events are managed collectively on the Events panel shown below Choose Event from the View menu The Events panel per
533. rward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel To specify a global variable name before performing a search Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Specifying the Variable Name Enter a variable name you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Specifying the Kind Select the type of access Reference Substitution default Reference or Substitution from the drop down list Specifying the Value Enter an accessed variable value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The variable value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank the fixed variable value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 152 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Spe
534. rwriting the older trace data after the trace memory is execution full Stop trace Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full Stop Breaks after the trace memory is full lt 3 gt Trace data type Select the type of data for which trace is to be acquired from the drop down list The type of data that can be selected differs depending on the series of the microcontroller Following data types are displayed in the drop down list RX600 series Branch Branch Data access Data access RX200 series Branch Data access lt 4 gt Output timestamp Specify whether timestamp information is added to the trace data to be collected The change options in this property vary depending on the microcontroller series and the specified value of Trace data type property as follows Microcontroller Data type Change options RX600 Series Branch Branch Data access Changeable only when program is halted Data access RX200 Series Branch Not changeable No is always displayed Data access Changeable only when program is halted lt 5 gt Trace clock count source MHz This property is displayed only when you ve specified Yes in the Output timestamp property Enter a count source with which a timestamp value is calculated from a count value To specify this enter a value directly in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 26 of 471 Oct 01 2012 Figure 2 21 Trace Category E Trace Operation after tr
535. ry values that have changed as a result of program execution Note Clicking the button in the toolbar resets the highlighting Text color DeepPink Background color Standard color Memory values for which the Realtime display update function is enabled Text color Standard color Background color PaleGreen Read Fetch Current access condition of the memory value when the Realtime display update function is enabled Text color Standard color Background color Orange Write Text color Standard color Background color PaleTurquoise Read and Write Text color White Background color LightGray Lost Text color Gray Background color Standard color Memory values of not readable area Text color Gray Background color Standard color Areas not memory mapped or areas not rewritable e g IO register and I O protection areas or when acquisition of memory values failed Text color Standard color Background color Standard color When areas other than the Realtime display update area are selected for display during program execution or when acquisition of memory values failed Note Applicable only to the memory values in the address area that was displayed on the Memory panel immediately before the program execution As the comparison is made before and after the program execution highlighting will not
536. s Notes 1 Displayed on only the Editor panel and Disassemble panel This applies when there is at least one enabled event among multiple events 2 This applies when there is no enabled event but at least one disabled event among multiple events 3 This applies when all of multiple events are made pending R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 336 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Event name The type of an event and its ID number are displayed as an event name The ID number is automatically assigned beginning with 0001 for each event type Even when an event that was once set is deleted the other events are not reassigned ID numbers The displayed event types are as follows Table A 12 Event Types Event Type Description Hardware Break BreakNote This event is such that the debug tool successively checks break condition during program execution and when the condition is met causes the program to break gt See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint gt See 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Software Break BreakNote1 E1 E20 This event is such that instruction code at an address where a break is to occur is rewritten with a break instruction so that when the instruction is executed the program is made to break gt See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary positio
537. s Condition Compare condition No conditions E Data Condition Access type Read Write Access size Long word Compare condition Outside the range lt Values lt 1 Compare datal HEX 55 Compare data2 H FO Specify the data mask No Sign Signed 2 4 Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to the access related event in trace of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the access related event in point trace of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the access related event in timer result of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu E1 E20 On the Events panel move the caret to the access related event in combination break of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu Simulator On the Events panel move the caret to the access related hardware break of which you wish to change the detailed information then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESA
538. s dialog box enter the desired transaction directly from the keyboard You can use one of the following formats for specifying the desired transaction Format 1 Overwrites the O register contents with numeric values I O register name Numeric value Format 2 Overwrites the CPU register contents with numeric values CPU register name Numeric value Format 3 Executes a script file designated by Python script path absolute path or relative path using project folder as a base Source Python script path Remarks 1 When specifying the transaction add at the top of the line to comment it out 2 The space can be substituted by a tab character You can enter up to 64 characters for one transaction and can specify up to 128 transactions for each property One line in the Text area in the Text Edit dialog box corresponds to one transaction When finished with specifying the transaction click OK to reflect it in the Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 188 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 169 Example of Hook Transaction Setting Text Edit Text CRC CRCDOR 0x0000 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 189 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 19 Using the Debug Console This section describes how to use the debug console for standard I O To perform some operation using a program s internal standard library f
539. s in the Access Memory While Running and Trace categories on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel shown below make settings in Table 2 9 through Table 2 11 according to the purpose of use of the realtime display update function Usage of trace function Real time RAM monitor E20 JTAG RX600 Series Mark Properties in Access Memory While Setting Value Note Running Category Access by stopping execution Access by stopping execution stopping execution INo defaut default INo default RRW DMM functions enabled functions enabled Enable the automatic update of realtime Yes default SS RX600 Series display e Access by stopping execution Access by stopping execution stopping execution five Pseudo RRM function enabled RRM function enabled Update display during the execution Yes default Display update interval ms Integer number between 100 and 65500 a For Read Table 2 9 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Read by Pseudo RRM Function E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG Internal ROM C D Entire range Data flash Target memory Emulation memory CPU register a available I O register R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 110 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 10 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Read by RRM Function E20 JTAG RX600 Series Simulator Inter
540. s not occur The event can be enabled by checking its checkbox Pending A specified condition cannot be set in the program to be debugged The checkbox of any event in this state cannot be manipulated Remarks 1 The Run Break timer event cannot be disabled or made pending 2 The state of an event can also be changed by enabling or disabling it from the menu that is displayed by right clicking its Event mark on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 3 The enabled disabled settings of an unconditional trace event and other trace events are controlled exclusively of each other Therefore although the unconditional trace event one of the built in events R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 174 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS is enabled by default when either a trace start event or a trace end event is set it is automatically disabled at the same time in which case the trace start and trace end events are enabled together as one instance of a trace event Conversely when the set trace event is disabled the unconditional trace event is automatically re enabled 2 17 2 Displaying only a specific type of event By clicking one of the following toolbar buttons it is possible to display only a specific type of event Displays hardware break related events EE Displays software break related events m h Displays trace related events Displays timer related events
541. s of variable gt Display example Write sub c variable2 Format3 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt lt Address of variable gt Display example Read Write sub c func1 variabl3 0x300 Printf event Action event Display form lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt lt Print event setting gt Display example Before Execution main c 39 0x100 aaa bbb ccc After Execution sub c 100 0x200 Result of aaa aaa Interrupt event Action event Simulator Notes 1 lt Generation condition gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Display form lt Generation condition gt lt File name line number gt lt Address gt interrupt vector lt nterrupt vector gt Priority level lt nterrupt priority gt Display example Before execution main c 39 0x100 Interrupt vector 1c Priority level 7 Following are the details on the display format One of the following conditions is displayed E1 E20 Execution related Before Execution After Execution Access related Read Write Read Write Simulator Execution related Before Execution Access related Read Write Read Write 2tENESAS Page 341 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 lt File name Line number gt APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE A source file name and a line number in the source file are displayed The display form is
542. s of the Hook Transaction Settings Category Properties Timing Before download Performs a specified process immediately before load module files are downloaded After download Performs a specified process immediately after load module files are downloaded After CPU reset under breaking Performs a specified process immediately after the CPU is reset Before running Performs a specified process immediately before program execution starts After breaking Performs a specified process immediately after program execution breaks Each property in the Hook Transaction Settings category shows the timing with which a hook transaction is performed The numeral shown in bracket for each property value indicates the number of currently specified transactions No hook transactions are set by default Follow the procedure below to perform hook transaction on the desired property To specify the transaction select the desired property and click the button that appears on the right end of the column This will open the Text Edit dialog box in which you can specify the transaction Figure 2 167 Text Edit Dialog Box Opened E Hook Transachi Settings Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 187 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 168 Configuring Hook Transaction Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit In thi
543. s possible that the displayed value is different Remark The values are sorted in ascending order of numeric value by clicking the header part of this area This area has the following features a Alteration of I O register values When changing I O register values select the target I O register value and then click it again to edit it directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode After editing an I O register value hit the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area The edited value is written into the debug tool s target memory For details on how to edit I O register values see 4 Changing the contents of I O registers b Saving of I O register values Choosing Save IOR Data As from the File menu opens the Save As dialog box making it possible to save all content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save I O register values see 6 Saving the displayed O register contents 4 Type Byte Size area This area displays the type information of each I O register in the form shown below lt Type of I O register gt lt Access attribute gt lt All accessible sizes gt lt Size gt R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 297 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Access attribute One of the following is displayed as access attribute R Read only WwW Write only R W Read Write
544. s range in which a memory value is searched Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the entered address expressions are handled respectively as the start address and end address However searchable addresses are limited to the upper limit address of the program space OxFFFFFFFF Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Remarks 1 Function buttons By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function If the start address text box is blank address 0x0 is assumed If the end address text box is blank the upper limit address of the microcontroller s address space is assumed Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within the range specified in the Search Range area and Address area The searched spot is placed in selected state on Memory panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search for memory value is not performed Also if the Memory panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this butt
545. s the following buttons that change the form in which memory values are displayed f Displays memory values in hexadecimal default i E i Displays memory values in signed decimal Displays memory values in unsigned decimal g Displays memory values in 16 bit width i aii Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area Displays memory values in 32 bit width Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area Displays memory values in 64 bit width Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which character strings are displayed Displays character strings in ASCII code default Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code Displays character strings in EUC JP code m 3 ks i i c a m n as Ti euq Displays character strings in UTF 16 code I UC lo d cix cix img F Di Displays character strings as a single precision floating point valueNote Displays character strings as a double precision floating point value Displays character strings as a complex number of single precision floating point 2 g a pd ra Displays character strings as an imaginary number of single precision floating point Displays character strings as a complex number of double precision floating point D Displays character strings as an imaginary number of double precision float
546. s to the beginning of source text lines R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 185 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When no debug information is available The position depends on how the Automatic change method of event setting position property in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab is set R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 186 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process This section describes how to set up hooks in the debug tool by using the hook transaction function By setting up hook transaction it is possible to automatically change the I O register and CPU register values before or after downloading a load module or after resetting the CPU You can configure hook transaction in the Hook Transaction Settings category of the Hook Transaction Settings tab on the Property panel Remark You can increase the download speed by configuring the I O register in the Before download property Equally you can facilitate downloading to external RAM by the setting in this category Figure 2 166 Hook Transaction Settings Category E Hook Transaction Settings Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 After CPU reset under breaking After CPU reset under breakine 0 Before running Before running 0 After breaking After breaking 0 Table 2 25 Propertie
547. s with internal ROM Internal ROM size of a selected microcontroller For ROM less products 0 How to Not changeable change Size of internal Displays the internal RAM size of a selected microcontroller RAM Kbytes Kbytes Default Internal RAM size of a selected microcontroller How to Not changeable change Size of DataFlash Displays the size of the data flash memory area of a selected microcontroller memory Kbytes E1 E20 Default Data flash memory size of a selected microcontroller How to Not changeable change 2 Endian Simulator Displays detailed information on CPU endian and modifies its settings Endian of CPU Displays the microcontroller s endian The endian information set in properties of the build tool is acquired for display here Default Little endian data How to For the build amp debug tool change Not changeable For the debug tool only By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value Little endian data or Big endian data R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 220 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Clock This category displays detailed information on clock and changes clock settings Main clock source For products with internal HOCO E1 E20 Specify the m
548. sabled during program execution Periodic Updating Shows the following cascaded menu to set realtime display updates see b Realtime display update function Periodic Updating Options R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Opens the Property panel to comprehensively set the Realtime display update ztENESAS Page 277 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disassemble panel This panel displays the disassembled results of memory contents disassembled text as well as displays the results of line assemble see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly instruction level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and code coverage measurements Simulator see 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator Up to four instances of this panel can be displayed at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassemble3 and Disassemble4 in the title bar By displaying this panel in mixed display mode it is also possible to display the source text in a source file corresponding to code data default Note that this panel can only be opened when Cube Suite is connected with the debug tool Caution If a program is stepped through while the focus exists on this panel the program is executed one instruction at a time See 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps Remarks 1 In a Scroll Range Settings dialog box that is opened by selecting View and then clicking the
549. save trace data see 2 13 9 Saving the displayed content of an execution history f Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Trace panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Trace panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio 5 Address area This area displays the subject address at which a memory access was made However if an access was made to an I O register the I O register name is displayed in place of an address If there are multiple accesses the rest is displayed on the next line The desired notation numerical representation can be selected by clicking the appropriate toolbar button or by selecting from a context menu 6 Data area This area displays an accessed data value and the type of access However this information is not displayed for accesses to the CPU register The desired notation numerical representation or character string encode can be selected by clicking the appropriate toolbar b
550. scope specified 2 The access types that can be set from watch expressions are only a read write To change the access type to a read or write after setting trace start and end events edit them in a dialog box that opens from the Events panel see 4 Editing trace start and trace end events When a trace start event and trace end event are set they are managed collectively on the Events panel as one instance of a trace event When you click the mark at a trace event item detailed information on the trace start and trace end events you ve set is displayed Cautions 1 When both the trace start and trace end events have been set trace data is collected every time the start condition and end condition are met However only the trace data that were acquired immediately before the program stopped are actually displayed in the Trace panel 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Do not use the trace start and trace end events if you have enabled Real time RAM monitor in the Usage of trace function property under the Trace category Also delete any events using the Events panel that have been set Remarks 1 If either one of the trace start and trace end events set is Enabled the unconditional trace event checkbox on the Events panel is automatically deselected so that the trace data from the trace start event to the trace end event is collected 2 The trace start event may be left unset if it is unnecessary If the trace start event is n
551. se Build amp Download to Debug Tool from the Debug menu on the Main window which will help you build and download easily Canceling a download To cancel a download click on the Cancel button on the Progress Status dialog box which displays the progress of downloading or press the Esc key When the load module files have been successfully download the Editor panel opens automatically with the source text of the downloaded files displayed on it Remark A process can be set that automatically rewrites I O register or CPU register values with specified values before or after a download see Section 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 55 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 2 An applied method of download The files to download as well as the download conditions applied at download time can be changed CubeSuite permits files in the following formats to be downloaded Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats File Format Extension Remark Load module format abs Extension IAR N t Usable exclusively for debug only projects Intel Hex format hex 03 start segment address code and Standard offset address 05 start linear address code are 02 segment address code ignored 04 extension linear address code Motorola S format SO S1 S9 16 bits SO S2 S8 24 bits SO S3 S7 32 bits Binary data f
552. see a Setting deleting breakpoints Registering watch expression Variable names of C C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Registering watch expressions for details on how to operate it This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened j File monitor The following function for monitoring is provided to manage source files Amessage is displayed when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to open If the contents of the currently displayed file have been changed without using CubeSuite a message will appear asking you whether you wish to save the file or not R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 257 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE k Selecting blocks You can select a block that consists of multiple lines by using the Alt key left mouse button combination To select a block press the Alt key and drag the left mouse button void main void Start user code Do not MPO Start MP1 Start AD Editing of the selected block can be done by using Cut Copy Paste or Delete in the Edit menu I Zoom in or out on a view You can zoom in and out of the editor view by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the
553. see 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 and 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Other break factors have occurred b Execution ignoring break related events Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually Other break factors have occurred Remark If you have started the execution with this operation the occurrence of Printf event will also be ignored c Execution to the caret position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction at which you wish to stop the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Go to Here from the context menu When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The PC has reached the address of the caret position The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 89 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Other break factors have occurred Caution When the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address of the lower valid line if the corresponding address does not exist an error message will appear Re
554. select Go To on the context menu Description of each area 1 Address Symbol or IOR area Specify a location to which you want the caret to be moved Enter directly in the text box specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The content of specification differs with the panel concerned as shown below Subject panel Content of specification Disassemble panel Address expression IOR panel I O register name Remark __ If this dialog box is opened from the Disassemble panel by pressing the Ctrl Space keys in the text box here it is possible to complement a symbol name at the current caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function Moves the caret to the subject panel with a specified position appearing at the beginning of display Nullifies settings and then closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 416 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Data Save dialog box This dialog box saves the displayed contents of Disassemble panel Memory panel or Trace panel and the upload data See 2 5 3 Executing an upload This dialog box can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Figure A 70 Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data 1 File
555. selected by default Update the display during execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Update interval ms This property is displayed only when the Update the display during execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 23 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is specified by default Note that if you ve changed the specified value of the Update the display during execution property from No to Yes the previous set value is displayed in this property Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution c Register In this category make settings related to PC display in the Status bar during program execution Figure 2 18 Register Category E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 lt 1 gt PC display during the execution This property specifies whether the PC value is displayed in the Status bar during program execution When you select No the status bar under execut
556. selected event Note is set Opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret on it moved to the memory value corresponding to the address where a selected eventNote is set Note This does not include trace events timer measurement events and built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events Edit Menu Event Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the Events panel is as follows All other items are disabled Deletes a selected event However the built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events cannot be deleted Select All Selects all of the events displayed on this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 344 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Context menu APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Enable Event Enables a selected event However this is ignored if the selected event is already enabled Disable Event Disables a selected event However this is ignored if the selected event is already disabled Delete Deletes a selected event or an event condition However the built in events unconditional trace and Run Break timer events cannot be deleted Select All Selects all of the currently displayed events View Select Shows the f
557. selected range of memory data In this dialog box follow the procedure below to save memory contents R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 115 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a b c Figure 2 114 Saving Memory Data Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Memory Data File Name Me mory1 File Type Text files txt Save Range Address Symbol 0x00000000 v 0x000000ef Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Directly enter it in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Text files txt Text format default CSV comma separated Variables csv CSV formatNote Note Each piece of data are separated with a comma when saved To avoid the problem of an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end addresses to set a range of memory to be saved in a file Directly enter hexadecimal va
558. semble panel select Timer Settings and then View Result of Timer on the context menu On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel move the caret to an event mark and then select View Details in Event Panel from the context menu R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 334 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Name area This area lists the currently set event names in the form shown below 3 Hardware Break0001 tto a b c Remark By selecting the appropriate toolbar button it is possible to limit the types of events displayed here see Toolbar a Checkbox Clicking the checkbox displays or changes the set state of an event Note that when the set state of an event is changed the Event mark also changes accordingly Enabled When a specified condition becomes true the event concerned with it occurs The event can be disabled by unchecking the checkbox Disabled Even when a specified condition becomes true the event concerned with it does not occur The event can be enabled by checking the checkbox Pending A specified condition cannot be set in the program to be debugged The checkbox cannot be manipulated Remarks 1 The Run Break timer event cannot be disabled or made pending 2 The enabled or disabled settings of an unconditional trace event and other trace events are controlled exclusively of each other
559. ses with the specified offset value Cancel Nullifies settings and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 371 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Initialize dialog box This dialog box initializes memory values See 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents A pattern of specified initialization data is written into a specified address range of memory repeatedly Figure A 51 Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address symbol End address symbok v dnput the end address or sy Pr hitialize data 2 4 f s Ghput the initial data in hexadecimal here The two or more data gt gt v Function buttons 4 Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Choose Fill from the context menu on the Memory panel Description of each area 1 Range specification area Specify an address range of memory whose values need to be initialized in Start address symbol and End address symbol Enter address expressions directly in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the input address expressions are handled respectively as the
560. sion Expression Multiplication Expression ExpressionN Division Expression ExpressionN Remainder calculation Expression ExpressionN Addition Expression ExpressionNoe Subtraction Expression amp ExpressionNote Logical multiplication by bits Expression ExpressionN Exclusive disjunction by bits Expression ExpressionN Logical sum by bits Note Variables and functions can be combined by an operator only with variables functions and integer constants Example C variable name IOR name 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function This function helps users input data by selecting one of the listed symbol names that exist in the program when specifying an address expression and so on R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 199 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The list of symbol names appears by pressing the Ctrl Space keys when a part of the target symbol name is being input in the text box that supports this function In this list double click the target symbol name or press the Space Enter key after selecting it by using the Up Down key to complement the symbol name currently being input At this time if a key other than the Space Enter key is pressed or the focus moves to outside the panel dialog box currently being operated then the list of symbol names will disappear the symbol name completion
561. so change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio 2 Value area This area displays or changes the value of a registered watch expression Note that if the watch expression is a function pointer a function name is displayed The display notation numeral representation and encode can be selected using a toolbar button or from the content menu Also it is possible to select a display form that always adds hexadecimal equivalents to the ordinary display Note that the default display form is automatically determined depending on the type of watch expression as follows R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 313 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default Type of watch expression Display form char signed char unsigned char Hexadecimal value added in following ASCII character short signed short short int signed short int int signed Hexadecimal value added in following signed decimal signed int long sign
562. specify download conditions for the file added Specify a file to download Default File name However blank when newly added How to change Enter directly from the keyboard or specify in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button 1 that is displayed at the right edge of the column when this item is selected Specifiable value See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats Specifiable in up to 259 characters File type Specify the file format of a file to download Default Load module file How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value One of the following Load module file Hex file S record file Binary data file R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 356 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This item is displayed only when the files to download are in hex format or S record files Specify an offset value from the address at which download of a specified file begins Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hexadecimal values from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Start address This item is displayed only when the files to download are in binary data format Specify the start address from which a specified file is downloaded Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hexad
563. splay by the RRM Function Memory Panel E20 JTAG RX600 Series Memory Notationy Size Notation Encoding x C Move when Stop 01000 00001010 00001020 00001080 5 Searching for memory contents To search for memory values use the Memory Search dialog box that is opened by selecting Find from the context menu A search is conducted in the subject area either the memory value or the character string area where the caret exists In this dialog box follow the procedure below to search for memory contents Figure 2 112 Searching for Memory Contents Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search Search Data Search Range Specify address range Address v Ont fffffff Caution Memory contents cannot be searched during program execution a Specify the Search Data Specify the data you want to search Directly enter it in the text box specifiable in up to 256 bytes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries To perform a search in the memory value area you need to enter data in the same display form numeral system and size as that area Also if you perform a search in the character string area you need to specify a character string as the search data The specified character string before being searched is converted to data in appropriate encode form in which data are currently displayed in that area Note that if you
564. ss area Specify the address at which to set the Printf event You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items By default address of the presently specified location is displayed Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Note that the output result format by the Printf event in the Output panel are as follows Figure A 45 Output Result Format of Printf Event Specified characters Variable expression 1 Value 1 Variable expression 2 Value 2 Variable expression 3 Value 3 Specified characters Characters specified with Output string Variable expression 1 10 Characters specified with Variable expression Value 1 10 Function buttons Value of variable corresponds to Variable expression 1 10 The value is displayed in a format that matches the variable type see Table A 10 Display Form of Watch expressions Default will be displayed when the specified variable expression cannot be acquired The value is also displayed in hexadecimal in bracket If a hexadecimal value cannot be displayed will be shown instead Button Function Finishes configuring the Printf event and sets it at the caret position in the Editor
565. ssible to display or change the values of memory or watch expressions even while the program is running not just when the program is halted Cautions 1 E20 JTAG RX600 Series The trace function and the real time RAM monitor function RRM function in part are usable exclusively of each other Therefore before making the settings below you must finish the following settings on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel in order to specify the function to be used preferentially Trace category gt gt Usage of trace function properties gt gt Realtime RAM Monitor 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series If a reset such as a pin reset or watchdog timer reset is issued while a user program is running the results of the real time RAM monitor cannot be guaranteed values displayed may be incorrect Remark The real time display update function is materialized by the debug tool s RRM real time RAM monitor pseudo RRM and DMM dynamic memory modification functions R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 109 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The pseudo RRM function temporarily momentarily breaks program execution to perform reads writes by means of software emulation The subject area to and from which you can write and read using the realtime display update function varies depending on how the debug tool you use and the Property panel are set Referring to the set contents of respective propertie
566. stem it may not be possible to communicate using the selected FINE baud rate In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewriting in this category Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 19 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 14 Flash Category E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Hes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address F 1000 lt 1 gt Input mode of ID code Specify a mode for the input of ID code Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 lt 2 gt ID code Specify the ID code to use when reading the code from the memory If you have selected Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal in the Input mode of ID code property enter the ID code in a 32 digit hexadecimal number If you have selected Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters enter the ID code using maximum 16 ASCII characters Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Ifthe ID code entered in ASCII characters is shorter than 16 characters the unused space will be padded with 0 lt 3 gt Work RAM start address Specify the location address of the work RAM to be used by the debugger The size of work RAM to be used by the debugger f
567. string area see c Copying and pasting Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the display notation in the memory value area However this menu is disabled during program execution Hexadecimal Displays memory values in hexadecimal default Signed Decimal Displays memory values in signed decimal Unsigned Decimal Displays memory values in unsigned decimal Octal Displays memory values in octal Binary Displays memory values in binary Size Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the display width in the memory value area However this menu is disabled during program execution 4 Bits Displays memory values in 4 bit width 1 Byte Displays memory values in 8 bit width default 2 Bytes Displays memory values in 16 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area 4 Bytes Displays memory values in 32 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area 8 Bytes Displays memory values in 64 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the display form in the character string area However this menu is disabled during program execution ASCII Displays character strings in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code EUC JP Displays charac
568. structure union class member Note 2 Variable expression gt Member name Value of a structure union class member that pointer to Variable expression Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Variable expression gt Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Variable expression Value of a pointer variable amp Variable expression Location address Type name Variable expression Value cast into a specified type Name of the CPU register Value of the CPU register IOR name IOR value Note 3 Label name Note 3 EQU symbol name immediate value and Values of a label an EQU symbol and immediate address Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variable 2 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member 3 Ifthe label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label Any imaginary number must be multiplied by an uppercase I e g 1 0 2 0 1 When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g I REG to distinguish it from the keyword I Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 363 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Addre
569. suitable for the purpose of use However these buttons are disabled while the trace function is in operation R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 146 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 15 Trace Panel Display Modes Button Display Mode Display Contents Mixed display mode Instructions disassemble label names source text corresponding source lines and point trace results are displayed default Disassemble display mode Instructions disassemble label names and point trace results are displayed Source display mode Source text corresponding source lines are displayed However if any place that has no debug information is executed a notice lt No Debug Information gt is displayed Figure 2 135 Example of Source Display Mode Trace Panel E S S Notations T 9 4 5 Number Time h min s ms ps ns Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address 562 1 Tutorial c 61 p_sam gt s1 a 1 562 2 Tutorial cHE2 p_sam gt s2 a 2 562 3 Tutorial cHES p_sam gt s3 a 3 562 4 Tutorial cHE4 p_sam gt s4 a 4 562 5 Tutorial cHE5 p_sam gt s5 a 5 562 6 Tutorial cHEE p_sam gt s6 a 6 562 7 Tutorial cHE p_sam gt s a 7 562 8 Tutorial cHE8 p_sam gt s8 a 8 562 9 Tutorial cHES p_sam gt s9 a 9 562 10 Tutorial cHES p_sam gt s9 a 3 583 Tutorial c 36 tutorial 588 Tutorial c 36 tutorial 590 Tutorial c 40 void tutorial void 590 1 Tut
570. t Event Release Figure 2 165 Releasing Registration of a Reset Event Sequential Combination Condition Break Combination Seaueia Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 Oxffff865f 2 Read g_CharBuf 0 1000 0 1000 0x55 3 Write g_IntBuf 0 142c 0x142f Oxb Up Down RA Event Reset event Event After Execution sort cH36 Oxffff860e een 2 17 5 Deleting events To delete any event you ve set select the subject event and then click the toolbar button R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 182 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When an event is specified by a combination of multiple events each event in the detailed information can be deleted independently However you cannot delete the unconditional trace event and Run Break timer event which are the built in events of the debug tool Remarks 1 For the timer start and end events and trace start and end events you can also delete an event by selecting Delete Event s from the context menu displayed by right clicking the event mark that is displayed on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 2 For the software hardware break and the trace event consisting of execution related events you can delete an event by clicking their event mark that is displayed on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 3 To delete all of the events you
571. t AaBbCc AaBbCc Text color Gray Background color Text color Background color Text color Standard color DarkCyan Standard color White Background color MediumViol etRed Display colors of string literals on the Editor panel Display colors of control characters on the Output panel Display colors of highlighted spots in plug in products etc Changed value AaBbCc Text color Sienna Background color LightYellow Display colors on the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel IOR panel and Watch panel of spots whose values have been changed by program execution Edit value Text color Blue Background color Standard color Display colors on the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel IOR panel and Watch panel of spots whose values have been forcibly changed by user Current PC Text color Black Background color Gold Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of a line where the current PC position exists Breakpoint Text color Black Background color Light Salmon Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of lines where breakpoints are set Update periodic Read or fetch Text color DeepPink Background color Text color Background color Standard color Standard color PaleGreen Display colors on the Memory panel
572. t No Specification No Specification Read Write Read Write Vector Read Simulator DMA R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 383 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Caution E1 E20 The types of access for which data can be collected on the Trace panel are Read and Write Therefore do not select Read Write Vector Read or DMA from the drop down list Simulator The types of access for which data can be collected on the Trace panel are only Read Write and Vector Read Therefore do not select Read Write or DMA from the drop down list e Data This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified Specify an accessed numeric value Enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The numeric value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed numeric value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search 2 Search range area a Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number
573. t address and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Table 2 5 Event Marks of the Breakpoint Event Type Event Mark Software Break E1 E20 Hardware Break Figure 2 97 Breakpoint Setting Example Disassemble Panel Event area Indicates that a software N SEO OO chi ld2 dir UUUUUST eZ breakpoint has been set JE 4 OO000Sf 6 lta lel Indicates that a hardware ba U U U U U of o tc UUUe 000003fa a breakpoint has been set 75 Cautions 1 Since a breakpoint is set as a break event and managed as an event restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be set Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on breakpoint settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 Breakpoints cannot be set to lines with no address indication 3 E1 E20 Software breakpoints replace the instructions at the corresponding addresses They cannot be specified in the area other than the internal ROM area and internal RAM area Remarks 1 Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled When an event is set at a point for which another event is already set the event mark 8 is displayed to indicate that more than one event is set at the point 2 Simulator Only hardware breakpoints can be set 3 E1 E20 Hardware software breakpoints can be set
574. t event registered the event selected in the Object event list and the registered reset event will replace each other 2 If you change the combination condition from Sequential to OR or AND with the reset event registered the event in the Reset event list cannot be included in the Object event list In order to include it in the Object event list you need to first cancel the reset event registration before making changes to the combination conditions 3 The pass count cannot be specified for an event that has been registered as the reset event b Button Cancel Moves the event inside the Reset event list to the Object event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions Function buttons Buttons Functions OK Applies the detailed settings specified in the dialog box to the combination break or to the trace and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 391 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 This dialog box is used to display and change the detailed information on the timer event selected on the Events panel Note that you cannot edit the address value of the timer event in this dialog box If you need to edit the address value first delete th
575. t is selected no scroll ranges are set no limits to scroll range Remark By pressing the Ctrl Space keys in this text box it is possible to complement a symbol name at the current caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 413 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 End address area Specify the end address of a range to be scrolled Enter an address expression directly in the text box specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries However this area disabled if All is specified in Start address Remark By pressing the Ctrl Space keys in this text box it is possible to complement a symbol name at the current caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function Sets a specified scroll range in the panel concerned with it and moves the caret to the subject panel with the start address appearing at the beginning of display Nullifies settings and then closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 414 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to Line dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified source line Figure A 68 Go to Line Dialog Box Go to Line Line numbe
576. t of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio Toolbar A Acquires latest information from the debug tool to update the display However this is disabled during program execution Notation Shows the following buttons for changing the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in predetermined notation default Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in octal Displays the value of a selected item including a low level item in binary Displays the character string of a selected item including a low level item in ASCII code If the subject to be displayed consists of 2 bytes or more characters of 1 byte each are displayed in a row Displays a selected item in Float Except for 4 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Displays a selected item in Double Except for 8 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Adds a hexadeci
577. t the items When finished click OK 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator Setting an interrupt event as one of the action events allows you to generate an interrupt at a desired location while the program is running To use this function follow the steps below 1 Set an interrupt event 2 Execute the program 3 Edit interrupt event Caution Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on interrupt event settings including the allowable number of valid events 1 Set an interrupt event In the Editor panel Disassemble panel set an interrupt event at a location where you want an interrupt request to be generated In the Editor panel Disassemble panel move the caret to the line addressNote at which you want to set an interrupt event and then select Register Action Event from the context menu to open the following Action Events dialog box then select the Interrupt event setting tab Simulator In this dialog box follow the steps below R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 170 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note Interrupt events cannot be set to lines with no address indication Figure 2 158 Set Interrupt Event Action Events Dialog Box Interrupt Event Setting Tab Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Interrupt Vector Priority Cancel a Specify Interrupt Vector Specify the interrupt ve
578. tailed settings on timer measurement Measurement item RX600 Series Specify the measurement item RX200 Series Displays Execution cycle Default Execution cycle Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values One of the following as selected from the drop down list RX600 Series Execution cycle Execution cycle Supervisor mode Exception and interrupt cycle Exception cycle Interrupt cycle Execution count Exception and interrupt count Exception count Interrupt count RX200 Series Execution cycle Execution only once Specifies whether to end the measurement after measuring the specified segment only once Default No Modifying One of the following as selected from the drop down list Available values Yes Ends the measurement after measuring the specified segment only once The measurement value is cumulated every time you pass through the specified segment R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 393 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Buttons Functions Applies the detailed settings specified in the dialog box to the timer event and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 394 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detaile
579. te records the accessed value in trace memory see 1 When an access to a variable or O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that when a selected watch expression is accessed for read write causes trace recording to start see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that when a selected watch expression is accessed for read write causes trace recording to end see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Opens the Trace panel to display acquired trace data Timer Settings This item is enabled only when the selected watch expression is a global variable a static variable inside a function a static variable inside a file or an I O register plural selections not accepted Displays the following cascaded menu to set timer related events see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section After an event is set an event mark is displayed at the beginning of the watch expression concerned Set Timer Start R W Value Sets an event that causes the timer to start upon read write access to a selected watch expression see a How to set a timer start event Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channel t in which a timer start event is set E1 E20 Set Timer End R W Value Sets an event that causes the timer to finish upon read write access to a se
580. te function Figure 2 35 Access Memory While Running Category E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX200 Series E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 Figure 2 36 Access Memory While Running Category E20 JTAG RX600 Series E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interyal ms 500 Enable the automatic update of realtime display Yes lt 1 gt Access by stopping execution Specify from the drop down list whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default lt 2 gt Update the display during execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 36 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Update interval ms This property is displayed only when the Update the display during execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms
581. ted I O register which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution However this button is disabled during program execution Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly in the text box While you can create any number of new categories note that a category cannot be created within another category However this button is disabled during program execution Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in selected state the category is deleted I O registers cannot be deleted R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 298 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal default Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII code Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses File menu IOR Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the IOR panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these it
582. ted at the time the load module was created Figure 2 87 Adding a Download File and Changing Conditions for Downloading Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list i Application Debug Application abs p Coad module tile Download object Yes Yes Yes PIC Offset F 4000 PID Offset F 4000 Specify the PIC PID offset When the downloaded load module is made with the PIC PID function you can change the executed address by switching this item to Yes IWhen R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 83 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When the load module is downloaded after the values of PIC Offset and PID Offset have been changed the allocation of addresses for the P section and external or static variables is changed as shown in the figure below The left half shows an example where 4000 is specified for PIC Offset and PID Offset in the Download Files dialog box while the right half shows an example where 0 is specified In the left half 4000 is added to the original address Figure 2 88 Example of Downloading after the Offset Values of PIC Offset and PID Offset Have been Changed f WatchTest c 122 const char g_acc 123 const signed char g_acsc const unsigned char g acuc f WatchTest c 122 t char 123 const signed char g_acsc t unsigned char g_acuc w Ne g_acc E watchi x E
583. tegory shown below and changes download file settings For details on how to download see 2 5 Download and Upload 1 Download 2 Debug Information Figure A 18 Property Panel Download File Settings Tab Property Si RX E20TAG Property E Download 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Erase data flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event DebugInformaton Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main Download files Specifies the file to be downloaded The download file dialog box is opened by pressing the button In the download file dialog box specify the file to be downlo Connect Settings Debug Tool Sett A Download Fil Hook Transactio iF Description of each category 1 Download This category displays detailed information on download and changes download settings Download files Specify a file to be downloadedNote T This property is expanded to display the file names to be downloaded and download conditions as a sub property Default Number of files to be downloaded How to By selecting in the Download Files dialog box change The Download Files dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column when this property is selected No download files can be specified on the Property panel R20UT21
584. ter strings in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays character strings in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays character strings in UTF 16 code R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 2tENESAS Page 276 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 Float APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays character strings as a single precision floating point value Double Displays character strings as a double precision floating point value Float Complex Displays character strings as a complex number of single precision floating point Double Complex Displays character strings as a complex number of double precision floating point Float Imaginary Displays character strings as an imaginary number of single precision floating point Double Imaginary Displays character strings as an imaginary number of double precision floating point Shows the following cascaded menu to change the display form Settings Scroll Range Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range Column Number Settings Opens the Column Number Settings dialog box to set the number of view columns in the Memory value area Address Offset Value Settings Opens the Address Offset Settings dialog box to set an offset value for addresses displayed in the Address area Highlight Accessed Checking this menu will highlight the memory value which has been changed due to program execution default However this menu is di
585. that the watch expression is a CPU register The watch expression having a lower level register part of a register is marked with a or at the beginning so that when the sign is clicked the expression expands or collapses see b Expanding collapsing the display This area has the following features a Editing a tree Watch expressions can be classified by category folder for display in tree form To create a new category move the caret to the position where you want to create and click the Pea button in the toolbar or select Create Category on the context menu and then enter any category name If the need arises to delete a category select the category you want to delete click the button in the toolbar or select Delete on the context menu Also if you want to edit a category name you created select the category name you want to edit and follow one of the following methods Click the category name again and then edit it directly from the keyboard Choose Rename from the Edit menu and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard Press the F2 key and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard After creating a category drag and drop the registered watch expressions into the category The watch expressions are displayed in tree form classified by category Similarly the order in which categories or watch expressions are displayed one above or below the other can be changed
586. that this item is disabled when the mixed display mode is selected The following items are displayed to show or hide the columns or marks on this panel Remove the check to hide the items all the items are checked by default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 258 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Line Number Shows the line number in the line number area Selection Shows the mark that indicates the line modification status in the line number area Out of date module Shows the mark that indicates the update status of the downloaded load module file in the line indicator number area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Coverage Shows the coverage area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Address Shows the address area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Op Code Shows the instruction code area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the mixed display mode is selected Shows the label area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the mixed display mode is selected Shows the event area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Shows the main area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool File menu Editor pan
587. the Property panel of the debug tool then the source files will not be added to the project tree 8 Buttons area Initialize Settings Restores all of the currently displayed items to their default state Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all the settings in this dialog box to their default state In the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted Applies changes and closes this dialog box Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Applies changes without closing this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 429 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 In this dialog box you can select the external flash definition file USD file to be registered Figure A 77 External flash memory Dialog Box External flash memory O Sample 5 My Recent Documents File name nai Function buttons My Network Files of type _ USD files usd This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the External Flash E1 E20 category provided in the Connect Settings tab on the Property panel click button which is displayed by selecting File property in the External flash definition
588. the debug tool acquired by the program execution Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables Display Function Call Information from the Stack Collecting an Execution HistoryNote Measuring the Execution TimeNo Measure Coverage Simulator Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting when you use events Debug the program repeating steps 9 to 12 as required Note that if the program is modified during debugging steps 3 and 8 also should be repeated Remarks 1 Other than the above you can also check the result of the program execution by using the following functions Set an Action into Programs Setting Up the Hook Process Using the Debug Console 2 The acquired information can be saved to a file Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results Saving displayed memory contents Saving the displayed CPU register contents Saving the displayed I O register contents Saving the displayed contents of local variables Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions Saving the displayed contents of call stack information Saving the displayed content of an execution history 13 Executing an upload Save the program the memory contents to a file in the arbitrary format e g Intel hex format binary data format etc as required 14 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Disconnect the
589. the previous clock source Note that the operating frequency of the peripheral clock will change during internal flash memory rewriting because the clock source is switched The clock manipulation enabling setting takes effect when the internal flash ROM is rewritten after program execution or step execution Note that the clock source is forcibly switched regardless of the clock manipulation enabling setting if FCLK is outside of the guaranteed operating range immediately after the debug tool is activated or when the CPU Reset button is clicked c Connection with Emulator You can configure the connection between E20 and a host machine in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 Figure 2 29 Connection with Emulator Category E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 XXX XXKKKX lt 1 gt Emulator serial No Serial numbers of all connected E20 emulators are displayed in the drop down list Select the one to be connected to the target system The drop down list is updated every time it is used d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection between E20 and the target board in this category Figure 2 30 Connection with Target Board Category E20 Serial E Connection with T arget Board FINE baud rate bps 2000000 Figure 2 31 Connection with Target Board Category E20 JTAG E Connection with T arget Board JTAG clock MHz 16 5 R2
590. the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 The program in execution can be stopped at the arbitrary position by setting a break event execution related It is an after execution or post execution break as the program will break after executing instruction at the specified address This function is implemented using the debug tool resources This section describes the following operations 1 Seta beak event execution related 2 Edit a break event execution related 3 Delete a break event execution related 1 Set a beak event execution related Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembled text is displayed After moving the caret to the target line select Break Settings gt gt Set Combination Break A break event execution related is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line When a break event execution related is set the event mark identical to that of hardware breakpoint appears and the disassembled text line will be highlighted see 2 Seta breakpoint When you have performed this operation it is interpreted as if a break event execution related has been set at the target address and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details It is registered as after execution in the detailed information on the combination break in the Events panel Caution When setting a break e
591. the same as for the scope specification expression of a watch expression If there are multiple load module files that are downloaded lt Load module name File name Line number gt is displayed For events set on the Disassemble panel however a lt Line number gt is displayed in the form lt Symbol Offset gt if the following applies Line information exists and a specified event set position is not at the beginning of line information No line information exists but symbol information exists Also a line number is displayed with if the following applies No line information exists and no symbol information exists lt Variable name gt A variable name in a source file is displayed The display form is the same as for the scope specification expression of a watch expression lt Comparison condition gt A comparison condition is displayed This is not displayed if no comparison value is specified lt Comparison value gt A comparison value is displayed This is not displayed if no comparison value is specified lt Address gt lt Combination condition gt The beginning and the end address of a specified variable in a memory area are displayed always in hexadecimal One of the following conditions is displayed OR AND Sequential lt Detailed information on combination break gt Detailed information on combination break event is displayed lt Total execution ti
592. the source text line 2 Setting the Debug Information category E1 E20 Figure 2 64 Debug information Category E Debug nformaton Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main a Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Specify from the drop down list whether or not to run the program up to a specified symbol position after the CPU is reset or after a download is completed only when you specified Yes on the CPU Reset after download property To run the program up to a specified symbol position select Yes default Remark _ If while you specified Yes on the CPU Reset after download property you specify Yes on this property the Editor panel opens automatically after a download is completed with the source text at the position you specified on Specified symbol property displayed on it R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 54 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 b c d Also if you specify No here this panel opens with the reset address displayed on it If the reset address has no source text mapped to it the relevant place is displayed on the Disassemble panel Specified symbol This property is displayed only when you specified Yes on the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property Specify a position at which you want the program being run after the CPU is reset to be halted Enter
593. the top of the file C work src c C work sub src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from the top of the file C work sub src c C work src c 10 5 Jumps to the fifth column of the tenth line from the top of the file C work src c R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 74 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 80 Tag Jump 30 FOKKER MH HHH HHH HHRE MHRA MHHREH 31 Include files 32 FRR RHR HHH RR ERR RHE HHH EHH HHE HHH 33 34 include G macrodriver h 35 include 36 include Register to Watch 37 include f 38 El Start user ci _ Register Action Event 39 a End user cod Cut Ctrl 40 include CG us 41 Copy Ctrl C 42 El Ctrl y 43 FRR RRR HR RR HH ar 44 Global defi Fi Ctrl F 45 KKH HHH 46 Ctrl G 47 El Start user cq Forward to Next Cursor Position 48 define WAIT F ra 49 Back to Last Cursor Position 50 UINT g_count Go to Here 51 UINT g_count 52 BOOL g ad fi Set PC to Here 53 USHORT g ad da 54 USHORT snas 4 Jump to Function _ I to Function Remarks 1 Jumps are case insensitive 2 The reference point of the path is the project folder in which the file is registered If the file is not registered in any project the reference point of the path will be the active project 3 Path specifications path file names including space characters must be enclosed in R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 75 of 47
594. tion name file name line Displays local variables at scope of the calling function number gt No After the program execution the scope selected here is retained as long as the selected scope exists Note It shows the function caller displayed on Call Stack panel 2 Name area Displays local variable names or function names Function parameters are also displayed as local variables Also arrays pointer type variables and structures unions have their hierarchical structure displayed in tree form This area cannot be edited The meaning of each icon displayed here is as follows Denotes a variable Auto variables internal static variables and register variables are also displayed Note Arrays pointer type variables and structures unions have their hierarchical structure displayed in tree form If a variable is marked with at the beginning clicking it expands the next part of the variable After expansion the mark changes to Array All elements in the array Pointer type Variable at the destination pointed to by the pointer variables Note that if the destination pointed to by the pointer is a pointer it is further assigned a mark Clicking it shows the other part that is referenced However if the value pointed to by the pointer is unknown it is marked with Structure union All members of the structure union Denotes a parameter Denotes a function Note To display
595. tion of the program has stopped the measurement result can be confirmed as a timer measurement event on the Events panel that is opened by choosing Event from the View menu as shown below Note that this timer measurement event is a particular type of event that is displayed on only the Events panel when either a timer start event or a timer end event has been set R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 161 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 151 Example of Measurement Results by Timer Measurement Event Timer Start and End Events E1 E20 Run Break Timer Total 0 ns G M 9 Timer Result Total O ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Ons 0 Ons Detail Start After Execution sort c 18 Oxffffe5e4 End Read Write q_IntBuf 0 1404 0 1407 0x5 Name Detail Comment S M 9 Timer Result2 Total O ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Min Ons 0 Ons Ons Detail Start Read Write g_CharBuf 021000 01000 Oxa a fEnd After Execution sort c 16 Oxffffg5d8 Name Detail Comment 9 Unconditional Trace Figure 2 152 Example of a Measurement Result by Timer Measurement Event Timer Start and End Events Simulator Comment IV S Run Break Timer Total 4000 ns Execution Cycle Count 400 Execution Instruction Count 76 Timer Result Total O ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Ons 0 Ons Detail Start Before Execution sort c 18 Oxffffe5e4 E
596. tionship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Remark E1 E20 Select Microcontroller type E1 Serial Microcontroller type E20 Serial to perform FINE communications between E1 E20 and the target system Select Microcontroller type E1 JTAG Microcontroller type E20 JTAG to perform JTAG communications between E1 E20 and the target system If the Property panel is already open click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node again The view switches to the Property panel of the selected debug tool If the Property panel is not open double click the above mentioned node to open the corresponding Property panel R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 14 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 E1 Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using E1 Note that the contents of the Property panel differ depending on the communication method FINE communications E1 Serial or JTAG communications E1 JTAG between E1 and the target system Figure 2 6 Property Panel E1 Serial R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Property Sl AX E1 Serial Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes 5 f internal RAM KBytes ataFlash memory KBytes Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E Connectio
597. tool Specifiable value R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 For Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal 32 hexadecimal digits For Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters 16 ASCII code characters if less than 16 characters Os are added 2tENESAS Page 223 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Work RAM start Specify the location address of the work RAM used by the debugger address Specified bytes of space from the specified work RAM location address are used by the debugger firmware Note Default Depends on the selected microcontroller How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Address value that matches the internal RAM area of the selected microcontroller value Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of the work RAM used by the debugger Default Depends on the selected microcontroller How to Not changeable change Note Although this area can also be used in the user program because memory contents are saved and restored to and from the memory of the host machine by the debugger firmware do not specify this area as the source or destination of transfer for the DMA or DTC function 7 Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 Displays detailed information on the microcontroller s operation modes or changes settings made in it Mode pins se
598. tory item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Kind This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Select the type of access Reference Substitution default Reference or Substitution from the drop down list Value This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Use a hexadecimal number to specify an accessed variable value Enter a variable value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 386 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The variable value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter variable values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank the fixed variable value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search of accessed location 3 Search range area a Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item f
599. trieved specifying Searches the specified function for an executed part the function Only Function Name is valid as the search condition The execution part is retrieved specifying Searches the specified global variable for an accessed location the global variable Only Variable Name Kind and Value are valid as the search condition 2 Search condition area a b c d e Source and Line This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line is selected The character string specified here is searched from within the Line Address area of the Trace panel Enter a character string included in the source line to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main Function Name This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the function is selected Enter a variable name to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Variable Name This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Enter a variable name to search directly in the text box or select an input his
600. ts can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 8 Event area Start Tracing Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Note 1 Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Note 1 Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record Reading Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register is read accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or O register occurred Record Writing Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside a function static variable inside a file I O register is write
601. tting Specify the operation mode set by mode pins Default Single chip mode How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Note 1 Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value Single chip mode or user boot mode Register setting Specify the operation mode set by registers Default Single chip mode How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list Note 1 value Single chip mode internal ROM enabled extension mode or internal ROM disabled extension mode Note 2 Endian Displays the project s endian Default Little endian data How to For the build amp debug tool change Not changeable For the debug tool only By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value Little endian data or big endian data Notes 1 The specifiable operation mode differs with each selected microcontroller R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 224 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Ifa microcontroller with an MDE pin is selected be sure that the project s endian and the microcontroller s MDE pin
602. ty is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when undefined instruction exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of undefined instruction exception default Stop when privileged instruction exception is encountered This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when privileged instruction exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of privileged instruction exception default Stop when access exception is encountered This property is displayed only when an MPU module exists in Peripheral function simulation module property and you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when access exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of access exception default R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 47 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS h lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt Stop when floating point exception is encountered RX600 Series This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when floating point exception is encountered Select
603. type Address range Size Access width Internal RAM area Ox00000000 Ox0000ffff 64 KBytes bits Non map area 0x00010000 Ox0007ffff 448 KBytes bits I O registers 0x00080000 Ox000s3ftff 16 KBytes bits Non map area 0x00084000 Oxooo0ssftfft 3 KBytes bits I O registers 0x00086000 0x00087fff 8 KBytes bits 2 I O registers 0x00088000 Ox0008dfff 24 KBytes bits Non map area Ox0008e000 Ox0008ftfff 8S KBytes I O registers area Ox00090000 Ox0o00o9fftfft 64 KBytes I O registers area Ox000a0000 Ox000bffftft 128 KBytes I O registers area Ox000c0000 Ox000ffftfft 256 KBytes Internal ROM area 0Ox00100000 OxOO0l0lfff 83 KBytes lt bits bits bits bits bits feunction buttons pee onnonnnnnn nn o This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the button that is displayed when you select the Memory mappings property in the Memory category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during program execution Description of each area 1 Additional memory mapping specification area Specify information on a new memory mapping to be added a Memory type Select the memory type of a memory mapping to be added from the drop down list shown below The items selected by default depend on the debug tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 352 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V
604. u can specify Address area as the comparison condition only to one event 3 Simulator Address conditions cannot be specified When Compare with address mask is specified E1 E20 A mask value can be set for the address value Enter an address mask value in hexadecimal notation in the Address mask property that is added in the Address Condition category When an access to the address that matches the masked address occurs the condition holds true Also in the Compare property that is added the same way it is possible to set Any other value for the address comparison condition Caution The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified Example To set an address condition of 0x1000 to 0x1FFF Address value 0x1000 Mask value 0xF000 b Editing data conditions lt 1 gt Read Access type Specify one of the following items for the access type When a read access occurs the condition holds true Write When a write access occurs the condition holds true Read Write When a read or write access occurs the condition holds true lt 2 gt Access size Specify one of the following items for the access size R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 177 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS No conditions When an access in any size occurs the condition holds true Byte When an access in byte size occu
605. ucts are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military ap
606. ue Process The content of the CPU register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value Source single byte space Python script path Process A script file specified by Python script path is executed After breaking Specify a process to be executed immediately after the program execution is made to break Default After breaking 0 The value in denotes a currently specified number of processes By specifying in the Text Edit dialog box Format One of the following I O register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of an I O register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value CPU register name single byte space numeric value Process The content of the CPU register is automatically rewritten with a numeric value Source single byte space Python script path Process A script file specified by Python script path is executed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 247 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files Furthermore the source level debugging instruction level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the code coverage measurement result display Simulator see 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator can be performed when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel By
607. unction may cause the program to run in a free run mode 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 You can execute a specified routine immediately before the start or stop of the program execution Setting an arbitrary routine allows you to control the target system in synchronization with the execution or stop of the program See 2 10 Stop Programs Break on how to stop a program in execution This section describes the procedure for specifying a routine to be executed You can specify a routine in the System E1 E20 category on the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel When executing immediately before the program execution Select Yes in the Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property and enter the start address in the Routine to run immediately before execution starts property that is displayed The specified routine will be executed immediately before the program execution When executing immediately after the break Select Yes in the Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops property and enter the start address in the Routine to run immediately after execution stops property that is displayed The specified routine will be executed immediately after the stop of the program R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 91 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 95 System category E System Debug the
608. unctions such as the scanf function for reading the data entered from the keyboard or the printf function for outputting data use the Debug Console panel shown below Figure 2 170 Debug Console Panel Debug Console For details about each functionality of the debug console see the section in which the Debug Console panel is described Before standard I O based on the Debug Console panel can be used in a C C program there must be a low level interface routine in the program CubeSuite comes with sample project RX610_Tutorial_DebugConsole for the E1 E20 which has the following files for debug console functions Low level interface routine files C language part lowsrc c and lowsrc h Low level interface routines open close read write and Iseek Called by standard I O Initialize I O libraries _ INIT_IOLIB Close all open functions CLOSEALL Each called by the internal initialization routine PowerON_Reset_PC of the initialization routine file resetprg c Low level interface routine file assembly language part lowlvl src Function to output 1 character _charput Function to input 1 character _charget Called by low level interface routines write and read respectively Source file including the main function DebugConsole_Sample c Calls the standard library functions scanf and printf in the main function Caution E1 E20 To use the debug console do not switch the system clo
609. update status of the downloaded load module file in the line number area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Coverage Shows the coverage area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Address Shows the address area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Op Code Shows the instruction code area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the mixed display mode is selected Shows the label area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool and the mixed display mode is selected Shows the event area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool Shows the main area Note that this item is enabled only when connected to the debug tool 3 Displaying multiple source files in a single panel If the current PC moves between multiple source files when debugging e g when performing step execution each of the source files will be opened in a separate editor panel If this is the case the recycle mode lets you display multiple source files in a single Editor panel Select the Use window recycling check box on the General Text Editor category in the Option dialog box to enable this feature R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 ztENESAS Page 70 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2
610. used Select the breakpoint type from the drop down list according to their functions Software break Temporarily replaces instruction code for the specified address with break instruction and stops the program when this instruction is executed Once set it is handled as a software break event Hardware break The debug tool consecutively checks the break condition while the program is in execution and stops the program when the condition is met defauttyNote Once set it is handled as a hardware break event Note Hardware break is a before execution or pre execution break as the program will break before executing instruction at the specified address This function is implemented using the debug tool resources R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 94 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set a breakpoint Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembled text is displayed In the main area of the Editor panel or the event area of the Disassemble panel click on the location where you want to set a breakpoint A breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line When a breakpoint is set the following event mark appears at the breakpoint location and the source text line disassembled text line is highlighted It is interpreted as if a break event software or hardware break event has been set at the targe
611. ut PUTC Outputs 1 byte to standard output File I O FOPEN Opens a file FCLOSE Closes a file FGETC Accepts 1 byte from a file FPUTC Outputs 1 byte to a file FEOF Checks termination of a file FSEEK Moves the file pointer to a specified position FTELE Obtains the file pointer s current position Remark For details about low level interface routines see Chapter 7 Startup in the separate edition CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Coding To implement I O function of the simulator first specify the I O address in the Stream O address property within the Stream O Simulator category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab This can be done by entering address expressions in the range of 0 to last address of address space directly from the keyboard Figure B 1 Stream I O Category E StreamI O0 Select stream 1 0 mode Simulator mode Use stream 1 0 function No C Stream 1 0 address FES 0 Upon detecting Branch to subroutine instruction BSR JSR to a specified address while executing instructions of the program the simulator performs an I O process using the contents of the R1 and R2 registers as parameters R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 448 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS Therefore be sure that the following setting is made in the program before an I O process is performe
612. uted for by symbol name offset value f Connection status with the debug tool Shows the current status of connection with the debug tool using the following icons and character strings Connection Status Displayed content Currently connected 3 Debug tool name Currently disconnected Bia DISCONNECT g Run Break timer result Displays the results of measurements by the Run Break timer see Section 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop The display unit is determined by the measurement results However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool When overflowed OVERFLOW R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 209 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE h Debug tool status Displays the current status of each function of the debug tool using the following icons However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Function In operation Not in operation Enable Disable Trace Timer Coverage Simulator Cautions 1 E1 E20 The trace function does not go to a Disable state even when you click the subject icon E20 JTAG When you click the icon of the trace function the contents set in the Usage of trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab is toggled between Trace and Realtime RAM monitor Simulator Whe
613. utton or by selecting from a context menu The display forms of data values and types of access are shown below The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box are set R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 330 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Display example default Type of memory access R Data value Text color Standard color Read access Background color PaleGreen W Data value Text color Standard color Write access Background color Orange VECTData value Text color Standard color Vector read access Simulator Background color PaleGreen Toolbar Acquires latest information from the debug tool to update the display However this is disabled during program execution Clears initializes the trace memory and also clears the display of this panel However this is disabled during program execution Restarts the trace function that was halted during program execution However this is disabled when the program is halted or when tracer operation is underway Temporarily stops the trace function during program execution However this is disabled when the program is halted or when the tracer is halted Opens the Trace Search dialog box Shows the following buttons for changing the form in which values are displayed How
614. ve set at a time select Select All on the context menu and then click the button not including the built in events 2 17 6 Entering comments for events For any event you ve set you can enter a comment freely as you wish To enter a comment select an event for which you want to enter a comment click in the Comment area and then enter any text directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode After editing a comment press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the editing area to complete your editing A comment can be entered in up to 256 characters which is saved as the setting of the current user 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting Here the points to note when you make settings of various events are described 1 Allowable number of valid events 2 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution 3 Other precautions 1 Allowable number of valid events The number of events that can be set as valid or Enabled events at the same time are subject to the following limitations Therefore if this limit is exceeded when you set one or more new valid events some of the events that are already set need to be Disabled before you can set a new one Table 2 22 Allowable Number of Valid Events RX600 Series Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serialy E20 JTAG Software break Hardware break execution related before execution
615. vent E1 Serial E1 JTAG i 100 microseconds i E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX600 Series Approx 72 hours Depends on CPU clock frequency 32 bit counter x 2 channels or 64 bit counter x 1 channel Overflow detection available E1 Serial E1 JTAG i 100 microseconds i E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX200 Series Approx 72 hours Depends on CPU clock frequency 24 bit counter x 1 channel Overflow detection available Simulator Depends on CPU clock frequency Depends on CPU clock frequency 64 bit counter 64 bit counter Overflow detection available Overflow detection available R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 164 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator This section describes coverage measurements that are conducted using the coverage facility There are several kinds of coverage measurement methods Of these CubeSuite performs in areas designated below a code coverage measurement of fetch related operations on source lines and functions CO coverage and a data coverage measurement of access related operations on variables The areas in which CubeSuite performs coverage measurements are as follows Table 2 18 Subject Areas of Coverage Measurements Debug Tool Subject area Internal ROM RAM emulation ROM RAM Remark C0 coverage refers to an instruction coverage rate statement coverage For example if all instructions statements
616. vent execution related also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on execution related break event settings including the allowable number of valid events R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 96 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 98 Example of Setting a Break Event Execution related on a Line in the Disassembled Text E1 E20 Disassemble1 21 80 E views FFF TASAI Vf MoV L 7 EE osg 7e X tad 604 214 3 sort 8 efg sy o54 ef ry d j E Register to Watch1 Go to Here Set PC to Here Go To Go to Symbol wa i chang Break Settings Trace Settings Timer Settings Edit Disassemble Edit Code View Mixed Display Jump to Source Register Action Event Ctrl G gt 02H R8 RO R6 _rand Ri Ri R6 1H R8 _tutorial 15H RO R1 sort gt hm Set Hardware Break ll Set Software Break Sh Set Combination Break rh Set Read Combination Break to A wit M Break Option Set Write Combination Break to Set R W Combination Break to Figure 2 99 Example of a Break Event Execution related in the Events Panel E1 E20 Events 9 Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer M 8 Combination Break Detail After Execution Tutorial c 50 Oxffff8574 J Detail Comment
617. ving all trace data From the drop down list to the left select All Trace Data The text box to the right is disabled All currently acquired trace data will be saved The range currently visible in the panel is specified by default Upload data Specify the range of memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions Note These are the numbers shown in the Number area of the Trace panel Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function Save Saves the data to a file with the specified filename in the specified format Cancel Cancels the save and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 418 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box When CubeSuite is performing a process that takes time it displays the progress of the process This dialog box closes automatically when the process under execution is finished Figure A 71 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Loading project 2 5 TITTITILIITIILII III iii iii iio Function button 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Functio
618. viously specified address range is applied when data is saved 2 By selecting File gt gt Print you can print the image currently displayed on this panel 2 6 3 Executing a build in parallel with other processes CubeSuite provides a facility to automatically start a build in synchronism with the timing described below rapid build function 1 For other than the debug only project When any of the C source files C source files assembler source files header files link directive files symbol information files object module files relocatable module files or library files added to the project is updated When a file to build is added or removed from the project When the order in which object module files is linked is changed When the properties of the build tool or the file to build are changed 2 For the debug only project When a C source file C source file assembler source file or header file added to the debug only project is saved after editing When a C source file C source file assembler source file or header file is added or removed from the debug only project When properties of the debug only project are changed R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 79 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS By enabling the rapid build function it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operation To choose to enable or disable the rapid build function c
619. w Previews a source file before printing Save As dialog box Saves the content of a file or panel under a new name Select Data Save File dialog box Selects a file in which to save data Open Option Setting File dialog box Selects the option setting file to import to the Option dialog box Save Option Setting File dialog box R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2012 Saves the set contents of the Option dialog box to an option setting file ztENESAS Page 202 of 471 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the first window that opens when you launch CubeSuite When debugging a program use this window to control program execution and opening of each panel Figure A 1 Main Window Tutorial CubeSuite Project Tree DER 1 2 Project Tree Sl AX E1UTAG Property Tutorial Project Intent ROMTAM J RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Size of intemal ROMIKE tes Ay CCRX Build Tool Size of DataFlash memoryl KByte A RX E1 JTAG Debug Tool E Clock Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Main clock fs EXT AL E E File Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 j Tutorial c Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memo No dbsct c E Connection with Emulator j intprg c Emulator serial No E1 OFS001340 j resetprg c Size of internal ROM KB ytes 3 4 j sbrk c Size of the intemal ROM sort c vecttbl c
620. w many internal clocks one peripheral clock is equivalent Default 1 How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 64 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 226 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Tool Settings tab The Debug Tool Settings tab displays detailed information for each category shown below and changes settings made on it 1 Memory 2 Access Memory While Running 3 Register 4 Break E1 E20 5 System E1 E20 6 Trace 7 Timer E1 E20 8 Coverage Simulator 9 Stream I O Simulator 10 Execution Mode Simulator 11 Instruction Decode Cache Simulator Figure A 10 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 Serial RX600 Series Property Sl RX E1 Serial Property 1 B Memory Memory mappings 23 Verify on writing to memory Yes 2 p E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interval ms 500 3 gt E Register PC display during the execution Yes Display update interval for PC ms 500 4 gt E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break 5 gt E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing t
621. will break when the value Oxb is written to the watch expression g_IntBuf Figure 2 105 Example of Setting a Break Event Access related on a Watch expression Simulator Watch B X X Notation Value Type Byte Size Address Memo it Set Read Break to 7 ta a Trace Outp Set Write Break to jb r Periodic Updating E Refresh From the context menu above the watch me Force Read Yalue expression g_IntBuf select Access Break gt gt S j EF Add New Watch Set Write Break to Enter a value in the text box in the menu then press the Enter key Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the watch expression g_IntBuf 2 Edit a break event access related to a variable IO register When editing a break event access related you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the break event access related you wish to edit on the Events panel click Edit Condition on the context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the selected break event For details on editing in the dialog box see 2 Editing access related events R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 102 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Delete a break event access related to a variable IO register When deleting a break event access related you have set first open the Eve
622. wn Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Ifthe specified address expression is the symbol and its size can be recognized everything from the start address to the end address of that symbol is displayed selected b Specifying whether the address expression is evaluated automatically or manually The timing with which the display start position will be changed is determined by selection of the Move when Stop checkbox and by the Move button Move when The address expression is automatically evaluated after the program has halted and the Stop caret moves to the address derived from that calculation The address expression is not automatically evaluated after the program has halted In this case the address expression is evaluated by clicking the Move button Move If the Move when Stop checkbox is not checked the address expression is evaluated by clicking this button and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation 2 Changing the display form of values The forms in which data are displayed in the address area memory value area and character string area can be changed freely by using the toolbar buttons shown below However these buttons are disabled during program execution R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 107 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Notation Show
623. ws panels and dialog boxes used when debugging with CubeSuite A 1 Description The table below lists the windows panels and dialog boxes associated with debugging Table A 1 List of Window Panel and Dialog Box Window panel and dialog box names Functional description Main window Controls program execution and opens each panel Project Tree panel Selects the debug tool to be used Property panel Displays detailed information on a debug tool selected on the Project Tree panel and changes settings Editor panel Displays or edits a text file and performs source level debugging Memory panel Displays memory values and changes values Disassemble panel Displays disassembled result of memory values and performs line assembly and instruction level debugging CPU Register panel Displays contents of CPU registers program and system registers and changes values IOR panel Displays contents of I O registers and changes values Local Variables panel Displays contents of local variables and changes values Watch panel Displays contents of registered watch expressions and changes values Call Stack panel Displays information on call stack used in function calls Trace panel Displays trace data acquired from the debug tool Events panel Displays detailed information on set events chooses to enable or disable events and deletes events Output pane
624. xecuting the program This area has the following features a Alternation of CPU register values To change the value of a CPU register value select the CPU register value you want to change and click it again and then enter a new value directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the editing mode When you ve finished editing the value of a CPU register press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area The value you ve changed is written into the register of the debug tool R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 291 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Saving of CPU register values By choosing Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the entire content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save the CPU register values see 4 Saving the displayed CPU register contents c Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the CPU Register panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the CPU Register panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom ou
625. xecution time from start to stop 155 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section 157 2 14 4 Range of measurable time 164 Measure Coverage Simulator 165 2 15 1 Configure the coverage measurement 165 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results 165 Set an Action into Programs 168 2 16 1 Insert printf 168 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator 170 Event Management 173 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled 174 2 17 2 Displaying only a specific type of event 175 2 17 3 Jump to an event address 175 2 17 4 Editing detailed settings of events 175 2 17 5 Deleting events 182 2 17 6 Entering comments for events 183 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 183 Setting Up the Hook Process 187 Using the Debug Console 190 About Input Value 196 2 20 1 Input rule 196 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 199 2 20 3 Icons for invalid input 200 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 201 A 1 Description 201 APPENDIX B I O FUNCTIONS 448 B 1 Standard I O and File I O 448 APPENDIX C INDEX 463 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CubeSuite is an integrated developing environment platform for the RX family V850 family RL78 family 78KOR microcontroller and 78KO microcontroller CubeSuite comprehensively supports the operations required for program development such as designing
626. xt Editor 2 C Observe registered files changing S L Others eae 3 Gi User Information p Show dependency files in project tree 4 gt Output quality report file when build is successful 5 gt Enable Break Sound 6 Observe downloaded load module files changing 7 gt Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only 8 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool menu Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enable the rapid build function N default Do not use the rapid build function Note This function automatically starts a build each time you save the edited source file By enabling this function it is possible to edit source files and build the project at the same time When using this function we recommend that you save frequently after editing the source file R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 427 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing Monitor the source files registered in the project for any changes and start a rapid build when the files are edited and saved by an external editor etc Do not monitor the source files registered in the project for any changes Do not start a rapid build when the files are edited and saved
627. y one section is available for timer measurement Remark In addition to the above event types following event types may be displayed if events breakpoints or break events have been set on the Function List panel or Variable List panel of the analysis tool For breakpoints for a function Break at start of function For break events for a variable Access break to variable d Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Event panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Events panel while the focus is placed in the Event panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 If the panel is closed after the zoom ratio is changed the changed zoom ratio is retained next time the panel will open at the changed zoom ratio 2 Detail area This area displays detailed information on each event The content of displayed information differs with event type The following shows how to read detailed information for each event type R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 338 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 13 Detailed Information by Event Type Type of event Display
628. y open CubeSuite jumps to it directly Displaying a code coverage measurement result Simulator If the coverage function is enabled the lines included in the area that was subjected to coverage measurement are highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result acquired by program execution For details about coverage measurement see 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator Saving disassembled data By choosing Save Disassemble Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Data Save dialog box and save the content of this panel in a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save disassembled data see 5 Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results Zoom in or out on a view To zoom in and out of the Disassemble panel view change the zoom ratio by using the drop down list on the toolbar of the Main window while the focus is placed in the Disassemble panel You can also change the zoom ratio by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 25 Remark The following items can be customized by setting the Option dialog box Display fonts Colors of reserved words comments Gets latest information from the debug tool to update the display Selects mixed
629. y time it is used d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection between E1 and the target board in this category Figure 2 12 Connection with Target Board Category E1 Serial E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 Yes FINE baud rate bps 2000000 Figure 2 13 Connection with Target Board Category E1 JTAG E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAs 200mA4 No JTAG clock MHz 16 5 R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 18 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA Specify whether to supply power to the target system from E1 Select Yes to supply power to the target system No is selected by default Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 Supply voltage Specify the power voltage supplied to the target system from the following drop down list This property appears only when the Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA property is set to Yes The voltage value that can be specified differs depending on the type of the microcontroller Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 Communications method Displays the method of communication used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system Specifying RX E1 Se
630. ying Search location Select Current document file name from the drop down list c Clicking the Find Previous Find Next button When the Find Previous button is clicked search will start in the order from the large address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel When the Find Next button is clicked search will start in the order from the small address number to large and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel Remarks 1 Click the Option button to specify to use wild card case sensitivity word by word search and so on 2 Inthe Find and Replace dialog box various search replace operation can be performed by selecting Find in Files Quick Replace or Replace in Files tab R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 72 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 6 Moving to a specified line To move to a specified address in the source text select Go To from the context menu and use the Go to Line dialog box that is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to move to a specified line Figure 2 78 Move to the Specified Line in Source Text Go to Line Dialog Box Go to Line Line number 1 133 bs a Specifying Line number valid line range valid line range shows the range of valid lines in the current file Directly enter a decimal value as the number of the line you want to
631. ymbols Shift JIS 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana EUC JP 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana UTF 8 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji include Chinese characters and 1 byte Katakana UTF 16 Unicode 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji include Chinese characters and 1 byte Katakana 2 Escape sequence Escape sequences that are allowed to input are as follows Table 2 27 Escape Sequence List Escape sequence Description null character Alert Backspace Horizontal tab New line Vertical tab Form feed Carriage return Double quotation mark Single quotation mark Question mark handled as a question mark if is entered Backslash R20UT2175EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 196 of 471 Oct 01 2012 CubeSuite V1 03 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Number Notations allowed when entering numbers are as follows Table 2 28 Notation List Notation Outline Binary number Start with Ob and continues with the numbers from 0 to 1 Case insensitive for alphabets Octal number Start with 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 7 Decimal number Start without 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 Hexadecimal number Start with Ox and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 and alphabets a to f
632. ytes added in _ when they are displayed Note that this area cannot be edited 5 Address area This area displays the addresses of local variables If variables are assigned to registers the register names are displayed This area cannot be edited Toolbar Each button in the toolbar are disabled during program execution E Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal default Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in Float Note that non 4 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Displays values on this panel in Double Note that non 8 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Adds the hexadecimal equivalent in bracket y at the end of the value Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code Displays string variables in Shift_JIS co
633. ze so that dragging or the like operation with the mouse will be improved Caution Even when after a scroll range is set in this dialog box the addresses represented by specified address expressions are altered by execution of a line assemble etc the scroll range is not corrected Remark Movement in a panel window by the Page Up Page Down Up or Down key or a button at the end of the scroll bar or by selection of a jump related menu is possible even outside the scroll range Figure A 67 Scroll Range Settings Dialog Box Scroll Range Settings 1 Start address 2 End addresss Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel select View and then click the button in the toolbar On the Memory panel select View and then Settings Scroll Range on the context menu On the Disassemble panel select View and then click the EJ button in the toolbar On the Disassemble panel select View and then Settings Scroll Range on the context menu Description of each area 1 Start address area Specify the start address of a range to be scrolled Enter an address expression directly in the text box specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Note that if All in the drop down lis

RX Debug - Renesas Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents